09b48b50 2

SINAMICS G120C
s SINAMICS G120
Inverter with CU230P-2, CU240B/E-2,
CU250S-2 Control Units
Product information 07/2015
Modified behavior when commissioning the drive

With firmware V4.7 SP3, the commissioning Wizard has been revised and standardized for the
following inverters:
• SINAMICS G120 with PM240, PM240-2 or PM330 Power Module
• SINAMICS G120C
The SINAMICS application classes Standard Drive Control, Dynamic Drive Control and Expert
have been newly developed. The commissioning Wizard sets the application class depending on
the particular inverter:
• Standard Drive Control for SINAMICS G120C and SINAMICS G120 with Power Module
PM240, PM240-2 up to frame size FSD
• Dynamic Drive Control for SINAMICS G120 with PM240, PM240-2 Power Modules from
frame size FSD and with PM330 Power Modules
• Expert for SINAMICS G120 with PM230, PM250 and PM260 Power Modules
Motor data identification (MotID) is permanently set for Standard Drive Control. After the
commissioning Wizard has been exited, the inverter responds to the first ON command as follows:
1. The inverter carries out a MotID with the motor at a standstill. The duration of the MotID,
when compared to firmware V4.7, was shortened to approx. ⅓.
2. The inverter accelerates the motor to the specified setpoint. The second ON command
after the MotID is not necessary for Standard Drive Control.
For Dynamic Drive Control, a MotID is also set as default with the motor at a standstill. The default
setting can be changed:
• In addition, you can also select the MotID with rotating measurement. The inverter
optimizes the closed-loop speed control based on the results of the rotating measurement.
• You can select as to whether, after the MotID, the motor immediately accelerates to the
specified setpoint, or a second ON command is required.
To a large extent, Expert corresponds to the commissioning Wizard for firmware < V4.7 SP3.
A MotID is not set as default. You can select the following:
• No MotID, MotID with measurement with the motor at a standstill or MotID with rotating
measurement
• After the MotID, the motor immediately accelerates to the specified setpoint, or only after a
second ON command.
The following commissioning tools support the new commissioning wizard:
• STARTER from 4.4 SP1 or higher
• Startdrive from V13 SP1 and higher with Hardware Support Package V4.7 SP3
• IOP from V1.6 and higher
• BOP-2
Converter with the CU240B-2 and ___________________
Changes in this manual
CU240E-2 Control Units Fundamental safety

___________________
instructions 1
2
___________________
Introduction
SINAMICS
3
___________________
Description
SINAMICS G120
Converter with the CU240B-2 and
___________________
Installing 4
CU240E-2 Control Units
5
___________________
Commissioning
Operating Instructions
___________________
Advanced commissioning 6
Backing up data and series
___________________
commissioning 7
___________________
Corrective maintenance 8
Alarms, faults and system
___________________
messages 9
10
___________________
Technical data
A
___________________
Appendix
Edition 04/2015, Firmware V4.7 SP3
Original instructions
04/2015, FW V4.7 SP3
A5E34259001B AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E34259001B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2010 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 06/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Changes with respect to Edition 04/2014 of the Manual
New hardware In Chapter

New PM240-2 Power Modules, FSD… FSE Power Module (Page 29)
Revised PM230 Power Module with new Article numbers Installing Power Modules (Page 58)
supported: Technical data, PM240-2 (Page 387)
• IP55 degree of protection: 6SL3223-0DE . . - . . G .
• IP20 degree of protection and Push Through: 6SL321 . -
1NE . . - . . G .
PM230 IP55 Power Modules for the CU240E-2 Control Unit. Power Module (Page 29)
The installation and technical data of the PM230 IP55 Power
Modules are described in the operating instructions for the
SINAMICS G120P, see: SINAMICS G120 inverters with
CU230P-2 Control Units
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13218/m
an).
New functions in firmware V4.7 SP3 In Chapter

Increased number of motors that are supported Supported motor series (Page 46)
SINAMICS “Standard Drive Control” and “Dynamic Drive Grundinbetriebnahme für Experten
Control” application classes to simplify commissioning and (Page 124)
increase the degree of ruggedness of the closed-loop motor Commissioning (Page 111)
control.
Motor control (Page 214)
SINAMICS application classes are only available with
PM240, PM240-2 and PM330 Power Modules.
Moment of inertia estimator with moment of inertia precontrol Moment of inertia estimator
to automatically adapt the speed controller (Page 230)
Friction characteristic with automatic plotting to optimize the Friction characteristic (Page 227)
speed controller
Automatic setting of the PID technology controller (autotun- PID technology controller (Page 278)
ing)
Load torque monitoring extended to include the following System protection (Page 284)
functions:
• Protection against blocking, leakage and dry running
operation in pump applications
• Protection against blocking and broken belts in fan appli-
cations
Line contactor control using a digital output of the inverter to Line contactor control (Page 276)
save energy when the motor is switched off
The bus error LED for communication via USS and Modbus Operating states indicated on LEDs
can be switched off (Page 362)
Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Operating Instructions, 04/2015, FW V4.7 SP3, A5E34259001B AB 5
You can find an overview of all new and modified functions in firmware V4.7 SP3 in Section
New and extended functions (Page 433).
Corrections In Chapter
Minimum operating temperature: -10 °C (and not 0 °C) Technical data (Page 381)
Revised descriptions In Chapter

Terminal strips, factory setting and default settings of the Terminal strips on CU240B-2 Control
terminal strips Units (Page 83)
Terminal strips on CU240E-2 Control
Units (Page 89)
Startdrive commissioning tool added Commissioning with a PC (Page 130)
Manual speed control optimization Optimizing the closed-loop speed
controller (Page 224)

6 Operating Instructions, 04/2015, FW V4.7 SP3, A5E34259001B AB
Table of contents
Changes in this manual ........................................................................................................................... 5

1 Fundamental safety instructions ............................................................................................................ 13
1.1 General safety instructions .....................................................................................................13
1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF) ..............................................................17
1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) ......................................................................17
1.4 Industrial security ....................................................................................................................18
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems....................................................................................19
2 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 21
2.1 About the Manual ....................................................................................................................21
2.2 Guide through the manual ......................................................................................................22
3 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 25
3.1 Identifying the converter..........................................................................................................25
3.2 Overview of Control Units .......................................................................................................27
3.3 Power Module .........................................................................................................................29
3.3.1 Power Modules in degree of protection IP20 and with push-through system ........................29
3.3.2 Power Module in IP55 degree of protection / UL Type 12 ......................................................32
3.4 Components for the Power Modules ......................................................................................33
3.4.1 Accessories for installation and shielding ...............................................................................33
3.4.2 Line filter .................................................................................................................................34
3.4.3 Line reactor .............................................................................................................................36
3.4.4 Output reactor .........................................................................................................................38
3.4.5 Sine-wave filter .......................................................................................................................41
3.4.6 Braking resistor .......................................................................................................................43
3.4.7 Brake Relay ............................................................................................................................45
3.4.8 Safe Brake Relay ....................................................................................................................45
3.5 Supported motor series...........................................................................................................46
3.6 Tools to commission the converter .........................................................................................48
4 Installing ............................................................................................................................................... 49
4.1 Overview of the inverter installation ........................................................................................49
4.2 Connecting inverters in compliance with EMC .......................................................................50
4.2.1 EMC-compliant connection of the converter ...........................................................................50
4.2.2 Avoiding electromagnetic influence (EMI) ..............................................................................50
4.2.3 Amount the shield plate onto the Power Module ....................................................................52
4.3 Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors ......................................................................56
4.4 Installing Power Modules ........................................................................................................58

Table of contents
4.5 Connecting the line supply, motor, and inverter components ................................................ 68
4.5.1 Permissible line supplies ........................................................................................................ 68
4.5.2 Connecting the inverter .......................................................................................................... 72
4.5.3 Connecting a motor holding brake ......................................................................................... 76
4.5.4 Connecting a braking resistor ................................................................................................ 78
4.6 Installing Control Unit ............................................................................................................. 80
4.6.1 Plugging the Control Unit onto the Power Module ................................................................. 80
4.6.2 Overview of the interfaces ..................................................................................................... 81
4.6.3 Fieldbus interface allocation .................................................................................................. 82
4.6.4 Terminal strips on CU240B-2 Control Units ........................................................................... 83
4.6.4.1 Factory setting of the CU240B-2 interfaces ........................................................................... 84
4.6.4.2 Default settings of the CU240B-2 interfaces .......................................................................... 86
4.6.5 Terminal strips on CU240E-2 Control Units ........................................................................... 89
4.6.5.1 Factory setting of the CU240E-2 interfaces ........................................................................... 91
4.6.5.2 Default settings of the CU240E-2 interfaces .......................................................................... 93
4.6.6 Wiring the terminal strip ....................................................................................................... 103
4.6.7 Connecting the inverter to the fieldbus ................................................................................ 104
4.6.7.1 PROFINET ........................................................................................................................... 105
4.6.7.2 PROFIBUS ........................................................................................................................... 108
5 Commissioning ....................................................................................................................................111
5.1 Commissioning guidelines ................................................................................................... 111
5.2 Preparing for commissioning ............................................................................................... 112
5.2.1 Collecting motor data ........................................................................................................... 112
5.2.2 Inverter factory setting ......................................................................................................... 112
5.2.3 Defining additional requirements for the application ............................................................ 114
5.3 Commissioning using a BOP-2 operator panel .................................................................... 115
5.3.1 Inserting the BOP-2 ............................................................................................................. 115
5.3.2 Starting basic commissioning .............................................................................................. 116
5.3.3 Standard Drive Control ........................................................................................................ 118
5.3.4 Dynamic Drive Control ......................................................................................................... 120
5.3.5 Grundinbetriebnahme für Experten...................................................................................... 124
5.4 Commissioning with a PC .................................................................................................... 130
5.4.1 Creating a project ................................................................................................................. 131
5.4.2 Transfer inverters connected via USB into the project ........................................................ 131
5.4.3 Go online and start the configuration wizards ...................................................................... 133
5.4.4 Standard Drive Control ........................................................................................................ 136
5.4.5 Dynamic Drive Control ......................................................................................................... 137
5.4.6 Configuration for experts ...................................................................................................... 138
5.4.7 Identify motor data ............................................................................................................... 141
5.5 Restoring the factory setting ................................................................................................ 143
5.5.1 Resetting the safety functions to the factory setting ............................................................ 143
5.5.2 Restore the factory settings (without safety functions) ........................................................ 145
6 Advanced commissioning.....................................................................................................................147
6.1 Overview of the inverter functions........................................................................................ 147
6.2 Inverter control ..................................................................................................................... 149
6.2.1 Switching the motor on and off ............................................................................................ 149
6.2.2 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip ...................................................................... 151

Table of contents
6.2.2.1 Digital inputs .........................................................................................................................152

6.2.2.2 Safety-related input ...............................................................................................................154
6.2.2.3 Digital outputs .......................................................................................................................156
6.2.2.4 Analog inputs ........................................................................................................................157
6.2.2.5 Analog outputs ......................................................................................................................161
6.2.3 Inverter control using digital inputs .......................................................................................164
6.2.4 Two-wire control: method 1 ..................................................................................................165
6.2.5 Two-wire control, method 2 ..................................................................................................166
6.2.6 Two-wire control, method 3 ..................................................................................................167
6.2.7 Three-wire control, method 1 ................................................................................................168
6.2.8 Three-wire control, method 2 ................................................................................................169
6.2.9 Running the motor in jog mode (JOG function) ....................................................................170
6.2.10 Control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET with the PROFIdrive profile .....................................171
6.2.10.1 Control and status word 1 .....................................................................................................173
6.2.10.2 Control and status word 3 .....................................................................................................176
6.2.10.3 NAMUR message word ........................................................................................................178
6.2.10.4 Data structure of the parameter channel ..............................................................................178
6.2.10.5 Examples of the parameter channel .....................................................................................182
6.2.10.6 Extend telegrams and change signal interconnection ..........................................................183
6.2.10.7 Configuring the IP interface ..................................................................................................185
6.2.10.8 Slave-to-slave communication ..............................................................................................185
6.2.10.9 Acyclically reading and writing inverter parameters .............................................................186
6.2.11 Control via additional fieldbuses ...........................................................................................187
6.2.11.1 Modbus RTU .........................................................................................................................187
6.2.11.2 USS .......................................................................................................................................190
6.2.11.3 Ethernet/IP ............................................................................................................................193
6.2.12 Switching over the inverter control (command data set) ......................................................194
6.3 Setpoints ...............................................................................................................................196
6.3.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................196
6.3.2 Analog input as setpoint source............................................................................................197
6.3.3 Specifying the setpoint via the fieldbus.................................................................................198
6.3.4 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source .........................................................................199
6.3.5 Fixed speed as setpoint source ............................................................................................201
6.4 Setpoint calculation ...............................................................................................................204
6.4.1 Overview of setpoint processing ...........................................................................................204
6.4.2 Invert setpoint .......................................................................................................................205
6.4.3 Inhibit direction of rotation .....................................................................................................206
6.4.4 Skip frequency bands and minimum speed ..........................................................................207
6.4.5 Speed limitation ....................................................................................................................208
6.4.6 Ramp-function generator ......................................................................................................209
6.5 Motor control .........................................................................................................................214
6.5.1 V/f control ..............................................................................................................................214
6.5.1.1 Characteristics of U/f control .................................................................................................216
6.5.1.2 Optimizing motor starting ......................................................................................................219
6.5.2 Vector control with speed controller ......................................................................................222
6.5.2.1 Overview ...............................................................................................................................222
6.5.2.2 Optimizing the closed-loop speed controller .........................................................................224
6.5.2.3 Advanced settings .................................................................................................................226
6.5.2.4 Friction characteristic ............................................................................................................227
6.5.2.5 Moment of inertia estimator ..................................................................................................230
6.5.2.6 Pole position identification ....................................................................................................235

Table of contents
6.5.3 Torque control ...................................................................................................................... 236

6.6 Protection functions ............................................................................................................. 238
6.6.1 Inverter temperature monitoring........................................................................................... 238
6.6.2 Motor temperature monitoring using a temperature sensor ................................................ 241
6.6.3 Protecting the motor by calculating the motor temperature ................................................. 244
6.6.4 Overcurrent protection ......................................................................................................... 246
6.6.5 Limiting the maximum DC link voltage ................................................................................. 247
6.7 Application-specific functions ............................................................................................... 249
6.7.1 Unit changeover ................................................................................................................... 249
6.7.1.1 Changing over the motor standard ...................................................................................... 250
6.7.1.2 Changing over the unit system ............................................................................................ 251
6.7.1.3 Changing over process variables for the technology controller ........................................... 251
6.7.1.4 Switching units with STARTER ............................................................................................ 252
6.7.2 Calculating the energy saving .............................................................................................. 254
6.7.3 Electrically braking the motor ............................................................................................... 256
6.7.3.1 DC braking ........................................................................................................................... 257
6.7.3.2 Compound braking ............................................................................................................... 260
6.7.3.3 Dynamic braking .................................................................................................................. 262
6.7.3.4 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line .................................................................... 263
6.7.4 Motor holding brake ............................................................................................................. 264
6.7.5 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running ...................................................... 268
6.7.6 Automatic switch-on ............................................................................................................. 270
6.7.7 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control) ....................................................................................... 274
6.7.8 Line contactor control ........................................................................................................... 276
6.7.9 PID technology controller ..................................................................................................... 278
6.7.9.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 278
6.7.9.2 Setting the controller ............................................................................................................ 279
6.7.9.3 Optimizing the controller ...................................................................................................... 283
6.7.10 System protection ................................................................................................................ 284
6.7.10.1 No-load monitoring, blocking protection, stall protection ..................................................... 285
6.7.10.2 Load monitoring ................................................................................................................... 287
6.7.11 Free function blocks ............................................................................................................. 293
6.7.11.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 293
6.7.11.2 Further information ............................................................................................................... 293
6.8 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function ................................................................................ 294
6.8.1 Function description ............................................................................................................. 294
6.8.2 Prerequisite for STO use ..................................................................................................... 296
6.8.3 Commissioning STO ............................................................................................................ 296
6.8.3.1 Commissioning tools ............................................................................................................ 296
6.8.3.2 Protection of the settings from unauthorized changes......................................................... 297
6.8.3.3 Configuring a safety function ............................................................................................... 297
6.8.3.4 Configuring a safety function ............................................................................................... 298
6.8.3.5 Interconnecting the "STO active" signal............................................................................... 299
6.8.3.6 Setting the filter for safety-related inputs ............................................................................. 301
6.8.3.7 Setting the forced checking procedure (test stop) ............................................................... 304
6.8.3.8 Activating the settings and checking the digital inputs......................................................... 305
6.8.3.9 Approval - completing commissioning ................................................................................. 309
6.9 Switchover between different settings ................................................................................. 312
7 Backing up data and series commissioning ..........................................................................................315

Table of contents
7.1 Backing up and transferring settings using a memory card..................................................316

7.1.1 Saving setting on memory card ............................................................................................317
7.1.2 Transferring the setting from the memory card ....................................................................320
7.1.3 Safely remove the memory card ...........................................................................................323
7.2 Saving settings on a PC........................................................................................................325
7.3 Saving settings and transferring them using an operator panel ...........................................329
7.4 Other ways to back up settings .............................................................................................330
7.5 Write and know-how protection ............................................................................................331
7.5.1 Write protection .....................................................................................................................331
7.5.2 Know-how protection ............................................................................................................332
7.5.2.1 Settings for know-how protection ..........................................................................................334
7.5.2.2 Generating an exception list for know-how protection ..........................................................336
8 Corrective maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 337
8.1 Replacing inverter components ............................................................................................337
8.1.1 Overview of replacing converter components ......................................................................337
8.1.2 Replacing a Control Unit with enabled safety function .........................................................339
8.1.3 Replacing the Control Unit without the safety functions enabled .........................................343
8.1.4 Replacing the Control Unit without data backup ...................................................................346
8.1.5 Replacing a Control Unit with active know-how protection ...................................................347
8.1.6 Replacing a Power Module with enabled safety function .....................................................349
8.1.7 Replacing a Power Module without the safety function being enabled ................................350
8.2 Firmware upgrade and downgrade .......................................................................................351
8.2.1 Upgrading the firmware.........................................................................................................352
8.2.2 Firmware downgrade ............................................................................................................354
8.2.3 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade ..............................................356
8.3 Reduced acceptance after component replacement and firmware change .........................357
8.4 If the converter no longer responds ......................................................................................358
9 Alarms, faults and system messages .................................................................................................. 361
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs .....................................................................................362
9.2 System runtime .....................................................................................................................364
9.3 Alarms ...................................................................................................................................365
9.4 Faults ....................................................................................................................................368
9.5 List of alarms and faults ........................................................................................................372
9.6 Identification & maintenance data (I&M) ...............................................................................379
10 Technical data .................................................................................................................................... 381
10.1 Technical data, CU240B-2 Control Unit................................................................................381
10.2 Technical data, CU240E-2 Control Unit................................................................................383
10.3 Technical data, Power Modules ............................................................................................386
10.3.1 Technical data, PM240-2 ......................................................................................................387
10.3.1.1 High overload - low overload PM240-2.................................................................................387
10.3.1.2 General data, 200 V inverters ...............................................................................................387
10.3.1.3 Power-dependent data, 200 V inverters ...............................................................................389

Table of contents
10.3.1.4 General data, 400 V inverters .............................................................................................. 394

10.3.1.5 Power-dependent data, 400 V inverters .............................................................................. 396
10.3.1.6 General data, 600 V inverters .............................................................................................. 402
10.3.1.7 Power-dependent data, FSD ... FSF, 600 V ........................................................................ 403
10.3.2 Technical data, PM240 ........................................................................................................ 405
10.3.2.1 General data, PM240 ........................................................................................................... 406
10.3.2.2 Power-dependent data, PM240 ........................................................................................... 407
10.3.3 Technical data, PM230 IP20 ................................................................................................ 413
10.3.3.1 General data, PM230 - IP20 ................................................................................................ 414
10.3.3.2 Power-dependent data, PM230, IP20 .................................................................................. 415
10.3.4.1 High Overload - Low Overload............................................................................................. 422
10.3.4.2 General data, PM250 ........................................................................................................... 423
10.3.5.1 High Overload - Low Overload............................................................................................. 427
10.3.5.2 General data, PM260 ........................................................................................................... 428
10.3.6 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation ...................................................... 430
10.4 Restrictions for special ambient conditions .......................................................................... 431
A Appendix .............................................................................................................................................433
A.1 New and extended functions................................................................................................ 433
A.2 Parameter ............................................................................................................................ 439
A.3 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel ..................................................................................... 442
A.3.1 Changing settings using BOP-2 ........................................................................................... 443
A.3.2 Changing indexed parameters ............................................................................................. 444
A.3.3 Directly entering the parameter number and value.............................................................. 444
A.3.4 A parameter cannot be changed.......................................................................................... 445
A.4 The device trace in STARTER ............................................................................................. 446
A.5 Interconnecting signals in the inverter ................................................................................. 449
A.5.1 Fundamentals ...................................................................................................................... 449
A.5.2 Example ............................................................................................................................... 451
A.6 Connecting the safety-related input ..................................................................................... 453
A.7 Acceptance tests for the safety functions ............................................................................ 454
A.7.1 Recommended acceptance test .......................................................................................... 454
A.7.2 Machine documentation ....................................................................................................... 457
A.7.3 Log of the settings for the basic functions, firmware V4.4 ... V4.7 SP2 ............................... 459
A.8 Manuals and technical support ............................................................................................ 460
A.8.1 Manuals for your inverter ..................................................................................................... 460
A.8.2 Configuring support .............................................................................................................. 461
A.8.3 Product Support ................................................................................................................... 462
A.9 Mistakes and improvements ................................................................................................ 462
Index ...................................................................................................................................................463

Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions
DANGER
Danger to life due to live parts and other energy sources
Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, six steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for shutdown and notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Disconnect the machine from the supply.
– Switch off the machine.
– Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
– Check that it really is in a no-voltage condition, from phase conductor to phase
conductor and phase conductor to protective conductor.
– Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
– Ensure that the motors cannot move.
3. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water.
4. Isolate or neutralize all hazardous energy sources by closing switches, grounding or
short-circuiting or closing valves, for example.
5. Secure the energy sources against switching on again.
6. Ensure that the correct machine is completely interlocked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse
sequence.
WARNING
Danger to life through a hazardous voltage when connecting an unsuitable power supply
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.

Fundamental safety instructions
WARNING
Danger to life when live parts are touched on damaged devices
Improper handling of devices can cause damage.
For damaged devices, hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed
components; if touched, this can result in death or severe injury.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged devices.
WARNING
Danger to life through electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not
used (e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.
WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when not grounded
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when
touched, can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when opening plug connections in operation
When opening plug connections in operation, arcs can result in severe injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a no-voltage state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.
WARNING
Danger to life due to fire spreading if housing is inadequate
Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage.
• Install devices without a protective housing in a metal control cabinet (or protect the
device by another equivalent measure) in such a way that contact with fire is prevented.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.

WARNING
Danger to life through unexpected movement of machines when using mobile wireless
devices or mobile phones
Using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones with a transmit power > 1 W closer than
approx. 2 m to the components may cause the devices to malfunction, influence the
functional safety of machines therefore putting people at risk or causing material damage.
• Switch the wireless devices or mobile phones off in the immediate vicinity of the
components.
WARNING
Danger to life due to the motor catching fire in the event of insulation overload
There is higher stress on the motor insulation through a ground fault in an IT system. If the
insulation fails, it is possible that death or severe injury can occur as a result of smoke and
fire.
• Use a monitoring device that signals an insulation fault.
• Correct the fault as quickly as possible so the motor insulation is not overloaded.
WARNING
Danger to life due to fire if overheating occurs because of insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent
fire and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in
increased downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for
the respective component.
WARNING
Danger of an accident occurring due to missing or illegible warning labels
Missing or illegible warning labels can result in accidents involving death or serious injury.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, in the national language if
necessary.
• Replace illegible warning labels.
NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.

WARNING
Danger to life when safety functions are inactive
Safety functions that are inactive or that have not been adjusted accordingly can cause
operational faults on machines that could lead to serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before
commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system,
including all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted
and activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.
Note
Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety notices in the
Safety Integrated manuals.
WARNING
Danger to life or malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed
parameterization
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in
turn can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
• Respond to possible malfunctions by applying suitable measures (e.g. EMERGENCY
STOP or EMERGENCY OFF).

1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF)
1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF)
WARNING
Danger to life from electromagnetic fields
Electromagnetic fields (EMF) are generated by the operation of electrical power equipment
such as transformers, converters or motors.
People with pacemakers or implants are at a special risk in the immediate vicinity of these
devices/systems.
• Ensure that the persons involved are the necessary distance away (minimum 2 m).
1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Damage through electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged
individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of
aluminum foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table
with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

1.4 Industrial security
1.4 Industrial security
Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit this address
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. For more information, visit this address (http://support.automation.siemens.com).
WARNING
Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulation (e.g. by viruses, Trojan horses, malware, worms) can cause unsafe
operating states to develop in your installation which can result in death, severe injuries
and/or material damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
You will find relevant information and newsletters at this address
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
You will find further information at this address
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security
concept.

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

The control and drive components of a drive system are approved for industrial and
commercial use in industrial line supplies. Their use in public line supplies requires a
different configuration and/or additional measures.
These components may only be operated in closed housings or in higher-level control
cabinets with protective covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are
used.
These components may only be handled by qualified and trained technical personnel who
are knowledgeable and observe all of the safety instructions on the components and in the
associated technical user documentation.
When assessing the machine's risk in accordance with the respective local regulations (e.g.,
EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer must take into account the following
residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and cables
and connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of the control system
– External influences/damage
2. In the event of a fault, exceptionally high temperatures, including an open fire, as well as
emissions of light, noise, particles, gases, etc. can occur inside and outside the inverter,
e.g.:
– Component failure
– Software errors
Inverters of the Open Type/IP20 degree of protection must be installed in a metal control
cabinet (or protected by another equivalent measure) such that contact with fire inside
and outside the inverter is not possible.

3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example,

– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Condensation/conductive contamination
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a
risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too
close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
Note
The components must be protected against conductive contamination (e.g. by installing them
in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12).
Assuming that conductive contamination at the installation site can definitely be excluded, a
lower degree of cabinet protection may be permitted.
For more information about residual risks of the components in a drive system, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.

Introduction 2
2.1 About the Manual
Who requires the operating instructions and what for?

These operating instructions primarily address fitters, commissioning engineers and machine
operators. The operating instructions describe the devices and device components and
enable the target groups being addressed to install, connect-up, set, and commission the
converters safely and in the correct manner.
What is described in the operating instructions?

These operating instructions provide a summary of all of the information required to operate
the converter under normal, safe conditions.
The information provided in the operating instructions has been compiled in such a way that
it is sufficient for all standard applications and enables drives to be commissioned as
efficiently as possible. Where it appears useful, additional information for entry level
personnel has been added.
The operating instructions also contain information about special applications. Since it is
assumed that readers already have a sound technical knowledge of how to configure and
parameterize these applications, the relevant information is summarized accordingly. This
relates, e.g. to operation with fieldbus systems and safety-related applications.
What is the meaning of the symbols in the manual?

An operating instruction starts here.
This concludes the operating instruction.
The subsequent text is applicable for an operator panel.
The following text applies if you are using a PC with STARTER.
Symbol for inverter functions.

See also: Overview of the inverter functions (Page 147).

Introduction
2.2 Guide through the manual
Section In this section you will find answers to the following questions:
Description (Page 25) • How is the inverter marked?
• What components make up the inverter?
• What optional components are available for the inverter?
• What is the purpose of the optional components?
• Which motors can be fed from the inverter?
• What commissioning tools are there?
Installing (Page 49) • Which sequence is recommended when installing the inverter?
• What does EMC-compliant installation actually mean?
• What options are available to install optional components below the inverter?
• What are the inverter dimensions?
• What mounting and installation materials are required when installing the inverter?
• To which line supplies can the inverter be connected?
• How is the inverter connected to the line supply?
• How is the braking resistor connected to the inverter?
• Which terminals and fieldbus interfaces does the inverter have?
• What are the interface functions?
Commissioning (Page 111) • Which motor data are required for commissioning
• How is the inverter set in the factory?
• What is the commissioning procedure?
• How do you restore the inverter factory settings?
Advanced commissioning • Which functions are included in the inverter hardware?
(Page 147)
• How do the functions interoperate with one another?
• How are the functions set?
Backing up data and series • Why is it necessary to back up the inverter settings?
commissioning (Page 315)
• What options are available to back up the settings?
• How does the data backup function?
• How do you prevent the inverter settings from being changed?
• How do you prevent the inverter settings from being read out?
Corrective maintenance • How do you replace inverter components?
(Page 337)
• How do you change the firmware version of the inverter?
Alarms, faults and system • What is the meaning of the LEDs provided on the inverter?
messages (Page 361)
• How does the system runtime you respond?
• How does the inverter save alarms and faults?
• What do the inverter alarms and faults mean?
• How are inverter faults resolved?
• Which I&M data are saved in the inverter?

Introduction
Section In this section you will find answers to the following questions:
Technical data (Page 381) • What is the inverter technical data?
• What do "High Overload" and "Low Overload" mean?
Appendix (Page 433) • What are the new functions of the current firmware?
• What are the most important inverter parameters?
• How is the inverter operated using the BOP-2 operator panel?
• How does the device trace function in STARTER?
• How can signal interconnections be changed in the inverter firmware?
• What does "BiCo technology" mean?
• Where can you find additional manuals and information about the inverter?

Introduction

Description 3
Use for the intended purpose
The inverter described in this manual is a device to control a three-phase motor. The inverter
is designed for installation in electrical installations or machines.
It has been approved for industrial and commercial use on industrial networks. Additional
measures have to be taken when connected to public grids.
The technical specifications and information about connection conditions are indicated on
the rating plate and in the operating instructions.
3.1 Identifying the converter
Main components of the inverter

Each SINAMICS G120 inverter comprises a Con-
trol Unit and a Power Module.
• The Control Unit controls and monitors the
connected motor.
• The Power Module provides the connections
for line supply and motor.
The following data is provided on the Power Module type plate (①):
● Designation: e.g. Power Module 240
● Technical data: Voltage and current
● Article number: e. g. 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0
● Version: e.g. A02
The following data can be found on the Control Unit type plate (②):
● Designation: e.g. Control Unit CU240E-2 DP-F
● Article number: e.g. 6SL3244-0BB13-1PA0
● Version: e.g. A02 (hardware)

Description
3.1 Identifying the converter
Additional inverter components

The following components are available so that you can adapt the inverter to different
applications and ambient conditions:
● Line filter (Page 34)
● Line reactor (Page 36)
● Output reactor (Page 38)
● Sine-wave filter (Page 41)
● Braking resistor (Page 43)
● Brake Relay to control a motor holding brake (Page 45)
● Basic Operator Panel 2 (BOP-2) (Page 48)
● Intelligent Operator Panel (IOP) (Page 48)

Description
3.2 Overview of Control Units
Table 3- 1 Control Units CU240B-2 …
The CU240B-2 Control Units differ with regard to the type of fieldbus.
Designation CU240B-2 CU240B-2 DP
Article number 6SL3244-0BB00-1BA1 6SL3244-0BB00-1PA1
Fieldbus USS, Modbus RTU PROFIBUS DP
Table 3- 2 Control Units CU240E-2 …
The CU240E-2 Control Units have, in comparison to the CU240B-2, an extended terminal strip with
integrated safety functions.
The CU240E-2 Control Units differ with regard to the type of fieldbus and the scope of the integrated
safety functions.
Designation CU240E-2 CU240E-2 F CU240E-2 DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2 PN CU240E-2

DP-F PN-F
Article number 6SL3244- 6SL3244- 6SL3244- 6SL3244- 6SL3244- 6SL3244-
0BB12-1BA1 0BB13-1BA1 0BB12-1PA1 0BB13-1PA1 0BB12-1FA0 0BB13-1FA0
Fieldbus USS, Modbus USS, Modbus PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP PROFINET IO, PROFINET IO,
RTU RTU EtherNet/IP EtherNet/IP
Integrated safety Basic functions Extended func- Basic functions Extended func- Basic functions Extended func-
functions tions tions tions
Memory cards
Table 3- 3 Memory cards to back up inverter settings
Scope of delivery Article number

Memory card without firmware 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0
Memory card with firmware V4.6 6SL3054-7EG00-2BA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 6SL3054-7EH00-2BA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 SP3 6SL3054-7TB00-2BA0

Description
Shield connection kit for the Control Unit

The shield connection kit is an optional component. The shield connection kit comprises the
following components:
● Shield plate
● Elements for optimum shield support and strain relief of the signal and communication
cables
Table 3- 4 Article Nos.
Shield connection kit 2 for CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units with 6SL3264-1EA00-0HA0
all fieldbus interfaces with the exception of PROFINET.
Shield connection kit 3 for the CU230P-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units 6SL3264-1EA00-0HB0
with PROFINET interface.
Distance connector for operation with a PM230 Power Module IP55

When operating the Control Unit with a PM230 IP55 Power Module, a distance connector is
required between the Control Unit and operator panel (BOP-2 or IOP).
Figure 3-1 Distance connector for the connection between a Control Unit and Operator panel
Ordered and supplied from KnorrTec, Article No. 10055500

Description
3.3 Power Module
3.3 Power Module

Important data on the Power Modules is provided in this section. Further information is
contained in the hardware installation manuals listed in Section Manuals for your inverter
(Page 460).
All power data refers to rated values or to power for operation with low overload (LO).
Which Power Module can I use with the Control Unit?
Table 3- 5 Permitted combinations of Control Unit and Power Module
Control Unit Power Module

PM340 1AC PM230 PM240 PM240-2 PM250 PM260
IP20 and IP55
push-
through
system
CU240B-2… --- ✓ --- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CU240E-2… ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3.3.1 Power Modules in degree of protection IP20 and with push-through system
Figure 3-2 Examples of Power Modules with degree of protection IP20

Description
3.3 Power Module
Figure 3-3 Examples of Power Modules with Push Through technology FSA … FSC
PM230, 3 AC 400 V - pump and fan applications

The PM230 Power Module is available without a filter or with integrated class A line filter.
Article number range: • IP20: 6SL3210-1NE…

• Push Through: 6SL3211-1NE…
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF

Power range (kW), IP20 0.37 … 3 4 … 7.5 11 … 18.5 22 … 37 45 … 55 75 … 90
Power range (kW), PT 3 7.5 18.5 --- --- ---
PM240-2 - for standard applications

The PM240-2 Power Module is available without a filter or with an integrated class A line
filter. The PM240-2 permits dynamic braking via an external braking resistor.
1 AC / 3 AC 200 V
Article number range: • IP20: 6SL3210-1PB…, 6SL3210-1PC…

• Push Through: 6SL3211-1PB…
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE

Power range (kW), IP20 0.55 … 0.75 1.1 … 2.2 3.0 … 4.0 11 … 18.5 22 … 30
Power range (kW), PT 0.75 2.2 4.0 --- ---
3 AC 400 V
Article number range: • IP20: 6SL3210-1PE…

• Push Through: 6SL3211-1PE…

Power range (kW), IP20 0.55 … 3.0 4.0 … 7.5 11 … 15 18.5 … 37 45 … 55
Power range (kW), PT 3.0 7.5 15 --- ---

Description
3.3 Power Module
3 AC 600 V
Article number range: • IP20: 6SL3210-1PH…

• Push Through: 6SL3211-1PH…

Power range (kW), IP20 --- --- --- 11 … 37 45 … 55
Power range (kW), PT --- --- --- --- ---
PM240, 3 AC 400 V - for standard applications

The PM240 Power Module is available without a filter or with an integrated class A line filter
with degree of protection IP20. The PM240 allows dynamic braking via an external braking
resistor.
Article number range: 6SL3224-0BE… and 6SL3224-0XE…
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF GX

Power range (kW) 0.37 … 1.5 2.2 … 4 7.5 … 15 18.5 … 30 37 … 45 55 … 132 160 … 250
PM340, 1 AC 200 V - Standard applications

with degree of protection IP20. The PM340 allows dynamic braking via an external braking
resistor.
Range of article numbers: 6SL3210-1SB1…
Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF FSGX

Power range (kW) 0.12 … 0.75 -- -- -- -- -- ---
PM250, 3 AC 400 V - Applications with energy recovery

with degree of protection IP20. The PM250 permits dynamic braking with energy recovery
into the line supply.
Article number range, IP20: 6SL3225-0BE …
Frame size FSC FSD FSE FSF

Power range (kW) 7.5 … 15 18.5 … 30 37 … 45 55 … 90
PM260, 3 AC 690 V - Applications with energy recovery

with degree of protection IP20. A sine-wave filter is fitted to the motor. The PM260 permits
dynamic braking with energy recovery into the line supply.
Article number range, IP20: 6SL3225-0BH…
Frame size FSD FSF

Power range (kW) 11 … 18.5 30 … 55

Description
3.3 Power Module
3.3.2 Power Module in IP55 degree of protection / UL Type 12
PM230, 3 AC 400 V, degree of protection IP55 / UL Type 12

Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF
Power range (kW) Filter Class A 0.37 … 3 4 … 7.5 11 … 18.5 22 … 30 37 … 45 55 … 90
Filter Class B 0.37 … 3 4 … 7.5 11 … 15 18.5 … 30 37 … 45 55 … 90
The Power Module PM230 IP55/UL Type 12 is suitable for installation close to the motor.
Article number range: 6SL3223-0DE…

Description
3.4 Components for the Power Modules
3.4.1 Accessories for installation and shielding
Shield connection kit

Establish the shield and strain relief for the power con-
nections using the shield connection kit.
The shield connection kit comprises a shield plate and
serrated strips with screws.
Table 3- 6 Article numbers for the shield connection kit
Frame Power Modules PM240, PM250 PM260 PM230, PM240-2

size
FSA 6SL3262-1AA00-0BA0 - The shield connection kit is
FSB 6SL3262-1AB00-0DA0 - included in the scope of
delivery
FSC 6SL3262-1AC00-0DA0 -
FSD 6SL3262-1AD00-0DA0 6SL3262-1FD00-0CA0
FSE 6SL3262-1AD00-0DA0 -
FSF 6SL3262-1AF00-0DA0 6SL3262-1FF00-0CA0
Adapter for mounting on DIN mounting rails for PM240, PM250 and PM260
You can use the adapter for rail mounting to mount the Power Module onto two mounting
rails with a center-to-center distance of 100 mm.
Frame size Article numbers for adapters for mounting on DIN mounting rails
FSA 6SL3262-1BA00-0BA0
FSB 6SL3262-1BB00-0BA0

Description
3.4.2 Line filter
With a line filter, the inverter can achieve

a higher radio interference class. An ex-
ternal filter is not required for inverters
with integrated line filter.
Adjacent examples of line filters.
The line filter corresponds to Class A or B
according to EN55011: 2009.
for PM240 for PM240 GX

FSA
NOTICE
The line filter is damaged when operated on inadmissible line supplies
The line filter is only suitable for operation on TN or TT line systems with a grounded
neutral point. The line filter is damaged if operated on all other line supplies.
• For inverters equipped with line filter, only connect to TN or TT line systems with a
grounded neutral point.
External line filters for PM240
Power Module Power Line filter, class A

FSA 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0, 0.37 kW … 1.5 kW 6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0
6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0
FSF 6SL3224-0BE38-8UA0, 110 kW … 132 kW 6SL3203-0BE32-5AA0
6SL3224-0BE41-1UA0
GX 6SL3224-0XE41-3UA0, 160 kW … 200 kW 6SL3000-0BE34-4AA0
6SL3224-0XE41-6UA0
6SL3224-0XE42-0UA0 250 kW 6SL3000-0BE36-0AA0

Description
Power Module Power Line filter, class B

FSA 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0, 0.37 kW … 1.5 kW 6SE6400-2FB00-6AD0
6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0
FSB 6SL3224-0BE22-2AA0, 2.2 kW … 4.0 kW 6SL3203-0BE21-6SA0
6SL3224-0BE23-0AA0,
6SL3224-0BE24-0AA0
FSC 6SL3224-0BE25-5UA0, 7.5 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3203-0BD23-8SA0
6SL3224-0BE27-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE31-1UA0
External line filters for PM250
Power Module Power Line filter, class B

FSC 6SL3225-0BE25-5AA0, 7.5 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3203-0BD23-8SA0
6SL3225-0BE27-5AA0,
6SL3225-0BE31-1AA0

Description
3.4.3 Line reactor
The line reactor supports the overvoltage protection,

smoothes the harmonics in the line supply and bridges
commutation dips. For the Power Modules subsequent-
ly listed, a line reactor is suitable in order to dampen the
specified effects.
for PM240 for PM240-2
NOTICE
Damage to inverter as a result of a missing line reactor
Depending on the Power Module and line supply, if a line reactors is not used, this can
result in damage to the inverter and other components in the electrical plant or system.
• Install a line reactor if the relative short-circuit voltage of the line supply is below 1%
Line reactors for PM240
Power Module Power Line reactor

FSA 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0, 0.37 kW … 0.55 kW 6SE6400-3CC00-2AD3
6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0
6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0, 0.75 kW … 1.1 kW 6SE6400-3CC00-4AD3
6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0
6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0 1.5 kW 6SE6400-3CC00-6AD3
FSB 6SL3224-0BE22-2☐A0, 2.2 kW … 3.0 kW 6SL3203-0CD21-0AA0
6SL3224-0BE23-0☐A0
6SL3224-0BE24-0☐A0 4.0 kW 6SL3203-0CD21-4AA0
FSC 6SL3224-0BE25-5☐A0, 7.5 kW … 11.0 kW 6SL3203-0CD22-2AA0
6SL3224-0BE27-5☐A0
6SL3224-0BE31-1☐A0 15.0 kW 6SL3203-0CD23-5AA0
FSD 6SL3224-0BE31-5☐A0, 18.5 kW … 22 kW 6SL3203-0CJ24-5AA0
6SL3224-0BE31-8☐A0
6SL3224-0BE32-2☐A0 30 kW 6SL3203-0CD25-3AA0
FSE 6SL3224-0BE33-0☐A0, 37 kW … 45 kW 6SL3203-0CJ28-6AA0
6SL3224-0BE33-7☐A0
FSF 6SL3224-0BE34-5☐A0, 55 kW … 75 kW 6SE6400-3CC11-2FD0
6SL3224-0BE35-5☐A0
6SL3224-0BE37-5☐A0 90 kW 6SE6400-3CC11-7FD0
6SL3224-0BE38-8UA0 110 kW 6SL3000-0CE32-3AA0
6SL3224-0BE41-1UA0 132 kW 6SL3000-0CE32-8AA0
GX 6SL3224-0XE41-3UA0 160 kW 6SL3000-0CE33-3AA0
6SL3224-0XE41-6UA0, 200 kW … 250 kW 6SL3000-0CE35-1AA0
6SL3224-0XE42-0UA0

Description
Line reactors for PM240-2, 200 V

FSA 6SL3210-1PB13-0☐L0, 0.55 kW … 0.75 kW 6SL3203-0CE13-2AA0
6SL3210-1PB13-8☐L0
FSB 6SL3210-1PB15-5☐L0, 1.1 kW … 2.2 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-0AA0
6SL3210-1PB17-4☐L0,
6SL321☐-1PB21-0☐L0
FSC 6SL3210-1PB21-4☐L0, 3 kW … 4 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-8AA0
6SL321☐-1PB21-8☐L0
6SL321☐-1PC22-2☐L0, 5.5 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3203-0CE23-8AA0
6SL3210-1PC22-8☐L0
Line reactors for PM240-2, 400 V

FSA 6SL3210-1PE11-8☐L1, 0.55 kW … 1.1 kW 6SL3203-0CE13-2AA0
6SL3210-1PE12-3☐L1,
6SL3210-1PE13-2☐L1
FSB 6SL3210-1PE14-3☐L1, 1.5 kW … 3 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-0AA0
6SL321☐-1PE16-1☐L1,
6SL321☐-1PE18-0☐L1
FSC 6SL3210-1PE21-1☐L0, 4 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-8AA0
6SL3210-1PE21-4☐L0,
6SL321☐-1PE21-8☐L0
6SL3210-1PE22-7☐L0, 11 kW … 15 kW 6SL3203-0CE23-8AA0
6SL321☐-1PE23-3☐L0
Line reactors for PM340 1AC
Article number Power Line reactor

FSA 6SL3210-1SB11-0☐A0, 0.12 kW … 0.37 kW 6SE6400-3CC00-4AB3
6SL3210-1SB12-3☐A0
6SL3210-1SB14-0☐A0 0.75 kW 6SE6400-3CC01-0AB3

Description
3.4.4 Output reactor
Output reactors reduce the voltage stress on

the motor windings and the load placed on the
inverter as a result of capacitive recharging
currents in the cables. An output reactor is
required for shielded motor cables longer than
50 m or unshielded motor cables longer than for GX
100 m.
for PM240 FSA, FSB
NOTICE
The output reactor is damaged if the inverter pulse frequency is too high
The output reactors are designed for pulse frequencies of 4 kHz. The output reactor can
overheat if the inverter is operated with pulse frequencies > 4 KHz. Excessively high
temperatures damage the output reactor.
• Operate the inverter with an output reactor with a maximum pulse frequency of 4 kHz.
Output reactors for PM240 Power Module
Power Module Power Output reactor

FSA 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0, 0.37 kW … 1.5 kW 6SE6400-3TC00-4AD2
6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0
FSB 6SL3224-0BE22-2☐A0, 2.2 kW … 4.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-0CA0
6SL3224-0BE23-0☐A0,
6SL3224-0BE24-0☐A0
FSC 6SL3224-0BE25-5☐A0, 7.5 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3202-0AJ23-2CA0
6SL3224-0BE27-5☐A0,
6SL3224-0BE31-1☐A0
FSD 6SL3224-0BE31-5☐A0 18.5 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
6SL3224-0BE31-8☐A0 22 kW 6SE6400-3TC03-8DD0
6SL3224-0BE32-2☐A0 30 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
FSE 6SL3224-0BE33-0☐A0 37 kW 6SE6400-3TC08-0ED0
6SL3224-0BE33-7☐A0 45 kW 6SE6400-3TC07-5ED0
FSF 6SL3224-0BE34-5☐A0 55 kW 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
6SL3224-0BE35-5☐A0 75 kW 6SE6400-3TC15-4FD0
6SL3224-0BE37-5☐A0 90 kW 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
6SL3224-0BE38-8UA0 110 kW 6SL3000-2BE32-1AA0
6SL3224-0BE41-1UA0 132 kW 6SL3000-2BE32-6AA0
GX 6SL3224-0XE41-3UA0 160 kW 6SL3000-2BE33-2AA0
6SL3224-0XE41-6UA0 200 kW 6SL3000-2BE33-8AA0
6SL3224-0XE42-0UA0 250 kW 6SL3000-2BE35-0AA0

Description
Output reactors for PM250 Power Module

FSC 6SL3225-0BE25-5☐A0, 7.5 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3202-0AJ23-2CA0
6SL3225-0BE27-5☐A0,
6SL3225-0BE31-1☐A0
FSD 6SL3225-0BE31-5☐A0 18,5 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
6SL3225-0BE31-8☐A0 22 kW 6SE6400-3TC03-8DD0
6SL3225-0BE32-2☐A0 30 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
FSE 6SL3225-0BE33-0☐A0 37 kW 6SE6400-3TC08-0ED0
6SL3225-0BE33-7☐A0 45 kW 6SE6400-3TC07-5ED0
FSF 6SL3225-0BE34-5☐A0 55 kW 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
6SL3225-0BE35-5☐A0 75 kW 6SE6400-3TC15-4FD0
6SL3225-0BE37-5☐A0 90 kW 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
Output reactors for PM230 Power Modules (IP20)

FSA 6SL3210-1NE11-3☐L0, 0.37 kW … 2.2 kW 6SL3202-0AE16-1CA0
6SL3210-1NE11-7☐L0,
6SL3210-1NE12-2☐L0,
6SL3210-1NE13-1☐L0,
6SL3210-1NE14-1☐L0,
6SL3210-1NE15-8☐L0
6SL3210-1NE17-7☐L0 3.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE18-8CA0
FSB 6SL3210-1NE21-0☐L0, 4.0 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-8CA0
6SL3210-1NE21-3☐L0,
6SL3210-1NE21-8☐L0
FSC 6SL3210-1NE22-6☐L0, 11.0 kW … 18.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-8CA0
6SL3210-1NE23-2☐L0,
6SL3210-1NE23-8☐L0
FSD 6SL3210-1NE24-5☐L0 22 kW 6SE6400-3TC03-8DD0
6SL3210-1NE26-0☐L0 30 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
FSE 6SL3210-1NE27-5☐L0 37 kW 6SE6400-3TC08-0ED0
6SL3210-1NE28-8☐L0 45 kW 6SE6400-3TC07-5ED0
FSF 6SL3210-1NE31-1☐L0 55 kW 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
6SL3210-1NE31-5☐L0 75 kW 6SE6400-3TC15-4FD0
Output reactors for PM230 push-through Power Modules

FSA 6SL3211-1NE17-7☐L0 3.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE18-8CA0
FSB 6SL3211-1NE21-8☐L0 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-8CA0
FSC 6SL3211-1NE23-8☐L0 18.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-8CA0

Description
Output reactors for PM240-2 Power Modules, 200 V

FSA 6SL3210-1PB13-0☐L0, 0.55 kW … 0.75 kW 6SL3202-0AE16-1CA0
6SL321☐-1PB13-8☐L0
FSB 6SL3210-1PB15-5☐L0 1.1 kW
6SL3210-1PB17-4☐L0 1.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE18-8CA0
FSB 6SL321☐-1PB21-0☐L0 2.2 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-8CA0
FSC 6SL3210-1PB21-4☐L0, 3 kW … 4 kW
6SL321☐-1PB21-8☐L0
6SL321☐-1PC22-2☐L0, 5.5 kw … 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-8CA0
6SL3210-1PC22-8☐L0
Output reactors for PM240-2 Power Module, 400 V

FSA 6SL3210-1PE11-8☐L1, 0.55 kW … 2.2 kW 6SL3202-0AE16-1CA0
6SL3210-1PE12-3☐L1,
6SL3210-1PE13-2☐L1,
6SL3210-1PE14-3☐L1,
6SL3210-1PE16-1☐L1
6SL321☐-1PE18-0UL1 3 kW 6SL3202-0AE18-8CA0
FSB 6SL3210-1PE21-1☐L0, 4 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-8CA0
6SL3210-1PE21-4☐L0,
6SL321☐-1PE21-8☐L0
FSC 6SL3210-1PE22-7☐L0, 11 kW … 15 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-8CA0
6SL321☐-1PE23-3☐L0

Description
3.4.5 Sine-wave filter
The sine-wave filter at the inverter output limits the voltage rate-of-rise and
the peak voltages at the motor winding. The maximum permissible length
of motor feeder cables is increased to 300 m.
The following applies when using a sine-wave filter:
• Operation is only permissible with pulse frequencies of 4 kHz up to
8 kHz.
For Power Modules with a power rating starting at 110 kW and higher
(as stamped on the type plates), only 4 kHz is permissible.
• The inverter power is reduced by 5%. for FSF
• The maximum output frequency of the inverter is 150 Hz at 380 V to
480 V.
• Operation and commissioning may only be performed with the motor
connected, as the sine-wave filter is not no-load proof.
• An output reactor is superfluous.
Sine-wave filter for PM240 Power Module
Power Module Power Sine-wave filter

FSA 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0, 0.37 kW … 0.75 kW 6SL3202-0AE20-3SA0
6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0
6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0, 1.1 kW … 1.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE20-6SA0
6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0
FSB 6SL3224-0BE22-2☐A0, 2.2 kW … 3.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-1SA0
6SL3224-0BE23-0☐A0
6SL3224-0BE24-0☐A0 4.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE21-4SA0
FSC 6SL3224-0BE25-5☐A0 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE22-0SA0
6SL3224-0BE27-5☐A0, 11.0 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-3SA0
6SL3224-0BE31-1☐A0
FSD 6SL3224-0BE31-5☐A0, 18.5 kW … 22 kW 6SL3202-0AE24-6SA0
6SL3224-0BE31-8☐A0
6SL3224-0BE32-2☐A0 30 kW 6SL3202-0AE26-2SA0
FSE 6SL3224-0BE33-0☐A0, 37 kW … 45 kW 6SL3202-0AE28-8SA0
6SL3224-0BE33-7☐A0
FSF 6SL3224-0BE34-5☐A0, 55 kW … 75 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-5SA0
6SL3224-0BE35-5☐A0
6SL3224-0BE37-5☐A0 90 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-8SA0
6SL3224-0BE38-8UA0, 110 kW … 132 kW 6SL3000-2CE32-3AA0
6SL3224-0BE41-1UA0
GX 6SL3224-0XE41-3UA0 160 kW 6SL3000-2CE32-8AA0
6SL3224-0XE41-6UA0 200 kW 6SL3000-2CE33-3AA0
6SL3224-0XE42-0UA0 250 kW 6SL3000-2CE34-1AA0

Description
Sine-wave filter for PM250 Power Module
Power Module Power Sine-wave filter

FSC 6SL3225-0BE25-5☐A0 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE22-0SA0
6SL3225-0BE27-5☐ A0, 11.0 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-3SA0
6SL3225-0BE31-1☐A0
FSD 6SL3225-0BE31-5☐A0, 18.5 kW … 22 kW 6SL3202-0AE24-6SA0
6SL3225-0BE31-8☐A0
6SL3225-0BE32-2☐A0 30 kW 6SL3202-0AE26-2SA0
FSE 6SL3225-0BE33-0☐A0, 37 kW … 45 kW 6SL3202-0AE28-8SA0
6SL3225-0BE33-7☐A0
FSF 6SL3225-0BE34-5☐A0, 55 kW … 75 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-5SA0
6SL3225-0BE35-5☐A0
6SL3225-0BE37-5☐A0 90 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-8SA0

Description
3.4.6 Braking resistor
The braking resistor allows loads with a high moment of inertia to be quickly braked.
The Power Module controls the braking resistor via its integrated braking module.
Adjacent, as example, a braking resistor for PM240 and PM340 Power Modules,
frame size FSA, which can be mounted below the device.
Braking resistors for PM240
Power Modules Power Braking Mod- Braking resistor

ule
FSA 6SL3224-0BE13-7UA0, 0.37 kW … 1.5 kW --- 6SE6400-4BD11-0AA0
6SL3224-0BE15-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE17-5UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-1UA0,
6SL3224-0BE21-5UA0
FSB 6SL3224-0BE22-2☐A0, 2.2 kW … 4.0 kW --- 6SL3201-0BE12-0AA0
6SL3224-0BE23-0☐A0,
6SL3224-0BE24-0☐A0
FSC 6SL3224-0BE25-5☐A0, 7.5 kW … 15.0 kW --- 6SE6400-4BD16-5CA0
6SL3224-0BE27-5☐A0
6SL3224-0BE31-1☐A0
FSD 6SL3224-0BE31-5☐A0, 18.5 kW … 30 kW --- 6SE6400-4BD21-2DA0
6SL3224-0BE31-8☐A0,
6SL3224-0BE32-2☐A0
FSE 6SL3224-0BE33-0☐A0, 37 kW … 45 kW --- 6SE6400-4BD22-2EA1
6SL3224-0BE33-7☐A0
FSF 6SL3224-0BE34-5☐A0, 55 kW … 90 kW --- 6SE6400-4BD24-0FA0
6SL3224-0BE35-5☐A0,
6SL3224-0BE37-5☐A0
6SL3224-0BE38-8UA0, 110 kW … 132 kW --- 6SE6400-4BD26-0FA0
6SL3224-0BE41-1UA0
GX 6SL3224-0XE41-3UA0 160 kW --- 6SL300-1BE31-3AA0
6SL3224-0XE41-6UA0, 200 kW … 250 kW 6SL3300- 6SL3000-1BE32-5AA0
6SL3224-0XE42-0UA0 1AE32-5AA0

Description
Braking resistors for PM240-2, 200 V
Power Module Power Braking resistor

FSA 6SL3210-1PB13-0❒L0, 0.55 kW … 0.75 kW GWHS 167-60x30-K
6SL321❒-1PB13-8❒L0
FSB 6SL3210-1PB15-5❒L0, 1.1 kW … 2.2 kW GWHS 217-60x30-K
6SL3210-1PB17-4❒L0,
6SL321❒-1PB21-0❒L0
FSC 6SL3210-1PB21-4❒L0, 3 kW … 4 kW GWHS 337-60x30-K
6SL321❒-1PB21-8❒L0
6SL3210-1PC22-2❒L0, 5.5 kW … 7.5 kW GWHS 337-120x30-K
6SL3210-1PC22-8❒L0
FSD 6SL3210-1PC24-2❒L0, 11 kW … 15 kW 6SE6400-4BC18-0DA0
6SL3210-1PC25-4❒L0
6SL3210-1PC26-8❒L0 18.5 kW 6SE6400-4BC21-2EA0
FSE 6SL3210-1PC28-8❒L0 22 kW
6SL3210-1PC31-1❒L0 30 kW 6SE6400-4BC22-5FA0

FSA 6SL3210-1PE11-8❒L1, 0.55 kW … 1.5 kW 6SL3201-0BE14-3AA0
6SL3210-1PE12-3❒L1,
6SL3210-1PE13-2❒L1,
6SL3210-1PE14-3❒L1
6SL321❒-1PE16-1❒L1, 2.2 kW … 3.0 kW 6SL3201-0BE21-0AA0
6SL321❒-1PE18-0❒L1
FSB 6SL3210-1PE21-1❒L0, 4 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3201-0BE21-8AA0
6SL3210-1PE21-4❒L0,
6SL321❒-1PE21-8❒L0
FSC 6SL3210-1PE22-7❒L0, 11 kW … 15 kW 6SL3201-0BE23-8AA0
6SL321❒-1PE23-3❒L0
FSD 6SL3210-1PE23-8❒L0, 18.5 kW … 22 kW 6SE6400-4BD21-2DA0
6SL3210-1PE24-5❒L0
6SL3210-1PE26-0❒L0, 30 kW … 37 kW 6SE6400-4BD22-2EA0
6SL3210-1PE27-5❒L0
FSE 6SL3210-1PE28-8❒L0, 45 kW … 55 kW 6SE6400-4BD24-0FA0
6SL3210-1PE31-1❒L0

Description

FSD 6SL3210-1PH21-4❒L0, 11 kW … 37 kW type R16
6SL3210-1PH22-0❒L0,
6SL3210-1PH22-3❒L0,
6SL3210-1PH22-7❒L0,
6SL3210-1PH23-5❒L0,
6SL3210-1PH24-2❒L0
FSE 6SL3210-1PH25-2❒L0, 45 kW … 55 kW type R26
6SL3210-1PH26-2❒L0
Braking resistors for PM340, 1AC
Article number Power Braking resistor

FSA 6SL3210-1SB11-0☐A0, 6SL3210-1SB12- 0.12 kW … 0.75 kW 6SE6400-4BC05-0AA0
3☐A0, 6SL3210-1SB14-0☐A0
3.4.7 Brake Relay
The brake relay has a switch contact (NO contact) to control the motor
brake coil.
Article number: 6SL3252-0BB00-0AA0
3.4.8 Safe Brake Relay
The Safe Brake Relay controls a 24 V motor brake and monitors the
brake control for a short circuit or interrupted cable.
Article number: 6SL3252-0BB01-0AA0
Additional information about Safe Brake Relayis provided in the Func-
tion Manual Safety Integrated, also see Section: Manuals for your in-
verter (Page 460).

Description
3.5 Supported motor series
Supported motors
The inverter is designed for the following motor series:
SIMOTICS GP, SIMOTICS SD IEC motors SIMOTICS M main motors
1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 and 1LE1 standard induction 1PH8 induction motors
motors
Multi-motor drives are permissible, i.e. multiple
motors operated on one inverter. See also: Multi-
motor drive
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/
en/84049346).
SIMOTICS S 1FK7 permanent-magnet synchro- SIMOTICS 1FG1 geared synchronous motors
nous motors without encoder without encoder
1FK7 synchronous motors 1FG1 geared synchronous motor

Motors from other manufacturers
Standard induction motors
Synchronous motors (on request)
Operation with 1FK7 or 1FG1 synchronous motor without encoder

The control dynamic that can be achieved using a synchronous motor corresponds to that of
an induction motor:
● Power-up time from standstill to rated speed ≥ 1 s
● Starting torque ≤ 2 × rated torque of the motor
Operation is intended for applications where increased energy efficiency is required when
compared to an induction motor.

Description
Some restrictions apply for operation:
Table 3- 7 Restrictions for operation with encoderless synchronous motors
Property Restriction
Power Module PM240-2
Firmware Firmware version ≥ FW V4.7
Applications Suitable for applications for steady-state operation in the range of the
rated motor speed:
• Conveyor drives
• Pumps
• Fans
Speed of the motor • Speed ≤ rated motor speed
Operation is not permitted in field weakening.

• In steady-state operation ≥ 15 % of the rated speed.
For accelerating and reversing functions, speeds 0 … 15 % of the
rated speed are permitted.
Switching on when motor The "flying restart" function is not possible.
is rotating
Safety Integrated Only "STO" is permitted by the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Ambient temperature of ≤ 40 °C
motor The inverter monitors the motor using a temperature model. The tem-
perature model presumes an ambient temperature of 40°C.
In the case of higher ambient temperatures, the inverter will no longer be
able to provide sufficient protection for the motor. If you operate the
motor in ambient temperatures > 40 °C, you must reduce the power of
the motor sufficiently.
Information on temperature-dependent power de-rating can be found in
the motor manual.

Description
3.6 Tools to commission the converter
3.6 Tools to commission the converter

The following tools are used to commission, troubleshoot and control the inverter, as well as
to back up and transfer the inverter settings.
Operator panels Article number

BOP-2 (Basic Operator Panel) - Door mounting kit for BOP-2:
for snapping onto the inverter IOP/BOP-2 6SL3255-0AA00-4CA1
• Two-line display • For installation of the
• Guided basic commissioning BOP-2 or IOP in a IOP with European lan-
control cabinet door. guages:
IOP (Intelligent Operator Panel) -
• Degree of protection 6SL3255-0AA00-4JA1
for snapping onto the inverter
with IOP: IP54 or
• Plain text display UL Type 12
IOP with Chinese:
• Menu-based operation and • Degree of protection 6SL3255-0AA00-4JC1
application wizards with BOP-2: IP55
Door mounting kit:

6SL3256-0AP00-0JA0
For mobile use of the IOP: 6SL3255-0AA00-4HA0
IOP handheld with power supply unit and rechargeable batter-
ies as well as RS232 connection cable
If you are using your own connection cable, carefully note the
maximum permissible length of 5 m.
PC tools
STARTER STARTER on DVD:
System requirements and download: STARTER 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/2623320
8)
Help regarding operation: STARTER videos
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/mc-drives/en/low-
voltage-inverter/sinamics-g120/videos/Pages/videos.aspx)
Startdrive Startdrive on DVD:
System requirements and download: Startdrive 6SL3072-4CA02-1XG0
8)
You can access the inverter
with STARTER or Startdrive Help regarding operation: Startdrive tutorial
either via a USB connection or (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7359845
via PROFIBUS/PROFINET. 9)
SINAMICS PC Inverter Connection Kit 2 6SL3255-0AA00-2CA0
Contains the correct USB cable (3 m) to connect a PC to the
inverter.

Installing 4
4.1 Overview of the inverter installation
Installing the inverter
Precondition
Before installation, please check:
● Are the required inverter components available?
– Power Module
– Control Unit
– Accessories, e.g. line reactor or braking resistor
● Do you have the necessary tools and small parts/components required to install the
inverter?
Procedure
To install the inverter, proceed as follows:
1. Install the accessories (reactors, filter or braking

resistor) for the Power Module:
→ Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors
(Page 56).
2. Install the Power Module.
→ Installing Power Modules (Page 58).
3. Install the Control Unit.
→ Installing Control Unit (Page 80).
You have installed all of the inverter components, and you can now commission the inverter.

Installing
4.2 Connecting inverters in compliance with EMC
4.2.1 EMC-compliant connection of the converter

EMC-compliant installation of the inverter and motor are required in order to ensure
disturbance-free operation of the drive.
Install and operate inverters with IP20 degree of protection in a closed control cabinet.
Inverters with degree of protection IP55 are suitable for installation outside a control cabinet.
An overview of control cabinet installation and cabling can be found in the following section.
For further details, refer to the installation instructions of the Power Module.
The EMC-compliant connection of the inverter itself is described in the following sections.
4.2.2 Avoiding electromagnetic influence (EMI)

The inverters are designed for operation in industrial environments where high values of EMI
are expected. Safe, reliable and disturbance-free operation is only guaranteed if the devices
are installed by appropriately trained and qualified personnel.
Control cabinet design

● Connect the metallic parts and components of the control cabinet to the frame of the
cabinet through a good electrical connection.
– Side panels
– Rear panels
– Cover plate
– Base plates
Use the largest possible contact area or many individual screw connections.
● Connect the PE busbar and EMC shielding bus to the control cabinet frame using a good
electrical connection established through the largest possible surface area.
● Connect all metal enclosures of the devices installed in the control cabinet (such as the
inverter and line filter) to the control cabinet frame through a good electrical connection
established through the largest possible surface area.
We recommend that these devices are mounted on a bare metal plate with good
conducting properties.

Installing
● For screw connections onto painted or anodized surfaces, establish a good conductive
contact using one of the following methods:
– Use special (serrated) contact washers that cut through the painted or anodized
surface.
– Remove the insulating coating at the contact locations.
● Equip the following components with interference suppression elements:
– Coils of contactors
– Relays
– Solenoid valves
– Motor holding brakes
Interference suppression elements include RC elements or varistors for AC-operated
coils and freewheeling diodes for DC-operated coils.
Connect the interference suppression element directly at the coil.
Cable routing and shielding

● Route all inverter power cables (line supply cables, connecting cables between the
braking module and the associated braking resistance as well as the motor cables)
separately away from signal and data cables. Maintain a minimum clearance of 25 cm. If
cables can be separately routed, use metal partitions that have a good electrical
connection to the mounting plate.
● Route the cables from the line supply to the line filter separately away from the following
cables:
– Cables between the line filter and inverter
– Connecting cables between the braking module and associated braking resistor
– Motor cables
● Signal and data cables as well as filtered line supply cables may only cross non-filtered
power cables at right angles.
● Keep all cables as short as possible.
● Always route signal lines, data cables, and the associated potential equalizing cables in
parallel with the shortest possible clearance between them
● Use shielded motor cables.
● Route the shielded motor cable separately from the cables to the motor temperature
sensors (PTC/KTY).
● Use shielded signal and data cables.
● Connect the shields to the grounded enclosure at both ends with a good electrical
connection through the largest possible surface area
● Connect the cable shields as closely as possible to the point where the cable enters the
control cabinet.

Installing
● Use EMC shielded busbars for power cables.

Use the shield connection elements in the inverter for signal and data cables.
● Do not interrupt any cable shields by using intermediate terminals.
● Use the appropriate EMC terminals for cable shields.
The EMC terminals connect the cable shield with the EMC shielded busbar or with the
shield connection element through a large conductive surface.
Further information
You can find additional information about the EMC installation guidelines on the Internet:
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658).
4.2.3 Amount the shield plate onto the Power Module
Shielding with shield plate:

Connect the cable shields to the shield plate through the largest possible surface area using
shield clamps.
Depending on the particular Power Module, the shield plate is included in the scope of
delivery, or is optionally available as shield connection kit. You can find additional
information in Catalogs D11.1 and D35).
Shielding without shield plate:

● EMC-compliant shielding can also be implemented without using a shield plate. In this
case, you must ensure that the cable shields are connected to the ground potential
through the largest possible surface area.
Mounting the shield plate, PM240-2 FSA … FSC

Installing
Mounting the shield plate, PM240-2 FSD und FSE
① Attach the upper shield plate using two screws

② Attach the lower shield plate using four screws
③ Position the EMC connection element as shown
④ Attach the EMC connection element using four screws

Installing
Example of EMC-compliant wiring with a PM240 Power Module
The terminal cover is not shown in the diagram, so that it is easier to see how the cable is connected.
① Line connection cable (unshielded) for Power Modules with integrated line filter.
If you use an external line filter, you will need a shielded cable between the line filter and the
Power Module.
② Strain relief
③ Line supply connection
④ Metal mounting plate (unpainted and with a good electrical conductivity)
⑤ Motor connection
⑥ Cable shield
⑦ Cable clamps for establishing the connection between the shield and the mounting plate through
a large surface area
⑧ Motor connection cable (shielded)
⑨ Shield plate (option)
Figure 4-1 EMC-compliant wiring of a Power Module frame size E as example

Installing
Figure 4-2 Shield connection - detail

Installing
4.3 Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors
Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors

The following supplementary components may be required depending on the Power
Modules and the particular application:
● Line reactors
● Filter
● Braking resistors
● Brake Relay
Installing these components is described in the documentation provided. See also Section:
Manuals and technical support (Page 460).
Installing a base component

Reactors, filters and braking resistors are available as base components for the PM240 and
PM250 Power Modules, frame sizes FSA, FSB and FSC. You can also install base
components next to Power Modules.
Figure 4-3 Available base components

Installing
Installing two base components

You can combine up to two base components. The permissible combination depends on the
particular base components and the inverter frame size.
Figure 4-4 Permissible combinations of two base components

Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules
Installing Power Modules

The following is required to correctly install a Power Module:
● Install the Power Module in a control cabinet.
● Install the Power Modules vertically with the line and motor connections facing
downwards.
● Comply with the installation regulations specified in the following sections:

– Minimum clearances to other components
– Fixing elements
– Tightening torques for fixing elements

Installing
Installing Power Modules using push-through technology

We recommend that you use the optional mounting frames when installing the Push-Through
device in a control cabinet. This mounting frame includes the necessary seals and frame to
ensure compliance with degree of protection IP54.
If you do not use the optional mounting frames, then you must ensure that the required
degree of protection is complied with using other appropriate measures.
You must mount the inverter on unpainted metal surfaces in order to comply with EMC
requirements.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to correctly install the Power Module:
1. Prepare the cutout and the mounting holes for the Power
Module and the mounting frame corresponding to the
dimension drawings of the mounting frame.
Also note that the PT Power Modules must be vertically
mounted with the line and motor connections facing
downwards.
2. Position the mounting frame at the rear of the control
cabinet and attach it to the control cabinet by tightening
the corresponding screws by hand.
3. Attach the seal to the inner side of the control cabinet.
4. Fix the inverter, and first tighten all of the fixing screws
by hand.
5. Tighten the screws with a torque of 3.5 Nm.
Mounting frame
You have correctly installed the Power Module.

Installing
Dimensions and drilling patterns for Power Modules with IP20 degree of protection
Defining the dimensions: Drilling patterns for the PM230 and PM240-2 Power Modules:
FSA FSB … FSF
Drilling patterns for the PM240, PM340, PM250 and PM260 Power Modules:
FSA FSB…FSF FSGX

Installing
Table 4- 1 Dimensions of the PM230, without/with integrated filter
Frame size Dimensions (mm) Drilling dimensions

a b c d e f
(width) (height)1) (depth)2)
FSA 73 196 165 62,3 186 6
FSB 100 292 165 80 281 6
FSC 140 355 165 120 343 6
FSD 275 419/512 204 235 325/419 11
FSE 275 499/635 204 235 405/451 11
FSF 350 634/934 316 300 598/899 11
1) with shield connection kit:
FSA: + 80 mm; FSB: + 78 mm; FSC: + 77 mm; FSD, FSE, FSF: + 123 mm
2) Total depth of the inverter: See below.
Table 4- 2 Mounting hardware and clearances to other devices for PM230
Frame size Hardware Tightening torque Cooling air clearances (mm)

(Nm) Top Bottom Lateral Front
FSA, FSB M4 screws 2,5 80 100 01) ---
FSC M5 screws 3 80 100 01) ---
FSD, FSE M6 screws 6 300 300 01) 100
FSF M8 screws 13 350 350 01) 100
1) mounting without lateral clearance is permissible. For tolerance reasons, we recommend a lateral
clearance of approx. 1 mm.
Table 4- 3 Dimensions for PM240, without/with integrated filter

a b c d e f
FSA 73 196 165 --- 186 6
FSB 153 270 165 133 258 6
FSC 189 334 185 167 323 6
FSD 275 419/512 204 325/419 235 11
FSE 275 499/635 204 405/541 235 11
FSF 350 634/934 316 598/899 300 11
GX 326 1533 547 1506 125 14.5
1) with shield connection kit:
FSA: + 80 mm; FSB: + 78 mm; FSC: + 77 mm; FSD, FSE, FSF: + 123 mm

Installing
Frame size Hardware Tightening torque (Nm) Clearances (mm)

Top Bottom Lateral
FSA M4 screws 2.5 100 100 301)
FSB M4 screws 2.5 100 100 401)
FSC M5 screws 3 80 100 501)
FSD, FSE M6 screws 6 300 300 02)
FSF M8 screws 13 350 350 02)
GX M8 screws 13 250 150 50
1) Can be mounted without any lateral clearance for ambient temperatures of up to 40 °C in opera-
tion. For tolerance reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.
2) Mounting and operation are permissible without lateral clearance. For tolerance reasons we rec-
ommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.
Table 4- 5 Dimensions for PM240-2

a b c d e f
FSA 73 196 165 62.3 186 6
FSB 100 292 165 80 281 6
FSC 140 355 165 120 343 6
FSD 200 420 235 170 400 10
FSE 275 500 235 240 475 10
1) With shield connection kit: FSA: + 80 mm; FSB: + 78 mm; FSC: + 77 mm
Table 4- 6 Mounting hardware and clearances to other devices for PM240-2
Frame size Hardware Tightening torque Clearances (mm)

(Nm) Top Bottom Lateral Front
FSA, FSB M4 screws 2.5 80 100 0 1) 0 2)
FSC M5 screws 3.0 80 100 0 1) 0 2)
FSD M5 screws 3.0 300 350 0 1) 100
FSE M6 screws 6.0 300 350 0 1) 100
2) Maintain sufficient clearance for the Control Unit and the operator panel.

Installing
Table 4- 7 Dimensions and clearances for the PM340 1AC
Frame size Dimensions (mm)

Height1) Width Depth2) a b c
FSA 173 73 145 160 36,5 --
1) With shield connection kit: +84 mm
Table 4- 8 Mounting materials for PM340 1AC

(Nm) Top Bottom Lateral
FSA M4 screws 2,5 100 100 301)
1) At ambient temperatures in operation up to 40 °C without any lateral clearance. For tolerance
reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.
Table 4- 9 Dimensions for PM250, with/without integrated filter

a b c d e f
FSC 189 334 185 167 323 6
FSD 275 419/512 204 325/419 235 11
FSE 275 499/635 204 405/541 235 11
FSF 350 634/934 316 598/899 300 11
1) With shield connection kit: FSC: + 77 mm; FSD…FSF: + 123 mm
Frame size Hardware Tightening torque (Nm) Clearances (mm)

Top Bottom Lateral
FSC M5 screws 3 80 100 501)
FSD, FSE M6 screws 6 300 300 02)
FSF M8 screws 13 350 350 02)
1) Can be mounted without any lateral clearance for ambient temperatures of up to 40 °C in opera-
tion. For tolerance reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.

Installing
Table 4- 11 Dimensions for PM260, without/with integrated filter

a b c d e f
FSD 275 419/512 204 325/419 235 11
FSF 350 634/934 316 598/899 300 11
1) With shield connection kit: + 123 mm

FSD M6 screws 6 300 300 01)
FSF M8 screws 13 350 350 01)
1) Mounting and operation are permissible without any lateral clearance. For tolerance reasons we
recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.

Installing
Dimensions and drilling patterns for Power Modules with through-hole technology
Mounting cutout in the control cabinet for the PM230 and PM240-
2 Power Modules;
Holes for fastening the mounting frame
FSA, FSB FSC
Table 4- 13 Dimensions for PM230 in push-through technology
Frame Dimensions (mm) Drilling dimensions (mm) Cabinet cutout

size (mm)
a b c T1 T2 e d f g h
(width) (height)1 (depth)2)
)
FSA 126 238 171 118 54 103 106 27 88 198

FSB 154 345 171 118 54 147,5 134 34,5 116 304
FSC 200 411 171 118 54 123 174 30,5 156 365
1) With shield connection kit: FSA: +84 mm; FSB: +85 mm; FSC: +89 mm
Table 4- 14 Mounting hardware and clearances to other devices for PM230 in push-through technol-
ogy
Frame size Hardware Tightening torque Cooling air clearances (mm)

FSA, FSB, FSC M5 screws 3 80 100 01)
1) mounting without lateral clearance is permissible. For tolerance reasons, we recommend a lateral
clearance of approx. 1 mm.

Installing
Table 4- 15 Dimensions for PM240-2 in push-through technology
Frame Dimensions (mm) Drilling dimensions (mm) Cabinet cutout

size (mm)
a b c T1 T2 e d f g h
(width) (height)1 (depth)2)
)
FSA 126 238 171 118 54 103 106 27 88 198

FSB 154 345 171 118 54 147.5 134 34.5 116 304
FSC 200 411 171 118 54 123 174 30.5 156 365
1) With shield connection kit: FSA: +84 mm; FSB: +85 mm; FSC: +89 mm
Table 4- 16 Mounting hardware and clearances to other devices for PM240-2 in push-through tech-
nology

FSA, FSB, FSC M5 screws 3 80 100 01)

Installing
Total depth of the inverter
Power Modules frame sizes FSA … FSF
①+②
As a minimum, the inverter comprises a Power Module
and an inserted Control Unit:
Overall depth of the inverter = depth of the Power Module
+ 41 mm (Control Unit)
①+②+③
Inverter with inserted operator panel:
• Overall depth of the inverter = depth of the Power
Module + 54 mm (Control Unit + Basic Operator Panel
BOP-2)
• Overall depth of the inverter = depth of the Power
Module + 63 mm (Control Unit + Intelligent Operator
Panel IOP)
①+②+③+④
Power Module (degree of protection IP20) on a base
component:
The overall inverter depth increases by the depth of the
base component.
Power Modules frame sizes FSGX (160 kW … 250 kW)

Total depth of the inverter = depth of the Power Module

Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply, motor, and inverter components
4.5.1 Permissible line supplies
Note
Restrictions for installation altitudes above 2000 m
Above an installation altitude of 2000 m, the permissible line supplies are restricted. See
also: Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 431).
Note
Line requirement
The machine manufacturer must ensure that in operation the voltage drop between the
transformer input terminals and the inverter with rated values is less than 4 %.
The inverter is designed for the following power distribution systems according to IEC 60364-
1 (2005).

Installing
TN line system
A TN line system transfers the PE protective conductor to the installed plant or system using
a cable.
Generally, in a TN line system the neutral point is grounded. There are versions of a TN line
supply with a grounded line the conductor, e.g. with grounded L1.
A TN line system can transfer the neutral conductor N and the PE protective conductor either
separately or combined.
Inverter operated on a TN line system

● Inverter with integrated or external line filter:
– Operation on TN line systems with grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TN line systems with grounded line conductor not permissible.
● Inverter without line filter:
– Operation on all TN line systems ≤ 600 V permissible
– Operation on TN line systems > 600 V and grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TN line systems > 600 V and grounded line conductor not permissible.
Examples for Power Modules connected to a TN line supply
Figure 4-5 TN line supply with separate transfer of N and PE and with a grounded neutral point

Installing
TT line system
In a TT line system, the transformer grounding and the installation grounding are
independent of one another.
There are TT line supplies where the neutral conductor N is either transferred – or not.
Inverter operated on a TT line system

● Inverter with integrated or external line filter:
– Operation on TT line systems with grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TT line systems without grounded neutral point not permissible.
– Operation on all TT line systems permissible.
Examples for Power Modules connected to a TT line supply
Figure 4-6 TT line system with neutral conductor N and with grounded neutral point

Installing
IT system
In an IT line system, all of the conductors are insulated with respect to the PE protective
conductor – or connected to the PE protective conductor through an impedance.
There are IT line supplies where the neutral conductor N is either transferred – or not.
Inverter operated on an IT line system

● Inverters with integrated line filter:
– Operation on IT line systems not permissible.
– Operation on all IT line systems permissible.
Example of a Power Module connected to an IT line system
Figure 4-7 IT line supply where the neutral conductor N is transferred and with impedance with
respect to the PE protective conductor
Behavior of the inverter when a ground fault occurs

In some instances, even for a ground fault, the inverter should still remain functional. In
cases such as these, you must install an output reactor. This prevents an overcurrent trip or
damage to the drive.

Installing
4.5.2 Connecting the inverter
Figure 4-8 Connecting the PM230 IP20 and push-through Power Module
Figure 4-9 Connecting the PM240, PM240-2 IP20 and push-through Power Modules
Figure 4-10 Connecting the PM250 Power Module

Installing
Figure 4-11 Connecting the PM260 Power Module
Figure 4-12 Connecting the PM340 1AC Power Module
DANGER
Danger to life as a result of a hazardous voltage at the motor connections
As soon as the inverter is connected to the line supply, the motor connections of the
inverter may carry dangerous voltages. When the motor is connected to the inverter, there
is danger to life through contact with the motor terminals if the terminal box is open.
• Close the terminal box of the motor before connecting the inverter to the line supply.

Installing
Connecting the line supply cable to the converter
Procedure
To connect the converter to the supply system, proceed as follows:
1. If available, open the terminal covers of the converter.
2. Connect the line supply to terminals U1/L1, V1/L2, and W1/L3.
3. Connect the protective conductor of the line supply to terminal PE of the converter.
4. If available, close the terminal covers of the converter.
You have connected the line supply cable to the converter.
Connecting the motor cable to the converter
Procedure
To connect the motor cable to the converter, proceed as follows:
1. If available, open the terminal covers of the converter.
2. Connect the motor to terminals U2, V2, and W2.
Carefully observe the regulations for EMC-compliant wiring:
Connecting inverters in compliance with EMC (Page 50)
3. Connect the protective conductor of the motor to the terminal of the converter.
4. If available, close the terminal covers of the converter.
You have therefore connected the motor line to the converter.
Connecting a motor cable to an induction motor
Procedure
To connect the motor cable to an induction motor proceed as follows:
1. Open the motor terminal box.
2. Connect the motor in either a star or delta connection.
3. If you are using a shielded motor cable, you must do the following:
– Expose the shield of the motor cable in the area of the cable entry in the terminal box.
– Attach the cable shield to the motor terminal box using a suitable screw connection.
4. Close the motor terminal box.
You have connected the motor cable to the induction motor.
Depending on your application, you can operate the motor in the star or delta connection
(Y/Δ).

Installing
Examples for operating the converter and motor on a 400 V line supply
Assumption: The motor rating plate states 230/400 V Δ/Y.
Case 1: A motor is normally operated between standstill and its rated speed (i.e. a speed
corresponding to the line frequency). In this case, you need to connect the motor in Y.
Operating the motor above its rated speed is only possible in field weakening, i.e. the motor
torque available is reduced above the rated speed.
Case 2: If you want to operate the motor with the "87 Hz characteristic", you need to connect
the motor in Δ.
With the 87 Hz characteristic, the motor's power output increases. The 87 Hz characteristic
is mainly used with geared motors.
Before you connect the motor, ensure that the motor has the appropriate connection for your
application:
Motor is connected in the star or delta configuration

With SIEMENS motors, you will see a dia-
gram of both connection methods on the
inside of the cover of the terminal box:
• Star connection (Y)
• Delta connection (Δ)

Installing
4.5.3 Connecting a motor holding brake
Connect Safe Brake Relay and motor holding brake

The Safe Brake Relay controls a 24 V motor
brake and monitors the brake control for a
short circuit or interrupted cable.
You can find additional information about
Safe Brake Relayin the Safety Integrated
Function Manual, see also Section: Manuals
for your inverter (Page 460).
Connect Brake Relay and motor holding brake

The Brake Relay serves as interface be-
tween the Power Module and the brake
solenoid of a motor.
You may mount the Brake Relayon a
mounting plate, on the cabinet panel or at
the shield connection kit of the inverter.
For additional information, please refer to the associated installation instructions: Installation
instructions for the Brake Relay
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/23623179).

Installing
Procedure
Proceed as follows to connect the brake solenoid in the motor with the inverter:
1. Connect the Brake Relay at the inverter.
Power Modules FSA … FSC Power Modules FSD … FSF
Connect the prefabricated cable of the Safe

Braking Relay supplied to the lower side of the
Power Module
Connect the prefabricated cable of the Safe

Braking Relay supplied to the front of the Power
Module
2. Connect the motor holding brake to the terminals of the Brake Relay.
You have connected the brake solenoid in the motor with the inverter.

Installing
4.5.4 Connecting a braking resistor
WARNING
Danger to life due to fire spreading because of an unsuitable or improperly installed braking
resistor
Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage.
Using an unsuitable braking resistor can cause fires and smoke to develop. Possible
consequences are severe personal injury or material damage.
• Only use braking resistors that are approved for the inverter.
• Install the braking resistor in accordance with regulations.
• Monitor the temperature of the braking resistor.
CAUTION
Risk of burns due to touching hot surfaces
The temperature of braking resistors increases substantially during operation.
• Do not touch the braking resistor during operation.
Procedure
To connect the braking resistor and monitor the temperature of the braking resistor, proceed
as follows:
1. Connect the braking resistor to terminals R1 and R2 of the inverter.
2. Ground the braking resistor directly to the control cabinet's grounding bar. The braking
resistor must not be grounded via the PE terminals on the inverter.
3. If you have to fulfill EMC requirements, observe the rules for shielding.
Figure 4-13 Braking resistor directly connected to the inverter (example: temperature monitoring
via DI 3)

Installing
4. Connect the temperature monitoring of the braking resistor (terminals T1 and T2 at the
braking resistor) to a free digital input in the inverter.
5. When commissioning the inverter, definine the function this digital input as external fault.
You have connected the braking resistor and ensured that temperature monitoring is set up.

Installing
4.6 Installing Control Unit
4.6.1 Plugging the Control Unit onto the Power Module
Plugging the Control Unit onto an IP20 Power Module FSA … FSF
Procedure
Proceed as follows to plug the Control Unit

onto a Power Module:
1. Locate the lugs at the rear of the Control
Unit in the matching recesses of the
Power Module.
2. Press the Control Unit onto the Power
Module until you hear it latch into place.
You have now plugged the Control Unit onto the Power Module.
To remove the Control Unit, press on the release button on the Power Module and withdraw
the Control Unit.

Installing
4.6.2 Overview of the interfaces
Interfaces at the front of the Control Unit

To access the interfaces at the front of the Control Unit, you must lift the Operator Panel (if
one is being used) and open the front doors.
① Memory card slot

② Terminal strips
③ Depending on the fieldbus:
• USS, Modbus: Bus
termination
• PROFIBUS, PROFINET,
EtherNet/IP: No function
④ Fieldbus interfaces at the lower side
⑤ Selecting the fieldbus address
On all Control Units with the
exception of CU240E-2 PN and
CU240E-2 PN-F.
⑥ Status LED
⑦ USB interface for connection to a PC

⑧ Switch for AI 0 and AI 1 1) (U/I)
• I 0/4 mA … 20 mA
• U -10/0 V … 10 V
1) AI 1 is not available on the CU240B-2
⑨ Connection to the operator panel
Table 4- 17 Number of inputs and outputs
Digital Digital Analog Analog Safe inputs

inputs DI outputs DO inputs AI outputs AO F-DI 1)
CU240B-2, CU240B-2 DP 4 1 1 1 0
CU240E-2, CU240E-2 DP, 6 3 2 2 1
CU240E-2 PN
CU240E-2 F, CU240E-2 DP-F, 6 3 2 2 3
CU240E-2 PN-F
1) Every F-DI safe input used occupies two digital inputs DI

Installing
4.6.3 Fieldbus interface allocation
Interfaces at the lower side of the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Installing
4.6.4 Terminal strips on CU240B-2 Control Units
Terminal strips with wiring example
All terminals labelled with reference potential "GND" are connected internally in the inverter.
Reference potential "DI COM" is electrically isolated from "GND".

→ If, as shown above, the 24 V supply from terminal 9 is used to supply the digital inputs, then you
must connect "GND" to "DI COM".
Terminals 31, 32 Reference potential "GND IN" is electrically isolated from "GND". When an optional 24 V power
supply is connected at terminals 31, 32, even when the Power Module is disconnected from the line
supply, the Control Unit remains in operation. The Control Unit thus maintains the fieldbus commu-
nication, for example.
→ at terminals 31, 32, only connect a power supply that is in accordance with SELV (Safety Extra
Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage).
→ if you use a common external power supply for terminals 31, 32 and the digital inputs, you must
connect "GND" to "GND IN".
Terminals 3, 4: You may use the internal 10V power supply or an external power supply for the analog input.
→ If you use the internal 10 V power supply, you must connect AI 0- to GND.
Figure 4-14 Wiring example of the digital inputs with the internal inverter 24 V power supply

Installing
Additional options for wiring the digital inputs

You must remove the jumper be-
tween terminals 28 and 69 if it is
necessary to have electrical isolation
between the external power supply
and the internal inverter power sup-
ply.
Connecting P-switching contacts with an external pow-
er supply
It is not permissible that terminals 28
and 69 are connected with one an-
other.
Connecting M-switching contacts with an external pow-

er supply
4.6.4.1 Factory setting of the CU240B-2 interfaces
Factory setting of the terminal strip on the CU240B-2

The factory setting of the terminals depends on whether the Control Unit has a PROFIBUS /
PROFINET interface.
Control Units with USS interface

The fieldbus interface is not active.
--- No function.
DO 0: p0730 AO 0: p0771[0] DI x: r0722.x AI 0: r0755[0]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Figure 4-15 Factory settings of the CU240B-2 Control Unit

Installing
Control Units with PROFIBUS interface

The function of the fieldbus interface and digital inputs DI 0, DI 1 depends on DI 3.
--- No function.
DO 0: p0730 AO 0: p0771[0] DI x: r0722.x
Figure 4-16 Factory setting of the CU240B-2 DP and CU240B-2 PN Control Units
Changing the function of the terminals

The function of the terminals marked in color in the two diagrams above, can be set.
In order not to have to successively change terminal for terminal, several terminals can be
jointly set using default settings ("p0015 Macro drive unit").
The terminal settings made in the factory described above correspond to the following
default settings:
● Default setting 12 (p0015 = 12): "Standard I/O with analog setpoint"
● Default setting 7 (p0015 = 7): "Fieldbus with data set switchover"

Installing
4.6.4.2 Default settings of the CU240B-2 interfaces
Default setting 7: "Fieldbus with data set switchover"

Factory setting for inverters with PROFIBUS interface
DO 0: p0730 AO 0: p0771[0] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 3: r0722.3

Jog 1 speed setpoint: p1058, factory setting: 150 rpm
Jog 2 speed setpoint: p1059, factory setting: -150 rpm
Designation in the BOP-2: FB cdS
Default setting 9: "Standard I/O with MOP"
DO 0: p0730 AO 0: p0771[0] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 3: r0722.3

Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: Std MoP

Installing
Default setting 12: "Standard I/O with analog setpoint"

Factory setting for inverters with USS interface
DO 0: p0730 AO 0: p0771[0] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]

Designation in the BOP-2: Std ASP
Default setting 17: "2-wire (forw/backw1)"

Designation in the BOP-2: 2-wIrE 1


Installing
Default setting 19: "3-wire (enable/forw/backw)"

Default setting 20: "3-wire (enable/on/reverse)"

Default setting 21: "USS fieldbus"
DO 0: p0730 AO 0: p0771[0] DI 2: r0722.2

Designation in the BOP-2: FB USS

Installing
4.6.5 Terminal strips on CU240E-2 Control Units
Terminal strips with wiring example
All terminals labelled with reference potential "GND" are connected internally in the inverter.
Reference potentials "DI COM1" and "DI COM2" are electrically isolated from "GND".
→ If, as shown above, the 24 V supply from terminal 9 is used to supply the digital inputs, then you
must connect "GND", "DI COM1" and "DI COM2" with one another.
Terminals 31, 32 Reference potential "GND IN" is electrically isolated from "GND". When an optional 24 V power
supply is connected at terminals 31, 32, even when the Power Module is disconnected from the line
supply, the Control Unit remains in operation. The Control Unit thus maintains the fieldbus commu-
nication, for example.
→ at terminals 31, 32, only connect a power supply that is in accordance with SELV (Safety Extra
Low Voltage) or PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage).
→ if you use a common external power supply for terminals 31, 32 and the digital inputs, you must
connect "GND" to "GND IN".
Terminals 3, 4 and You may use the internal 10V power supply or an external power supply for the analog inputs.
10, 11: → If you use the internal 10 V power supply, you must connect AI 0- or AI 1- to GND.
Figure 4-17 Wiring example of the digital inputs with the internal inverter 24 V power supply

Installing
Additional options for wiring the digital inputs
If you wish to connect the potential

of an external power supply with the
potential of the internal inverter pow-
er supply, then you must connect
"GND" with terminals 34and 69.
Connecting P-switching contacts with an external pow-

er supply
Connect terminals 69 and 34 with

one another.
Connecting M-switching contacts with an external pow-

er supply
NOTICE
Damage to the CU240E-2 PN and CU240E-2 PN-F Control Units in the event of a short-
circuit of the 24 V output
It is possible that the Control Units are defective if the following conditions occur
simultaneously:
1. A short-circuit at the 24 V output occurs at terminal 9 when the inverter is operational.
2. The ambient temperature is at the upper permitted limit.
3. You have connected an external 24 V supply to terminals 31 and 32, and the voltage at
terminal 31 is at the upper permitted limit.
In order to rule out damage to the Control Units, you have to prevent all three conditions
occurring simultaneously.

Installing
4.6.5.1 Factory setting of the CU240E-2 interfaces
Factory setting of the terminal strip on the CU240E-2

The factory setting of the terminal strip depends on the Control Unit.
Control Units with USS interface

The fieldbus interface is not active.
--- No function.
DO x: p073x AO 0: p0771[0] DI x: r0722.x AI 0: r0755[0]
Figure 4-18 Factory setting of the CU240E-2 and CU240E-2 F Control Units

Installing
Control Units with PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface

The function of the fieldbus interface and digital inputs DI 0, DI 1 depends on DI 3.
--- No function.
DO x: p073x AO 0: p0771[0] DI x: r0722.x
Figure 4-19 Factory setting of the CU240E-2 DP(-F) and CU240E-2 PN(-F) Control Units
Changing the function of the terminals

The function of the terminals marked in color in the two diagrams above, can be set.
In order not to have to successively change terminal for terminal, several terminals can be
jointly set using default settings ("p0015 Macro drive unit").
The terminal settings made in the factory described above correspond to the following
default settings:
● Default setting 12 (p0015 = 12): "Standard I/O with analog setpoint"
● Default setting 7 (p0015 = 7): "Fieldbus with data set switchover"

Installing
4.6.5.2 Default settings of the CU240E-2 interfaces
Default setting 1: "Conveyor technology with 2 fixed frequencies"
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5

Fixed speed setpoint 3: p1003, fixed speed setpoint 4: p1004, fixed speed setpoint active: r1024
DI 4 and DI 5 = high: The inverter adds both fixed speed setpoints
Designation in the BOP-2: coN 2 SP
Default setting 2: "Conveyor systems with Basic Safety"

Fixed speed setpoint 1: p1001, fixed speed setpoint 2: p1002, fixed speed setpoint active: r1024
DI 0 and DI 1 = high: The inverter adds both fixed speed setpoints.
Designation in the BOP-2: coN SAFE

Installing
Default setting 3: "Conveyor technology with 4 fixed frequencies"

Fixed speed setpoint 1: p1001, … fixed speed setpoint 4: p1004, fixed speed setpoint active: r1024
Several DI 0, DI 1, DI 4 and DI 5 = high: The inverter adds the corresponding fixed speed setpoints.
Designation in the BOP-2: coN 4 SP
Default setting 4: "Conveyor systems with fieldbus"
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1]

Designation in the BOP-2: coN Fb

Installing
Default setting 5: "Conveyor systems with fieldbus and Basic Safety"
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 4: r0722.4, DI 5: r0722.5

Designation in the BOP-2: coN Fb S
Default setting 6: "Fieldbus with Extended Safety"

Only with Control Units CU240E-2 F, CU240E-2 DP-F, and CU240E-2 PN-F.

Designation in the BOP-2: Fb SAFE

Installing
Default setting 7: "Fieldbus with data set switchover"

Factory setting for inverters with PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface

Jog 1 speed setpoint: p1058, factory setting: 150 rpm
Jog 2 speed setpoint: p1059, factory setting: -150 rpm
Designation in the BOP-2: FB cdS

Installing
Default setting 8: "MOP with Basic Safety"

Designation in the BOP-2: MoP SAFE
Default setting 9: "Standard I/O with MOP"

Designation in the BOP-2: Std MoP

Installing
Default setting 12: "Standard I/O with analog setpoint"
DO 0: p0730, AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]

DO 1: p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Designation in the BOP-2: Std ASP
Default setting 13: "Standard I/O with analog setpoint and safety"

DO 1: p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Designation in the BOP-2: ASPS

Installing
Default setting 14: "Process industry with fieldbus"

PROFIdrive telegram 20
MOP = motorized potentiometer

Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1], p1070[1] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: Proc Fb

Installing
Default setting 15: "Process industry"

DO 1: p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0], p1070[1] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: Proc

DO 1: p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]

Installing

DO 1: p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Default setting 19: "3-wire (enable/forw/backw)"

DO 1: p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]

Installing
Default setting 20: "3-wire (enable/on/reverse)"

DO 1: p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Default setting 21: "USS fieldbus"
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2

Designation in the BOP-2: FB USS

Installing
4.6.6 Wiring the terminal strip
WARNING
Danger to life as a result of hazardous voltages when connecting an unsuitable power
supply
Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched in the event of a fault.
• For all connections and terminals of the electronic boards, only use power supplies that
provide PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) or SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage)
output voltages.
Note
If your application requires UL certification, please note that the power supply of the digital
output must comply with specific specifications. See also Section: Technical data
(Page 381).
NOTICE
Damage to the inverter when using long signal cables
Using long cables at the inverter's digital inputs and 24 V power supply can lead to
overvoltage during switching operations. Overvoltages can damage the inverter.
• If you use cables of more than 30 m at the digital inputs and 24 V power supply, connect
an overvoltage protection element between the terminal and the associated reference
potential.
We recommend using the Weidmüller overvoltage protection terminal with designation
MCZ OVP TAZ DIODE 24VDC.
Table 4- 18 Permissible cable and wiring options
Solid or flexible conduc- Finely stranded con- Finely stranded con- Two finely stranded
tors ductor with non- ductor with partially conductors with the
insulated end sleeve insulated end sleeve same cross-section
with partially insulated
twin end sleeves
Wiring the terminal strip in compliance with EMC

● When you use shielded cables, you must connect the shield through the largest possible
surface area to the mounting plate of the control cabinet or with the shield support of the
inverter in order to establish a good electrical connection
See also:EMC installation guideline
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658)
● Use the shield connection plate of the Control Unit as strain relief, see also: Overview of
Control Units (Page 27).

Installing
4.6.7 Connecting the inverter to the fieldbus
Fieldbus interfaces of the Control Units

The Control Units are available in different versions for communication with higher-level
controls with the subsequently listed fieldbus interfaces:
Fieldbus Profiles S7 communication Control Unit

2)
PROFIdrive PROFIsafe PROFIener-
1) gy 2)
PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ --- ✓ CU240B-2 DP
(Page 108) CU240E-2 DP
CU240E-2 DP-
F
PROFINET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CU240E-2 PN
(Page 105) CU240E-2 PN-
EtherNet/IP 2) --- --- F
USS 2) --- --- CU240B-2

Modbus RTU 2) --- --- CU240E-2
CU240E-2 F
1) Information on PROFIsafe can be found in the Safety Integrated Function Manual.
2) Information
on the these fieldbuses, profiles and communication types can be found in the
Fieldbuses Function Manual.
See also Section Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).

Installing
4.6.7.1 PROFINET
You can either communicate via Ethernet using the inverter, or integrate the inverter in a
PROFINET network.
● The inverter as an Ethernet station (Page 460)
● PROFINET IO operation (Page 106)
In PROFINET IO operation, the inverter supports the following functions:

– RT
– IRT
The inverter transmits the clock synchronism but does not support clock synchronism.
– MRP
Media redundancy, impulsed with 200 ms
Requirement: Ring topology
– MRPD
Media redundancy, impulse-free
Requirement: IRT and the ring topology created in the control
– Diagnostic alarm
in accordance with the fault classes specified in the PROFIdrive profile. See Activating
diagnostics via the control (Page 107).
– Device replacement without removable medium
Requirement: Topology created in the control
– Shared device
only in the case of control units with fail-safe functions (see Safety function manual)

Installing
Further information on PROFINET can be found on the Internet using the following links:
– General information about PROFINET can be found at Industrial Communication
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/automation/en/industrial-
communications/profinet/Pages/Default.aspx).
– The configuration of the functions is described in the PROFINET system description
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127) manual.
This manual describes the control of the inverter using primary control. How to access the
inverter as an Ethernet station is described in the Fieldbus function manual (Page 460) in the
section "The inverter as an Ethernet station".
What do you need for communication via PROFINET?

Check the communication settings using the following table. If you answer "Yes" to the
questions, you have correctly set the communication settings and can control the inverter via
the fieldbus.
Questions Answer/description Example

Is the inverter correctly connected to See: Integrating inverters into
the bus network? PROFINET (Page 106)
Do the IP address and device name See Configuring communication Refer to manuals for your
in the inverter and controller match? to the control (Page 107) inverter, fieldbus function
Is the same telegram set in the in- Setting the telegram in the con- manual (Page 460)
verter as in the higher-level control- trol
ler?
Are the signals that the inverter and Interconnection in the inverter in
the controller exchange via conformance with PROFIdrive,
PROFINET correctly interconnected? see: Control via PROFIBUS or
PROFINET with the PROFIdrive
profile (Page 171)
Integrating inverters into PROFINET
Procedure
To connect the inverter to a control via PROFINET, proceed as follows:
1. Integrate the inverter in the bus system (e.g. ring topology) of the control using
PROFINET cables and the two PROFINET sockets X150-P1 and X150-P2.
The position of the sockets and the pin assignment can be found in Section Fieldbus
interface allocation (Page 82).
The maximum permitted cable length from the previous station and to the subsequent
one is 100 m.
2. Externally supply the inverter with 24 V DC through terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communications with the control should also
run when the mains voltage is switched off.
You have connected the inverter to the control using PROFINET.

Installing
Configuring communication to the control
Configuring the communication using SIMATIC S7 control

You have the following options, if the inverter is not included in the hardware library:
● Install the most up to date STARTER version
● Install the GSDML of the inverter using “Tools/Install GSDML file" in HW Config.
Additional information on this topic is provided in the "Fieldbuses" Function Manual, also see
Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).
Configuring the communication using a non-Siemens control

1. Import the device file (GSDML) of the inverter into the engineering tool for your control
system.
2. Configure the communication.
Installing GSDML
Procedure
To install the GSDML of the inverter into the configuring tool of your control system, proceed
as follows:
1. Save the GSDML to your PC .
– From the Internet: GSDML
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/133100).
– From your inverter:
Insert a memory card into the inverter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The inverter writes the GSDML as zipped file (*.zip) into directory
/SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSDML file to a folder on your computer.
3. Import the GSDML into the configuring tool of your control system.
You have now installed the GSDML.
Activating diagnostics via the control

The converter provides the functionality to transmit fault and alarm messages (diagnostic
messages) to the higher-level control according to the PROFIdrive error classes.
You must select the functionality in the higher-level control (see Manuals for your inverter
(Page 460)) and activate it by booting up.

Installing
4.6.7.2 PROFIBUS
The PROFIBUS DP interface has the following functions:

● Cyclic communication
● Acyclic communication
● Diagnostic alarms
General information on PROFIBUS DP can be found on the Internet at the following links:
● PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com/downloads/installation-guide/).
● Information about PROFIBUS DP
(http://www.automation.siemens.com/net/html_76/support/printkatalog.htm).
What do you need for communication via PROFIBUS?

Check the communication settings using the following table. If you answer "Yes" to the
questions, you have correctly set the communication settings and can control the inverter via
the fieldbus.
Questions Description Examples

Is the inverter correctly con- See Section: Integrating inverters into PROFIBUS ---
nected to the PROFIBUS? (Page 109).
Have you configured the com- See Section: Configuring the communication using See Manuals
munication between the inverter SIMATIC S7 control (Page 109) for your in-
and the higher-level controller? verter
Do the addresses in the inverter See Section: Setting the address (Page 110). (Page 460)
and the higher-level controller
match?
Is the same telegram set in the Setting the telegram in the control
higher-level controller and in
the inverter?
Are the signals that the inverter Adapt the interconnection of the signals in the
and the controller exchange via controller to the inverter. The interconnection in the
PROFIBUS correctly intercon- inverter in conformance with PROFIdrive is provid-
nected? ed in Section: Control via PROFIBUS or
PROFINET with the PROFIdrive profile (Page 171).

Installing
Integrating inverters into PROFIBUS
Procedure
To connect the inverter to a control via PROFIBUS DP, proceed as follows:
1. Integrate the inverter into the bus system (e.g. line topology) of the control using
PROFIBUS cables via socket X126.
The position of the sockets and the pin assignment can be found in Section Overview of
the interfaces (Page 81).
The maximum permitted cable length to the previous station and the subsequent one is
100 m at a baud rate of 12 Mbit/s.
2. Externally supply the inverter with 24 V DC through terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communications with the control should also
run when the line voltage is switched off.
You have now connected the inverter to the control using PROFIBUS DP.
Communication with the controller even when the supply voltage on the Power Module is
switched off
You must supply the Control Unit with 24 V DC at terminals 31 and 32 if you wish to maintain
communication with the control system when the line voltage is switched off.
In the case of brief interruptions of the 24 V power supply, the inverter may signal a fault
without communications with the control system being interrupted.
Configuring the communication using SIMATIC S7 control

● If the inverter is listed in the hardware library of HW-Conifg, you can configure the
communication in the SIMATIC control.
● If the inverter is not listed in the hardware library, you can either install the newest
STARTER version or install the GSD of the inverter through "Extras/GSD-Install file" in
HW-Config. See also GSD
When you have installed the GSD, configure the communication in the SIMATIC control.

Installing
Setting the address

You set the PROFIBUS address of the inverter using
the address switch on the Control Unit, in parameter
p0918 or in STARTER.
In parameter p0918 (factory setting: 126) or in
STARTER, you can only set the address, if all ad-
dress switches are set to "OFF" (0) or "ON" (1).
If you have specified a valid address with the ad-
dress switches, this address will always be the one
that takes effect and parameter p0918 cannot be
changed.
Valid address range: 1 … 125
The positions of the address switches are described in Section: Overview of the interfaces
(Page 81).
Procedure
To change the bus address, proceed as follows:
1. Set the address using one of the subsequently listed options:
– using the address switch
– from an operator panel using parameter p0918
– in STARTER using screen form "Control Unit/Communication/PROFIBUS" – or using
the expert list in parameter p0918
After you have changed the address in STARTER, carry out RAM to ROM ( ).
2. Switch off the inverter supply voltage.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark.
4. Switch on the inverter supply voltage again.
Your settings become active after switching on.
You have now changed the bus address.

Commissioning 5
5.1 Commissioning guidelines
Overview
1. Define the requirements of your
application placed on the drive.
→ (Page 112) .
2. Reset the inverter when
required to the factory setting.
→ (Page 143) .
3. Check whether the factory
setting of the inverter is already
sufficient for your application.
4. When commissioning the drive,
set the following:
– The closed-loop motor
control
– The inputs and outputs
– The fieldbus interface
5. When required, adapt the drive
→ (Page 147).
6. Back up your settings
→ (Page 315).

Commissioning
5.2 Preparing for commissioning
5.2.1 Collecting motor data

Before starting commissioning, you must know the following data:
● Which motor is connected to the inverter?
Note down the Article No. of the motor and the motor’s nameplate data.
If available, note down the motor code on the motor’s nameplate.
● In which region of the world is the motor to be used?

- Europe IEC: 50 Hz [kW]
- North America NEMA: 60 Hz [hp] or 60 Hz [kW]
● How is the motor connected?
Pay attention to the connection of the motor (star connection [Y] or delta connection [Δ]).
Note the appropriate motor data for connecting.
5.2.2 Inverter factory setting
Motor
In the factory, the inverter is set for an induction motor matching the rated power of the
Power Module.
Inverter control
You can find the factory settings for the inverter control in the following Chapters:
● Factory setting of the CU240B-2 interfaces (Page 84)
● Factory setting of the CU240E-2 interfaces (Page 91)

Commissioning
Switching the motor on and off

The inverter is set in the factory as follows:
● After the ON command, the motor accelerates in 10 s (referred to 1500 rpm) to its speed
setpoint.
● After the OFF1 command, the motor brakes down to standstill with the ramp-down time.
● The motor direction of rotation reverses with the reversing command.
Ramp-down • With the PM230 Power Module: 30 s

time: • For all other Power Modules: 10 s
Figure 5-1 Switching on and switching off the motor and reversing in the factory setting
Traverse the motor in the jog mode

For an inverter with PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface, operation can be switched over
using digital input DI 3. The motor is either switched on and off via the fieldbus – or operated
in the jog mode via its digital inputs.
For a control command at the respective digital input, the motor rotates with ±150 rpm. The
same ramp-up and ramp-down times as described above apply.
Figure 5-2 Jogging the motor in the factory setting

Commissioning
Operate the motor in the factory setting

For basic applications, you can try to operate the drive with a rated power < 18.5 kW without
any other commissioning steps. Check whether the control quality of the drive without
commissioning is adequate for the requirements of the application.
We recommend that you configure the drive with the precise motor data.
5.2.3 Defining additional requirements for the application
What speed limits should be set (minimum and maximum speed)?

● Minimum speed - factory setting 0 [rpm]
The minimum speed is the lowest speed of the motor independent of the speed setpoint.
A minimum speed is, for example, useful for fans or pumps.
● Maximum speed - factory setting 1500 [rpm]
The inverter limits the motor speed to this value.
What motor ramp-up time and ramp-down time are needed for the application?
The ramp-up and ramp-down time define the maximum motor acceleration when the speed
setpoint changes. The ramp-up and ramp-down time is the time between motor standstill and
the maximum speed, or between the maximum speed and motor standstill.
● Ramp-up time - factory setting 10 s
● Ramp-down time - factory setting 10 s

Commissioning
5.3 Commissioning using a BOP-2 operator panel
5.3.1 Inserting the BOP-2
Plugging on an operator panel
Procedure
To plug an Operator Panel on the Control Unit, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the lower edge of the Operator Panel into the matching recess
of the Control Unit.
2. Press the Operator Panel onto the inverter until you hear the latching
mechanism engage.
You have plugged an operator panel onto the Control Unit.
The operator panel is ready for operation when you connect the inverter
to the power supply.

Commissioning
5.3.2 Starting basic commissioning
Carry out basic commissioning
Preconditions
• The power supply is switched on.

• The operator panel displays setpoints and actual values.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to carry out basic commissioning:
1. Press the ESC key.
2. Press one of the arrow keys until the BOP-2 displays the "SETUP" menu.
3. In the "SETUP" menu, press the OK key to start basic commissioning.
4. If you wish to restore all of the parameters to the factory setting before
the basic commissioning:
4.1. Switch over the display using an arrow key: nO → YES
4.2. Press the OK key.
5. When selecting an application class, the inverter assigns the motor

control with the appropriate default settings:
STANDARD → Standard Drive Control (Page 118)
DYNAMIC → Dynamic Drive Control (Page 120)
EXPERT If you select this setting or if no application class is
listed: → Basic commissioning for experts
(Page 124)

Commissioning
Selecting a suitable application class

When selecting an application class, the inverter assigns the appropriate settings to the
motor control.
Application class Standard Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control

Motors that can Induction motors Induction and synchronous motors
be operated
Power Modules PM240, PM240-2, PM340
that can be op-
erated
Application ex- • Pumps, fans, and compressors with flow char- • Pumps and compressors with displacement
amples acteristic machines
• Wet or dry blasting technology • Rotary furnaces
• Mills, mixers, kneaders, crushers, agitators • Extruder
• Horizontal conveyor technology (conveyor • Centrifuge
belts, roller conveyors, chain conveyors)
• Basic spindles
Properties • Typical correction time after a speed change: • Typical correction time after a speed change:
100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
• Typical correction • Typical correction
time after a load time after a load
surge: 500 ms surge: 200 ms
• Standard Drive • Dynamic Drive
Control is suitable Control controls
for the following and limits the mo-
requirements: tor torque
– Motor power • Torque accuracy
ratings that can be
< 45 kW achieved: ± 5 %
– Acceleration time 0 → rated speed (depend- for 15 % … 100 % of the rated speed
ing on the rated motor power): • We recommend Dynamic Drive Control for the
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW) following applications:
– Applications with increasing load torque – Motor power ratings > 11 kW
without load surges – For load surges of 10 % … >100 % of the
• Standard Drive Control is insensitive with re- rated motor torque
spect to inaccurate motor data settings • Dynamic Drive Control is necessary for a
ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (dependent on
the rated motor power):
< 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (250 kW).
Max. output 550 Hz 240 Hz
frequency
Torque control Without torque control Speed control with lower-level torque control
Commissioning • Contrary to "Dynamic Drive Control" a speed • Reduced number of parameters when com-
controller does not have to be set pared to "Configuration for experts"
• In comparison to "Configuration for experts":
– Simplified commissioning using preas-
signed motor data
– Reduced number of parameters

Commissioning
5.3.3 Standard Drive Control
6. Motor standard
KW 50HZ IEC
HP 60HZ NEMA
KW 60HZ IEC 60 Hz
7. Supply voltage for the inverter
8. Enter the motor data:

8.1. Motor type
Depending on the particular inverter, it is possible that the
BOP-2 does not list all of the following motor types.
INDUCT Third-party induction motor
SYNC Third-party synchronous motor
RELUCT Third-party reluctance motor
1L… IND 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1LA9 induction motors
1LE1 IND 100 1LE1☐9 with motor code on the rating plate
1PH8 IND Induction motor
1FP1 Reluctance motor
1F… SYN 1FG1, 1FK7 synchronous motor, without encoder
8.2. If you have selected a motor type > 100, then you must enter
the motor code:
With the correct motor code, the inverter assigns the motor
data the following values.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the mo-
tor code = 0, and enter the motor data from p0304 and on-
wards from the rating plate.
8.3. 87 Hz motor operation
The BOP-2 only displays this step if you previously selected
IEC as the motor standard (EUR/USA, P100 = KW 50HZ).
8.4. Rated voltage
8.5. Rated current
8.6. Rated power
8.7. Rated frequency
8.8. Rated speed
8.9. Motor cooling

SELF Natural cooling
FORCED Forced-air cooling
LIQUID Liquid cooling
NO FAN Without fan

Commissioning
9. Select the application:

VEC STD Constant load: Typical applications include belt conveyor
drives.
PUMP FAN Speed-dependent load: Typical applications include
pumps and fans.
10. Select the default setting for the interfaces of the inverter that is suita-
ble for your application. You can find the available default settings in
Sections:
• Default settings of the CU240B-2 interfaces (Page 86)
• Default settings of the CU240E-2 interfaces (Page 93)
11. Minimum and maximum motor speed
12.
13. Motor ramp-up time
14. Motor ramp-down time
15. Ramp-down time for the OFF3 command
16. Complete the basic commissioning:

You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the basic commissioning of your
inverter.

Commissioning
5.3.4 Dynamic Drive Control
6. Motor standard
KW 50HZ IEC
HP 60HZ NEMA
KW 60HZ IEC 60 Hz
7. Supply voltage for the inverter

8.1. Motor type
1LE1 IND 1LE1☐9 with motor code on the rating plate
100
the motor code:
With the correct motor code, the inverter assigns the motor
data the following values.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the mo-
tor code = 0, and enter the motor data from p0304 and on-
wards from the rating plate.
8.4. Rated voltage
8.5. Rated current
8.6. Rated power
8.8. Rated speed
8.9. Motor cooling


Commissioning
NO FAN Without fan

OP LOOP Recommended setting for standard applications.
CL LOOP Recommended setting for applications with short ramp-
up and ramp-down times. This setting is not suitable for
hoisting gear and cranes/lifting gear.
HVY LOAD Recommended setting for applications with a high break
loose torque.
Sections:
11. Minimum and maximum motor speed
12.
13. Motor ramp-up time
16. Motor data identification

Select the method which the inverter uses to measure the data of the
connected motor:
OFF Motor data is not measured.
ST RT OP Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at stand-
still and with the motor rotating.
STILL OP Measure the motor data at standstill.
Select this setting if the motor cannot rotate freely – for
example, if the traversing range is mechanically limited.

inverter.

Commissioning
Identifying the motor data and optimizing the closed-loop control

The inverter has several techniques to automatically identify the motor data and optimize the
speed control.
To start the motor data identification routine, you must switch-on the motor via the terminal
strip, fieldbus or from the operator panel.
WARNING
Risk of death due to machine motion while motor data identification is active
For the stationary measurement, the motor can make several rotations. The rotating
measurement accelerates the motor up to its rated speed. Secure dangerous machine
parts before starting motor data identification:
• Before switching on, ensure that nobody is working on the machine or located within its
working area.
• Secure the machine's work area against unintended access.
• Lower hanging/suspended loads to the floor.
Preconditions
● In the basic commissioning, you have selected a motor data identification method, e.g.
measuring the motor data at standstill
After basic commissioning has been completed, the inverter outputs alarm A07991.
This is symbol in the BOP-2 indicates an active alarm.
● The motor has cooled down to the ambient temperature.

An excessively high motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results.

Commissioning
Procedure when using the BOP-2 operator panel

To start the motor data identification, proceed as follows:
1. ⇒ Press the HAND/AUTO key. The BOP-2 displays the symbol for
manual operation.
2. Switch on the motor.
3. The motor data identification takes several seconds.

Wait until the inverter switches off the motor after motor data identi-
fication has been completed.
If you have also selected a rotating measurement in addition to the
motor data identification, then the inverter again issues the alarm
A07991.
4. Switch the motor on again in order to optimize the rotating meas-
urement.
5. Wait until the inverter switches off the motor after completion of the
optimization. The optimization time depends on the rated motor
power: 20 s … 2 min.
6. Switch the inverter control from HAND to AUTO.
You have now completed motor data identification.

Commissioning
5.3.5 Basic commissioning for experts
6. Motor standard
KW / 50HZ IEC
HP / 60HZ NEMA
KW / 60HZ IEC 60 Hz
7. Overload capability and supply voltage of the inverter
7.1. Overload capability
HIGH OVL Load cycle with "High Overload"
LOW OVL Load cycle with "Low Overload"
7.2. Inverter supply voltage

8.1. Motor type
1LE1 IND 100 1LE1☐9 with motor code on the rating plate
the motor code:
With the correct motor code, the inverter assigns the motor data
the following values.
If you do not know the motor code, then you must set the motor
code = 0, and enter the motor data from p0304 and onwards
from the rating plate.
8.4. Rated voltage
8.5. Rated current
8.6. Rated power
8.8. Rated speed

Commissioning
8.9. Motor cooling

NO FAN Without fan
9. Application and control mode
9.1. Select the application:
VEC STD In all applications, which do not fit the other
setting options.
PUMP FAN Applications involving pumps and fans
SLVC 0HZ Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-
down times. However, this setting is not suita-
ble for hoisting gear and cranes/lifting gear.
PUMP 0HZ Setting only for steady-state operation with
slow speed changes. We recommend setting
VEC STD if load surges in operation cannot
be ruled out.
The selection option depends on the Power Module being used. There is no se-
lection option for PM230 Power Modules.
9.2. Select the control mode:
VF LIN U/f control with linear characteristic
VF LIN F Flux current control (FCC)
VF QUAD U/f control with square law characteristic
SPD N EN Vector control without encoder

Commissioning
Select a suitable control mode
Control mode U/f control or flux current control (FCC) Sensorless vector control
be operated
Power Modules No restrictions
that can be op-
erated
• Basic spindles
100 ms … 200 < 100 ms
ms • Typical correction
• Typical correc- time after a load
tion time after a surge: 200 ms
load surge: • The control mode
500 ms controls and limits
• The control the motor torque
mode is suita- • Torque accuracy
ble to address that can be
the following achieved: ± 5 %
requirements: for 15 % … 100 %
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW of the rated speed
– Ramp-up time 0 → Rated speed (dependent • We recommend the control mode for the fol-
on the rated motor power): lowing applications:
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
– Applications with constant load torque
– For load surges of 10 % … >100 % of the
without load surges
rated motor torque
• Die Regelungsart is insensitive with respect to
• The control mode is necessary for a ramp-up
imprecise setting of the motor data
time 0 → Rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power):
< 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (250 kW).
frequency
Closed-loop Without torque control Torque control with and without higher-level speed
torque control control
Commissioning • Contrary to encoderless vector control, the
speed controller does not have to be set

Commissioning
Sections:
11. Minimum speed of the motor
12.
13. Motor ramp-up time.
16. Motor data identification

Select the method which the inverter uses to measure the data of the
connected motor:
OFF No measurement of motor data.
STIL ROT Recommended setting: Measure the motor data at stand-
still and with the motor rotating.
STILL Measure the motor data at standstill.
Select this setting if one of the following cases is applica-
ble:
• You have selected control mode "SPD N EN",
however, the motor cannot freely rotate - for a
mechanically limited travel range, for example.
• You have selected U/f control as control mode, e.g.
"VF LIN"or "VF QUAD".
ROT Measuring the motor data while it is rotating.
17.1. Switchover the display using an arrow key: nO → YES

inverter.

Commissioning
Identifying the motor data and optimizing the closed-loop control

The inverter has several techniques to automatically identify the motor data and optimize the
speed control.
To start the motor data identification routine, you must switch-on the motor via the terminal
strip, fieldbus or from the operator panel.
WARNING
Risk of death due to machine motion while motor data identification is active
For the stationary measurement, the motor can make several rotations. The rotating
measurement accelerates the motor up to its rated speed. Secure dangerous machine
working area.
• Secure the machine's work area against unintended access.
• Lower hanging/suspended loads to the floor.
Preconditions
● In the basic commissioning, you have selected a motor data identification method, e.g.
measuring the motor data at standstill
After basic commissioning has been completed, the inverter outputs alarm A07991.
This is symbol in the BOP-2 indicates an active alarm.

An excessively high motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results.

Commissioning
Procedure when using the BOP-2 operator panel

To start the motor data identification, proceed as follows:
1. ⇒ Press the HAND/AUTO key. The BOP-2 displays the symbol for
manual operation.
3. The motor data identification takes several seconds.

Wait until the inverter switches off the motor after motor data identi-
fication has been completed.
If you have also selected a rotating measurement in addition to the
motor data identification, then the inverter again issues the alarm
A07991.
4. Switch the motor on again in order to optimize the rotating meas-
urement.
5. Wait until the inverter switches off the motor after completion of the
optimization. The optimization time depends on the rated motor
power: 20 s … 2 min.
6. Switch the inverter control from HAND to AUTO.
You have now completed motor data identification.

Commissioning
5.4 Commissioning with a PC
PC-based commissioning tools

STARTER and Startdrive are PC tools to commission Siemens inverters. The graphic user
interface supports you when commissioning your inverter. Most of the inverter functions are
available in screen forms.
The screen forms that are shown in this manual show generally valid examples. The number
of setting options available in screen forms depends on the particular inverter type.
Preconditions for commissioning

You can access the inverter with STARTER or Startdrive either
via a USB connection or via the fieldbus.
System requirements and download:
• STARTER download
985/133100)
• Startdrive
265)
Help for operation and for the functions of the commissioning tools:
● STARTER videos (http://www.automation.siemens.com/mcms/mc-drives/en/low-voltage-
inverter/sinamics-g120/videos/Pages/videos.aspx)
● Startdrive tutorial (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73598459)
Overview of basic commissioning

Basic commissioning using a PC essentially consists of the following steps:
1. Creating a project
2. Integrate an inverter into the project
3. Go online and start basic commissioning
4. Carry out basic commissioning
5. Identify motor data
Steps 1-5 are described below.

Commissioning
5.4.1 Creating a project
Creating a project
Procedure
In order to create a new project, proceed as follows:
1. In the menu, select "Project" → "New…".
2. Specify a name of your choice for the project.
You have created a new project.
5.4.2 Transfer inverters connected via USB into the project
Transferring inverters connected via USB to the project
Procedure
Proceed as follows to transfer an inverter connected via USB to your project:
1. Switch on the inverter supply voltage.
2. First insert a USB cable into your PC and then into the inverter.
3. The PC operating system installs the USB driver when you are connecting the inverter
and PC together for the first time.
– Windows 7 installs the driver automatically.
– For Windows XP you must acknowledge several system messages.
4. Start the commissioning software.
5. Select the "Accessible nodes".
Figure 5-3 "Accessible nodes" in STARTER

Commissioning
Figure 5-4 "Accessible nodes" in Startdrive
6. When the USB interface is appropriately set, then the "Accessible nodes" screen form
shows the inverters that can be accessed.
Figure 5-5 Inverters found in STARTER
Figure 5-6 Inverters found in Startdrive
If you have not correctly set the USB interface, then the following "No additional nodes
found" message is displayed. In this case, follow the description below.
7. Proceed as follows:
With STARTER With Startdrive

• Select the inverter ☑. • Accept the inverter into the project using the menu:
• Press the "Accept" button. • "Online - Upload device as new station (hardware and
software)"
You have transferred an inverter accessible via the USB interface into your project.

Commissioning
Setting the USB interface in STARTER
Procedure
Proceed as follows to set the USB interface in STARTER:
1. Set the "Access point" to "DEVICE (STARTER, Scout)" and the "PG/PC interface" to
"S7USB".
2. Press the "Update" button.
You have set the USB interface.

STARTER now shows the inverters connected via USB.
5.4.3 Go online and start the configuration wizards
Procedure with STARTER

Proceed as follows to start configuration of the inverter:
1. Select your project and go online: .

2. In the following screen form, select the inverter with
which you wish to go online.
3. Download the hardware configuration found online in
your project (PG or PC).
Significance of the symbol in front of the inverter:
(A) The inverter is online.
(B) The inverter is offline
4. When you are online, double-click on "Control Unit".

Commissioning
5. Start the configuration wizards:
You have started to configure the inverter.
Procedure with Startdrive

Proceed as follows to start configuration of the inverter:
1. Select your project and go online:
2. In the following screen form, select the inverter with which you wish to go online.
3. Once you are online, select "Commissioning" → "Commissioning Wizard":
You have started to configure the inverter.
Configuring the drive
Procedure
To configure the drive, proceed as follows:
1. When selecting an application class, the inverter assigns the motor con-
trol with the appropriate default settings:
• [1] Standard Drive Control (Page 136)
• [2] Dynamic Drive Control (Page 137)
• [0] Expert - or if no application class is listed:
→ Configuration for experts (Page 138)

Commissioning
Selecting a suitable application class

When selecting an application class, the inverter assigns the appropriate settings to the
motor control.
Application class Standard Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control

be operated
Power Modules PM240, PM240-2, PM340
that can be op-
erated
• Basic spindles
100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
• Standard Drive • Dynamic Drive
Control is suitable Control controls
for the following and limits the
requirements: motor torque
– Motor power • Torque accuracy
ratings that can be
< 45 kW achieved: ± 5 %
– Acceleration time 0 → rated speed (depend- for 15 % … 100 % of the rated speed
ing on the rated motor power): • We recommend Dynamic Drive Control for the
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW) following applications:
– Applications with increasing load torque – Motor power ratings > 11 kW
without load surges
• Standard Drive Control is insensitive with re- rated motor torque
spect to inaccurate motor data settings • Dynamic Drive Control is necessary for a
ramp-up time 0 → rated speed (dependent on
the rated motor power):
< 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (250 kW).
frequency
Torque control Without torque control Speed control with lower-level torque control
Commissioning • Contrary to "Dynamic Drive Control" a speed • Reduced number of parameters when com-
controller does not have to be set pared to "Configuration for experts"
• In comparison to "Configuration for experts":
– Simplified commissioning using preas-
signed motor data
– Reduced number of parameters

Commissioning
5.4.4 Standard Drive Control
Procedure for application class [1]: Standard Drive Control

2. Select the I/O configuration to preassign the inverter interfaces.
The possible configurations are listed in Sections: Default settings of the
CU240B-2 interfaces (Page 86) and Default settings of the CU240E-2
interfaces (Page 93).
3. Set the applicable motor standard and the inverter supply voltage.
4. Select your motor.
5. Enter the motor data according to the rating plate of your motor.
If you have selected a motor based on its article number, the data has
already been entered.
6. Set the most important parameters to suit your application.
• [0] Constant load: Typical applications include conveyor drives
• [1] Speed-dependent load: Typical applications include pumps and
fans
You have now configured the inverter.

Commissioning
5.4.5 Dynamic Drive Control
Procedure for application class [2]: Dynamic Drive Control

7. Application:
• [0]: Recommended setting for standard applications.
• [1]: Recommended setting for applications with ramp-up and ramp-
down times < 10 s. This setting is not suitable for hoisting gear and
cranes.
• [5] Recommended setting for applications with a high break loose
torque.
Motor identification:
• [11]: Recommended setting. After an ON command, the inverter
identifies the motor data – and with a new ON command, optimizes
the speed controller.
• [12]: After an ON command, the inverter identifies the motor data at
standstill. Recommended setting if the motor cannot freely rotate,
e.g. for a mechanically limited traversing path.

Commissioning
5.4.6 Configuration for experts
Procedure without application class or for the application class [0]: Expert
2. Select the control mode.
Select the application for the inverter:
• "[0] Load cycle with high overload for applications requiring a high
dynamic performance, e.g. conveyor systems.
• "[1] Load cycle with low overload ..." for applications that do not
require a high dynamic performance, e.g. pumps or fans.
• [6], [7]: Load cycles for applications with encoderless 1FK7
synchronous motors.
8. Application:
• [0]: In all applications that do not fall under [1] … [3]
• [1]: Applications involving pumps and fans
• [2]: Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times. However,
this setting is not suitable for hoisting gear and cranes/lifting gear.
• [3]: Setting only for steady-state operation with slow speed changes.
We recommend setting [1] if load surges in operation cannot be
ruled out.
Motor identification:
• [1]: Recommended setting. After an ON command, the inverter
identifies the motor data – and with a new ON command, optimizes
the speed controller.
• [2]: After an ON command, the inverter identifies the motor data at
standstill. Recommended setting for the following cases:
– You have selected "Speed control" as control mode, however the
motor cannot freely rotate, e.g. for mechanically limited traversing
sections.
– You have set "V/f control" as control mode.
• [3]: This setting only makes sense after the motor identification [2].
The inverter optimizes the speed controller at the next ON
command.

Commissioning
Calculating the motor parameters: Select "Complete calculation".

9. Set the check mark for "RAM to ROM (save data in the drive)" to save your data in the
inverter so that it is not lost when the power fails.
Select "Finish".
Complete the configuration in STARTER
Complete the configuration in Startdrive


Commissioning
Select a suitable control mode
Control mode U/f control or flux current control (FCC) Sensorless vector control
be operated
Power Modules No restrictions
that can be op-
erated
• Basic spindles
100 ms … 200 ms < 100 ms
• The control mode • The control mode
is suitable to ad- controls and limits
dress the follow- the motor torque
ing requirements: • Torque accuracy
– Motor power that can be
ratings achieved: ± 5 %
< 45 kW for 15 % …
– Ramp-up time 0 → Rated speed (dependent 100 % of the rated speed
on the rated motor power):
• We recommend the control mode for the fol-
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW)
lowing applications:
– Applications with constant load torque
– Motor power ratings > 11 kW
without load surges
• Die Regelungsart is insensitive with respect to
rated motor torque
imprecise setting of the motor data
• The control mode is necessary for a ramp-up
time 0 → Rated speed (dependent on the rated
motor power):
< 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (250 kW).
frequency
Closed-loop Without torque control Torque control with and without higher-level speed
torque control control
Commissioning • Contrary to encoderless vector control, the
speed controller does not have to be set

Commissioning
5.4.7 Identify motor data
Identify motor data
WARNING
Danger to life from machine movements while motor data identification is in progress
The stationary measurement can turn the motor a number of revolutions. The rotating
measurement accelerates the motor up to the rated speed. Secure dangerous machine
working area.
• Secure the machine's working area against unintended access.
• Lower suspended loads to the floor.
Preconditions
● You selected a method of motor data identification during basic commissioning, e.g.
measurement of the motor data while the motor is stationary.
When basic commissioning is complete, the inverter issues alarm A07991.
An excessively high motor temperature distorts the results of motor data identification.

To initiate motor data identification and optimize the motor control, proceed as follows:
1. Open the control panel.
Figure 5-7 Control panel
2. Assume master control for the inverter.

3. Set the "Enable signals"

Commissioning

The inverter starts the motor data identification. This measurement can take several
minutes. After the measurement, the inverter switches off the motor.
5. Relinquish the master control after the motor data identification.
6. Press button (RAM to ROM).
You have completed the motor data identification.

To initiate motor data identification and optimize the motor control, proceed as follows:
1. Open the control panel.
2. Assume master control for the inverter.

3. Set the "Drive enables"
The inverter starts the motor data identification. This measurement can take several
minutes. After the measurement, the inverter switches off the motor.
5. Relinquish the master control after the motor data identification.
6. Save the settings in the inverter (RAM → EEPROM):
You have completed the motor data identification.
Self-optimization of the speed control

If you have selected not only motor data identification but also rotating measurement with
self-optimization of the speed control, you must switch on the motor again as described
above and wait for the optimization run to finish.

Commissioning
5.5 Restoring the factory setting

There are cases where something goes wrong when commissioning a drive system e.g.:
● The line voltage was interrupted during commissioning and you were not able to complete
commissioning.
● You got confused during the commissioning and you can no longer understand the
individual settings that you made.
● You do not know whether the inverter was already operational.
In cases such as these, reset the inverter to the factory setting.
Restoring the factory settings when the safety functions are enabled
If you are using the integrated safety functions of the inverter, e.g. "Safe Torque Off", you
must reset the safety functions separately from the remaining inverter settings.
The settings of the safety functions are protected by a password.
Settings that are not changed when restoring the factory setting
The communication settings and the settings of the motor standard (IEC/NEMA) are kept
when restoring the factory setting.
5.5.1 Resetting the safety functions to the factory setting

To reset the safety function settings to the factory setting without changing the standard
settings, proceed as follows:
1. Go online.
2. Open the screen form of the safety functions.
3. Select the button to restore the factory settings.
4. Enter the password,for the safety functions.

Commissioning
5. Confirm that the parameters have been saved (RAM to ROM).

6. Go offline.
You have restored the safety functions in the inverter to the factory settings.

To reset the safety function settings to the factory setting without changing the standard
settings, proceed as follows:
1. Go online.
2. Select "Commissioning".
3. Select "Backing up/reset".
4. Select "Safety parameters are reset".
5. Click the "Start" button.
6. Enter the password,for the safety functions.
7. Confirm that the parameters have been saved (RAM to ROM).
8. Go offline.
10.Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark.
11.Switch on the inverter supply voltage again.
You have restored the safety functions in the inverter to the factory settings.

Commissioning
Procedure with an operator panel

Proceed as follows to restore the inverter safety functions to the factory settings:
1. p0010 = 30Set
Activate reset settings.
2. p9761 = …
Enter the password for the safety functions
3. Start the reset with p0970 = 5.
4. Wait until the inverter sets p0970 = 0.
5. Set p0971 = 1.
6. Wait until the inverter sets p0971 = 0.
You have restored the safety function settings of your inverter to the factory settings.
5.5.2 Restore the factory settings (without safety functions)
Restore the factory inverter settings

Proceed as follows to reset the inverter to factory settings:
1. Select your drive.
2. Go online.
3. Open "Drive Navigator".
4. Select the "Commissioning" button.

5. Press the "Factory setting" button.
6. ☑ In the screen form, select "After loading copy RAM to ROM".
7. Start the reset.
8. Wait until the inverter has been reset to the factory setting.
You have reset the inverter to factory settings.

Commissioning

1. Go online.
2. Select "Commissioning".
4. Select "All parameters are reset".
5. Press the "Start" button.
Procedure with the BOP-2 operator panel

1. In the "Options" menu, select the "DRVRESET" entry
2. Confirm the reset using the OK key.

Advanced commissioning 6
6.1 Overview of the inverter functions
Figure 6-1 Overview of inverter functions

Advanced commissioning
6.1 Overview of the inverter functions
Functions relevant to all applications Functions required in special applications only

The functions that you require in each application are shown The functions whose parameters you only need to adapt
in a dark color in the function overview above. when actually required are shown in white in the function
You set these functions during the basic commissioning, so overview above.
that in many cases, the motor can be operated without hav-
ing to make any additional settings.
Inverter control is responsible for all of the other The protection and monitoring functions pre-
inverter functions. Among other things, it defines vent damage to the motor, inverter and driven
how the inverter responds to commands from load, e.g. by monitoring the temperature or
the higher-level control system. torque.
Inverter control (Page 149) Protection functions (Page 238)
The commands from the higher-level control are The application-specific functions control, for
sent to the inverter via digital inputs or the example, a motor holding brake – or permit a
fieldbus. The inverter returns its status signals to higher-level closed-loop pressure or tempera-
the outputs of the Control Unit or to the fieldbus. ture control to be implemented using the tech-
Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip nology controller.
(Page 151) Application-specific functions (Page 249)
Connecting the inverter to the fieldbus
(Page 104)
You must define a setpoint , which defines the The safety functions fulfill increased require-
motor speed, for example. ments regarding the functional safety of the
Setpoints (Page 196) drive.
Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function
(Page 294)
The setpoint processing uses a ramp-function The extended safety functions monitor the drive
generator to prevent speed steps occurring and speed.
to limit the speed to a permissible maximum The extended safety functions are described in
value. the "Safety Integrated Function Manual", see
Setpoint calculation (Page 204) also Section: Manuals for your inverter
The motor closed-loop control ensures that the (Page 460).
motor follows the speed setpoint. You can select
either vector control or U/f control.
Motor control (Page 214)

6.2 Inverter control
6.2.1 Switching the motor on and off
After switching the supply voltage on, the converter normally goes
into the "ready to start" state. In this state, the converter waits for
the command to switch-on the motor:
• The converter switches on the motor with the ON command.
The converter changes to the "Operation" state.
• The converter brakes the motor after the OFF1 command. The
converter switches off the motor once standstill has been
reached. The converter is again "ready to start".
Converter states and commands for switching the motor on and off
In addition to the OFF1 command, there are other commands that are used to switch off the
motor:
● OFF2 - the converter immediately switches off the motor without first braking it.
● OFF3 - this command means "quick stop". After OFF3, the converter brakes the motor
with the OFF3 ramp-down time. After reaching standstill, the converter switches off the
motor.
The command is frequently used for exceptional operating situations where it is
necessary to brake the motor especially quickly. Collision protection is a typical
application for this function.
● Block operation - The inverter switches the motor off.
● Enable operation - The inverter switches the motor on.
Figure 6-2 Internal sequence control of the converter when the motor is switched on and off

The abbreviations S1 … S5b to identify the converter states are defined in the PROFIdrive
profile.
Converter Explanation
status
S1 In this state, the converter does not respond to the ON command. The converter
goes into this state under the following conditions:
• ON was active when switching on the converter.
Exception: When the automatic start function is active, ON must be active after
switching on the power supply.
• OFF2 or OFF3 is selected.
S2 This state is required to switch on the motor.
S3 The converter waits for the operating enable.
S4 The motor is switched on.
S51 The motor was switched off with OFF1 and brakes with the ramp-down time of the
ramp-function generator.
S52 The motor was switched off with OFF3 and brakes with the OFF3 ramp-down time,
or at the current limit.

6.2.2 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

This chapter describes how you adapt the function of individual digital and analog inputs and
outputs of the inverter.
1 Not available with Control Units CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP
Figure 6-3 Internal interconnection of the inputs and outputs

6.2.2.1 Digital inputs
Changing the function of a digital input

To change the function of a digital input, you must intercon-
nect the status parameter of the digital input with a binector
input of your choice.
See also Section: Interconnecting signals in the inverter
(Page 449).
Binector inputs are marked with "BI" in the parameter list of
the List Manual.
1Not available with CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP Control Units
Table 6- 1 Binector inputs (BI) of the inverter (selection)
BI Significance BI Significance
p0810 Command data set selection CDS bit 0 p1036 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower
p0840 ON/OFF1 p1055 Jog bit 0
p0844 OFF2 p1056 Jog bit 1
p0848 OFF3 p1113 Setpoint inversion
p0852 Enable operation p1201 Flying restart enable signal source
p0855 Unconditionally release holding brake p2103 1. Acknowledge faults
p0856 Enable speed controller p2106 External fault 1
p0858 Unconditionally close holding brake p2112 External alarm 1
p1020 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0 p2200 Technology controller enable
p1021 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1 p3330 Two/three-wire control, control command
1
2
3
p1035 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise
A complete list of the binector outputs is provided in the List Manual.
Changing the function of a digital input - Example

To acknowledge fault messages of the inverter using digital
input DI 1, you must interconnect DI1 with the command to
acknowledge faults (p2103): Set p2103 = 722.1.
Advanced settings
You can debounce the digital input signal using parameter p0724.
For more information, please see the parameter list and the function block diagrams 2220 f
of the List Manual.

Analog inputs as digital inputs

To use an analog input as additional digital input,
you must interconnect the corresponding status
parameter r0722.11 or r0722.12 with a binector
input of your choice.
You may operate the analog input as digital input
with 10 V or with 24 V.
1 Not available with CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP Control Units
NOTICE
Destruction of the analog input as a result of the excessively high input current
The 10 V or 24 V voltage source will destroy the analog input if the operating mode selector
switch is set to "Current input" (I).
• Set the operating mode selector switch of the analog input to voltage (U).

6.2.2.2 Safety-related input

This manual describes the STO safety function with control via a safety-related input. All
other safety functions, additional safety-related inputs of the inverter and the control of the
safety functions via PROFIsafe are described in the Safety Integrated Function Manual.
Defining the safety-related input

If you use the STO safety function, then you must configure the terminal strip during the
basic commissioning for a safety-related input, e.g. with p0015 = 2 (see Section Terminal
strips on CU240E-2 Control Units (Page 89)).
The inverter combines digital inputs DI 4 and DI 5 to create a

safety-related input.
See also Section: Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function (Page 294).
Note
Control Units CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP do not have a safety-relevant digital input.
Which devices are you allowed to connect?

The safety-related input is designed for the following devices:
● Connection of safety sensors, e.g. emergency stop command devices or light curtains.
● Connection of pre-processing devices, e.g. fail-safe control systems and safety relays.
Signal states
The inverter expects signals with the same state at its safety-related input:
● High signal: The safety function is deselected.
● Low signal: The safety function is selected.
Fault detection
The inverter evaluates deviations in the two signals of the safety-related input. The inverter
thus detects, for example the following faults:
● Cable break
● Defective sensor
The inverter cannot detect the following faults:
● Cross-circuit of the two cables
● Short-circuit between signal cable and 24 V power supply

Bright and dark test

The inverter filters signal changes using bright and dark tests at its safety-related inputs:
● SIL 2 / PL d: the safety-related inputs of the inverter have an adjustable software filter.
● SIL 3 / PL e: a fixed hardware filter suppresses signal changes ≤ 4 ms at the safety-
related input of the PM240-2 (FSD, FSE) Power Module.
Special measures when establishing connections

When routing cables over longer distances, e.g. between remote control cabinets, you have
the following options to reduce the risk of damaged cables of your plant or machine:
● Use shielded cables with grounded shield.
● Lay signal cables in steel pipes.
Examples of connecting a safety-related input can be found in Section: Connecting the
safety-related input (Page 453).

6.2.2.3 Digital outputs
Changing the function of a digital output

To change the function of a digital output, you must
interconnect the digital output with a binector output
of your choice.
See also Section: Interconnecting signals in the in-
verter (Page 449).
Binector outputs are marked with "BO" in the param-
eter list of the List Manual.
1 Not available with CU240B-2 and CU240B-2 DP Control Units
Table 6- 2 Binector outputs (BO) of the inverter (selection)
0 Deactivating digital output r0052.9 Process data control

r0052.0 Drive ready r0052.10 f_actual >= p1082 (f_max)
r0052.1 Drive ready for operation r0052.11 Alarm: Motor current/torque limit
r0052.2 Drive running r0052.12 Brake active
r0052.3 Drive fault active r0052.13 Motor overload
r0052.4 OFF2 active r0052.14 Motor CW rotation
r0052.5 OFF3 active r0052.15 Inverter overload
r0052.6 Closing lockout active r0053.0 DC braking active
r0052.7 Drive alarm active r0053.2 f_actual > p1080 (f_min)
r0052.8 Setpoint/actual value discrepancy r0053.6 f_actual ≥ setpoint (f_setpoint)
The complete list of binector outputs is provided in the List Manual.
Changing the function of a digital output - Example

To output inverter fault messages via digital output DO 1,
you must interconnect DO1 with the fault messages: Set
p0731 = 52.3.
Advanced settings
You can invert the signal of the digital output using parameter p0748.
For more information, please see the parameter list and the function block diagrams 2230 f
of the List Manual.

6.2.2.4 Analog inputs
Overview
Changing the function of an analog input:
1. Define the analog input type using
parameter p0756[x] and the switch on the
inverter.
2. Define the function of the analog input by
interconnecting parameter p0755[x] with
1Not
available with CU240B-2 and a connector input CI of your choice.
CU240B-2 DP Control Units
See also Section: Interconnecting signals
in the inverter (Page 449).
Define the analog input type

The variable speed drive offers a series of default settings, which you can select using
parameter p0756:
AI 0 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[0] = 0

Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input -10 V … +10 V 4
No sensor connected 8
AI 1 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[1] = 0
Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input -10 V … +10 V 4
No sensor connected 8
In addition, you must also set the switch associated with the analog input.
You can find the switch on the Control Unit behind the lower front door.
• Voltage input: Switch position U (factory setting)
• Current input: Switch position I

Characteristics
If you change the analog input type using p0756, then the inverter automatically selects the
appropriate scaling of the analog input. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two
points (p0757, p0758) and (p0759, p0760). Parameters p0757 … p0760 are assigned to an
analog input via their index, e.g. parameters p0757[0] … p0760[0] belong to analog input 0.
Figure 6-4 Examples for scaling characteristics
Parameter Description
p0757 x coordinate of the 1st Characteristic point [V or mA]
p0758 y coordinate of the 1st Characteristic point [% of p200x]
p200x are the parameters of reference variables, e.g. p2000 is the reference speed
p0759 x coordinate of the 2nd Characteristic point [V or mA]
p0760 y coordinate of the 2nd Characteristic point [% of p200x]
p0761 Wire breakage monitoring response threshold
Adapting the characteristic

You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example
The inverter should convert a 6 mA … 12 mA signal into the value range -100 % … 100 %
via analog input 0. The wire break monitoring of the inverter should respond when 6 mA is
fallen below.
Precondition
You have set analog input 0 as a current input ("I") via the DIP switch on the
Control Unit.

Procedure
Set the following parameters to set the analog input as

current input with monitoring:
1. Set p0756[0] = 3
This means that you define analog input 0 as current
input with wire breakage monitoring.
2. Set p0757[0] = 6.0 (x1)
3. Set p0758[0] = -100.0 (y1)
4. Set p0759[0] = 12.0 (x2)
5. Set p0760[0] = 100.0 (y2)
Defining the function of an analog input

You define the analog input function by interconnecting a connector input of your choice with
parameter p0755. Parameter p0755 is assigned to the particular analog input based on its
index, e.g. parameter p0755[0] is assigned to analog input 0.
Table 6- 3 Connector inputs (CI) of the inverter (selection)
CI Significance CI Significance
p1070 Main setpoint p1522 Torque limit, upper
p1075 Supplementary setpoint p2253 Technology controller setpoint 1
p1503 Torque setpoint p2264 Technology controller actual value
p1511 Supplementary torque 1
A complete list of the connector inputs is provided in the List Manual.
Defining the function of an analog input - example

To enter a supplementary setpoint via analog input AI 0,
you must interconnect AI 0 with the signal source for the
supplementary setpoint:
Set p1075 = 755[0].
Advanced settings
Signal smoothing
When required, you can smooth the signal, which you read-in via an analog input, using
parameter p0753.
For more information, see the parameter list and in the function block diagrams 9566 ff of the
List Manual.

Skip frequency band

Interferences in the cable can corrupt
small signals of a few millivolts. To be
able to enter a setpoint of exactly 0 V via
an analog input, you must specify a skip
frequency band.
Skip frequency band of the analog input
p0764[0] Skip frequency band of the analog input AI 0 (factory setting: 0)

p0764[1] Skip frequency band of the analog input AI 1 (factory setting: 0)
Using an analog input as digital input

An analog input can also be used as digital input. See also Section: Digital inputs
(Page 152).

6.2.2.5 Analog outputs
Overview
Changing the function of an analog output:
1. Define the analog output type using
parameter p0776.
2. Interconnect parameter p0771 with a
connector output of your choice.
See also Section: Interconnecting signals in
1Not
available with CU240B-2 and the inverter (Page 449).
CU240B-2 DP Control Units
Connector outputs are marked with "CO" in
the parameter list of the List Manual.
Defining the analog output type

The inverter offers a series of default settings, which you can select using parameter p0776:
AO 0 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[0] = 0

Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
AO 1 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[1] = 0
Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
Characteristics
If you change the analog output type, then the inverter automatically selects the appropriate
scaling of the analog output. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two points
(p0777, p0778) and (p0779, p0780).
Figure 6-5 Examples for scaling characteristics

Parameters p0777 … p0780 are assigned to an analog output via their index, e.g.
parameters p0777[0] … p0770[0] belong to analog output 0.
Table 6- 4 Parameters for the scaling characteristic
p0777 x coordinate of the 1st Characteristic point [% of p200x]
p200x are the parameters of the reference variables, e.g. p2000 is the reference
speed.
p0778 y coordinate of the 1st Characteristic point [V or mA]
p0779 x coordinate of the 2nd Characteristic point [% of p200x]
p0780 y coordinate of the 2nd Characteristic point [V or mA]
Setting the characteristic

You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.
Example:
Via analog output 0, the inverter should convert a signal in the value range 0 % … 100 %
into an output signal 6 mA … 12 mA.
Procedure
Set the following parameters to set the characteristic to

match the example:
1. Set p0776[0] = 2
This defines analog output 0 as a current output.
2. Set p0777[0] = 0.0 (x1)
3. Set p0778[0] = 6.0 (y1)
4. Set p0779[0] = 100.0 (x2)
5. Set p0780[0] = 12.0 (y2)
Defining the function of an analog output

You define the analog output function by interconnecting parameter p0771 with a connector
output of your choice. Parameter p0771 is assigned to the particular analog output via its
index, e.g. parameter p0771[0] is assigned to analog output 0.
Table 6- 5 Connector outputs (CO) of the inverter (selection)
CO Meaning CO Meaning
r0021 Actual frequency r0026 Actual DC-link voltage
r0024 Output actual frequency r0027 Output current
r0025 Output actual frequency
A complete list of the connector outputs is provided in the List Manual.

For more information, please see the parameter list and the function block diagrams 2261 of
the List Manual.
Defining the function of an analog output - example

To output the inverter output current via analog output 0, you
must interconnect AO 0 with the signal for the output current:
Set p0771 = 27.
Advanced settings
You can manipulate the signal that you output via an analog output, as follows:
● Absolute-value generation of the signal (p0775)
● Signal inversion (p0782)
Additional information is provided in the parameter list of the List Manual.

6.2.3 Inverter control using digital inputs

Five different methods are available for controlling the motor via digital inputs.
Table 6- 6 Two-wire control and three-wire control
Behavior of the motor

Control commands Typical applica-
tion
Two-wire control, method 1 Local control in

1. Switching the motor on and off conveyor sys-
(ON/OFF1). tems.
2. Reverse the motor direction of rota-
tion.
Two-wire control, method 2 and Traction drives

two-wire control, method 3 with control via
1. Switch the motor on and off joystick
(ON/OFF1), clockwise rotation.
2. Switch the motor on and off
(ON/OFF1), counter-clockwise rota-
tion.
Three-wire control, method 1 Traction drives
1. Enable signal for switching the motor with control via
on and off (OFF1). joystick
2. Switch on the motor (ON), clockwise
rotation.
3. Switch on the motor (ON), counter-
clockwise rotation.
Three-wire control, method 2 -

1. Enable signal for switching the motor
on and off (OFF1).
2. Switch on motor (ON).
3. Reverse the motor direction of rota-
tion.

6.2.4 Two-wire control: method 1

You switch the motor on and off using a control command (ON/OFF1) while the other control
command reverses the motor direction of rotation.
Figure 6-6 Two-wire control, method 1
Table 6- 7 Function table
ON/OFF1 Reversing Function

0 0 OFF1: The motor stops.
1 0 ON: Clockwise motor rotation.
1 1 ON: Counter-clockwise motor rotation.
p0015 = 12 Macro drive unit
Controlling the motor using the digital inputs DI 0 DI 1
of the inverter: ON/OFF1 Reversing
Advanced setting
Interconnecting control commands with digital inputs of your choice.
p0840[0 … n] = 722.x BI: ON/OFF1 (ON/OFF1)
Example: p0840[0] = 722.3 ⇒ if CDS 0 (index[0]) is selected, the inverter
receives its ON/OFF1 command via DI 3.
p1113[0 … n] = 722.x BI: Setpoint inversion (reversing)

6.2.5 Two-wire control, method 2

You switch the motor on and off using a control command (ON/OFF1) and at the same time
select clockwise motor rotation. You also use the other control command to switch the motor
on and off, but in this case you select counter-clockwise rotation for the motor.
The inverter only accepts a new control command when the motor is at a standstill.
ON/OFF1 ON/OFF1 coun- Function

clockwise rota- ter-clockwise
tion rotation
1 1 ON: The motor direction of rotation is based on the signal that
assumes status "1" first.
Controlling the motor using the DI 0 DI 1
digital inputs of the inverter: ON/OFF1 clock- ON/OFF1 coun-
wise rotation ter-clockwise
rotation
Advanced setting
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation)
receives its ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise command via DI 0.

6.2.6 Two-wire control, method 3

You switch the motor on and off using a control command (ON/OFF1) and at the same time
select clockwise motor rotation. You also use the other control command to switch the motor
on and off, but in this case you select counter-clockwise rotation for the motor.
Unlike method 2, the inverter will accept the control commands at any time, regardless of the
motor speed.
ON/OFF1 clockwise ON/OFF1 counter- Function

rotation clockwise rotation
Controlling the motor using the digital DI 0 DI 1
inputs of the inverter: ON/OFF1 clock- ON/OFF1 coun-
wise rotation ter-clockwise
rotation
Advanced setting
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation)
receives its ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise command via DI 0.

6.2.7 Three-wire control, method 1

With one control command, you enable the two other control commands. You switch the
motor off by withdrawing the enable (OFF1).
You switch the motor's direction of rotation to clockwise rotation with the positive edge of the
second control command. If the motor is still switched off, switch it on (ON).
You switch the motor's direction of rotation to counter-clockwise rotation with the positive
edge of the third control command. If the motor is still switched off, switch it on (ON).
Figure 6-9 Three-wire control, method 1
Enable / OFF1 ON clockwise ON counter- Function

rotation clockwise rotation
0 0 or 1 0 or 1 OFF1: The motor stops.
1 0→1 0 ON: Clockwise motor rotation.
1 0 0→1 ON: Counter-clockwise motor rota-
tion.
1 1 1 OFF1: The motor stops.
Controlling the motor using DI 0 DI 1 DI 2
the digital inputs of the in- Enable / ON clockwise ON counter-
verter: OFF1 rotation clockwise
rotation
Advanced setting
Interconnecting control commands with digital inputs of your choice (DI x).
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (enable/OFF1)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON clockwise rotation)
p3332[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 (ON counter-clockwise rotation)
receives its ON counter-clockwise command via DI 0.

6.2.8 Three-wire control, method 2

With one control command, you enable the two other control commands. You switch the
motor off by withdrawing the enable (OFF1).
You switch on the motor with the positive edge of the second control command (ON).
The third control command defines the motor's direction of rotation (reversing).
Figure 6-10 Three-wire control, method 2
Enable / OFF1 ON Reversing Function

0 0 or 1 0 or 1 OFF1: The motor stops.
1 0→1 0 ON: Clockwise motor rotation.
1 0→1 1 ON: Counter-clockwise motor rotation.
Controlling the motor using DI 0 DI 1 DI 2
the digital inputs of the in- Enable / ON Reversing
verter: OFF1
Advanced setting
Interconnecting control commands with digital inputs of your choice (DI x).
p3330[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (enable/OFF1)
p3331[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON)
receives its ON command via DI 0.
p3332[0 … n] = 722.x BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 (reversing)

6.2.9 Running the motor in jog mode (JOG function)

The "Jog" function is typically used to slowly move a machine part, e.g. a conveyor belt.
With the "Jog" function, you switch the motor on and off using a digital input. When the motor
is switched on, it accelerates to the jogging setpoint. There are two different setpoints
available, e.g. for motor counter-clockwise rotation and clockwise rotation.
The same ramp-function generator acts on the setpoint as for the ON/OFF1 command.
Figure 6-11 Behavior of the motor when "jogging"
The inverter must be ready to start before you issue the "Jog"
control command. If the motor is already switched on, then the
"Jog" command has no effect.
Jog settings
p1058 Jogging 1 speed setpoint (factory setting 150 rpm)
p1059 Jogging 2 speed setpoint (factory setting -150 rpm)
p1082 Maximum speed (factory setting 1500 rpm)
p1110 Inhibit negative direction
=0: Negative direction of rotation is enabled =1: Negative direction of rotation is
inhibited
p1111 Inhibit positive direction
=0: Positive direction of rotation is enabled =1: Positive direction of rotation is
inhibited
p1113 Setpoint inversion
=0: Setpoint is not inverted =1: Setpoint is inverted
p1120 Ramp-function generator ramp-up time (factory setting 10 s)
p1121 Ramp-function generator ramp-down time (factory setting 10 s)
p1055 = 722.0 Jog bit 0: Select jogging 1 via digital input 0
p1056 = 722.1 Jog bit 1: Select jogging 2 via digital input 1

6.2.10 Control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET with the PROFIdrive profile

The send and receive telegrams of the inverter for the cyclic communication are structured
as follows:
Figure 6-12 Telegrams for cyclic communication
Table 6- 12 Explanation of the abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

STW Control word MIST_GLATT Actual smoothed torque
ZSW Status word PIST_GLATT Actual smoothed active power
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint M_LIM Torque limit value
NIST_A Speed actual value FAULT_CODE Fault number
NIST_A_GLATT Smoothed actual speed value WARN_CODE Alarm number
IAIST_GLATT Smoothed current actual value MELD_NAMUR Control word according to the
VIK-NAMUR definition

Interconnection of the process data
Figure 6-13 Interconnection of the send words
Figure 6-14 Interconnection of the receive words

The telegrams use - with the exception of telegram 999 (free interconnection) - the word-by-
word transfer of send and receive data (r2050/p2051).
If you require an individual telegram for your application (e.g. for transferring double words),
you can adjust one of the predefined telegrams via parameters p0922 and p2079. For
details, please refer to the List Manual, function diagrams 2420 and 2472.
6.2.10.1 Control and status word 1
Control word 1 (STW1)
Bit Significance Explanation Signal inter-

Telegram 20 All other tele- connection
grams in the in-
verter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p0840[0] =
p1121 of the ramp-function generator. The r2090.0
inverter switches off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The inverter goes into the "ready" state. If, in
addition bit 3 = 1, then the inverter switches on
the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor p0844[0] =
then coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON com-
mand).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: The motor brakes with the OFF3 p0848[0] =
ramp-down time p1135 down to standstill. r2090.2
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON com-
mand).
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The inverter immediately sets its ramp- p1140[0] =

function generator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator p1141[0] =
stops at the actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator
follows the setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The inverter brakes the motor with the ramp- p1142[0] =
down time p1121 of the ramp-function genera- r2090.6
tor.
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time
p1120 to the setpoint.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge faults Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still p2103[0] =
active, the inverter switches to"closing lockout" r2090.7
state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Inverter ignores the process data from the p0854[0] =
fieldbus. r2090.10

Bit Significance Explanation Signal inter-

grams in the in-
verter
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, inverter accepts the pro-
cess data from the fieldbus.
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the inverter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Not used
13 ---1) 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized p1035[0] =
potentiometer. r2090.13
14 ---1) 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized p1036[0] =
15 CDS bit 0 Reserved Changes over between settings for different p0810 =
operation interfaces (command data sets). r2090.15
1) If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous
telegram is kept.

Status word 1 (ZSW1)
Bit Significance Comments Signal inter-

grams in the in-
verter
0 1 = Ready to start Power supply switched on; electronics initial- p2080[0] =
ized; pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault p2080[1] =
is active. With the command "Enable opera- r0899.1
tion" (STW1.3), the inverter switches on the
motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit p2080[2] =
3. r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The inverter has a fault. Acknowledge fault p2080[3] =
using STW1.7. r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Closing lockout active It is only possible to switch on the motor after p2080[6] =
an OFF1 followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowl- p2080[7] =
edgement is necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation within the Setpoint / actual value deviation within the p2080[8] =
tolerance range tolerance range. r2197.7
9 1 = Master control requested The automation system is requested to ac- p2080[9] =
cept the inverter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed reached or Speed is greater than or equal to the corre- p2080[10] =
exceeded sponding maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = current or 1 = torque limit Comparison value for current or torque has p2080[11] =
torque limit reached been reached or exceeded. r0056.13 /
reached r1407.7
12 ---1) 1 = Holding Signal to open and close a motor holding p2080[12] =
brake open brake. r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor overtemperature -- p2080[13] =
r2135.14
14 1 = Motor rotates clockwise Internal inverter actual value > 0 p2080[14] =
0 = Motor rotates counterclock- Internal inverter actual value < 0 r2197.3
wise
15 1 = CDS display 0 = Alarm, in- p2080[15] =
verter thermal r0836.0 /
overload r2135.15
telegram is kept.

6.2.10.2 Control and status word 3
Bit Significance Explanation Signal interconnection

Telegram 350 in the inverter 1)
0 1 = fixed setpoint bit 0 Selects up to 16 different fixed p1020[0] = r2093.0
1 1 = fixed setpoint bit 1 setpoints. p1021[0] = r2093.1
2 1 = fixed setpoint bit 2 p1022[0] = r2093.2
3 1 = fixed setpoint bit 3 p1023[0] = r2093.3
4 1 = DDS selection bit 0 Changes over between settings p0820 = r2093.4
5 1 = DDS selection bit 1 for different motors (drive data p0821 = r2093.5
sets).
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 1 = technology controller enable -- p2200[0] = r2093.8
9 1 = enable DC braking -- p1230[0] = r2093.9
10 Not used
11 1 = Enable droop Enable or inhibit speed control- p1492[0] = r2093.11
ler droop.
12 1 = torque control active Changes over the control mode p1501[0] = r2093.12
0 = speed control active for vector control.
13 1 = no external fault -- p2106[0] = r2093.13
0 = external fault is active (F07860)
14 Not used
15 1 = CDS bit 1 Changes over between settings p0811[0] = r2093.15
for different operation interfaces
(command data sets).
1) If you switch from telegram 350 to a different one, then the inverter sets all interconnections
p1020, … to "0". Exception: p2106 = 1.

Bit Significance Description Signal intercon-

nection in the
inverter
0 1 = DC braking active -- p2051[3] = r0053
1 1 = |n_act | > p1226 Absolute current speed > stationary
state detection
2 1 = |n_act | > p1080 Absolute actual speed > minimum
speed
3 1 = i_act ≧ p2170 Actual current ≥ current threshold
value
4 1 = |n_act | > p2155 Absolute actual speed > speed
threshold value 2
5 1 = |n_act | ≦ p2155 Absolute actual speed < speed
threshold value 2
6 1 = |n_act | ≧ r1119 Speed setpoint reached
7 1 = DC link voltage ≦ p2172 Actual DC link voltage ≦ threshold
value
8 1 = DC link voltage > p2172 Actual DC link voltage > threshold
value
9 1 = ramp-up or ramp-down complet- Ramp-function generator is not
ed active.
10 1 = technology controller output at Technology controller output ≦
the lower limit p2292
11 1 = technology controller output at Technology controller out-
the upper limit put > p2291
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used

6.2.10.3 NAMUR message word
Fault word according to the VIK-NAMUR definition (MELD_NAMUR)
Table 6- 13 Fault word according to the VIK-NAMUR definition and interconnection with parameters
in the inverter
Bit Significance P no.

0 1 = Control Unit signals a fault p2051[5] = r3113
1 1 = line fault: Phase failure or inadmissible voltage
2 1 = DC link overvoltage
3 1 = Power Module fault, e.g. overcurrent or overtemperature
4 1 = inverter overtemperature
5 1 = ground fault/phase fault in the motor cable or in the motor
6 1 = motor overload
7 1 = communication error to the higher-level control system
8 1 = fault in a safety-relevant monitoring channel
10 1 = fault in the internal inverter communication
11 1 = line fault
15 1 = other fault
6.2.10.4 Data structure of the parameter channel
Structure of the parameter channel

The parameter channel consists of four words. 1. and 2nd word transfer the parameter
number and index as well as the type of job (read or write) The 3rd and 4th word contains
the parameter contents. The parameter contents can be 16-bit values (such as baud rate) or
32-bit values (e.g. CO parameters).
Bit 11 in the 1st word is reserved and is always assigned 0.
You can find examples of telegrams at the end of this section.

Request and response IDs

Bits 12 … 15 of the 1st word of the parameter channel contain the request and response
identifier.
Table 6- 14 Request identifiers, control → inverter
Request identi- Description Response identifier

fier positive negative
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
62) Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 7/8
72) Change parameter value (field, word) 1) 4 7/8
82) Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7, and 8.
Table 6- 15 Response identifiers, inverter → control
Response iden- Description

tifier
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Inverter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the inverter sends an error
number to the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parame-
ter channel interface
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).

Table 6- 16 Error numbers for response identifier 7
No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be
changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist.)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without
permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927.)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tempo-
rary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal
for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the inverter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be found
in table "Request identifications controller → inverter")
6B hex No change access for a closed-loop controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the
inverter prevents a parameter change.)
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating status of the inverter pre-
vents a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within
the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for
the inverter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not availa-
ble)

Offset and page index of the parameter numbers

Parameter numbers < 2000 PNU = parameter number.
Write the parameter number into the PNU (PKE bit 10 ... 0).
Parameter numbers ≥ 2000 PNU = parameter number - offset.
Write the parameter number minus the offset into the PNU
(PKE bit 10 … 0).
Write the offset in the page index (IND bit 7 … 0).
Parameter number Offset Page index

Hex Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0000 … 1999 0 0 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2000 … 3999 2000 80 hex 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6000 … 7999 6000 90 hex 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
8000 … 9999 8000 20 hex 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
10000 … 11999 10000 A0 hex 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
20000 … 21999 20000 50 hex 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
30000 … 31999 30000 F0 hex 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
60000 … 61999 60000 74 hex 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
Indexed parameters
For indexed parameters, you must write the index as hex value into the subindex (IND
bit 15 … 8).
Parameter contents
Parameter contents can be parameter values or connectors.
Table 6- 17 Parameter values in the parameter channel
PWE, 3rd word PWE, 4th word

Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Table 6- 18 Connectors in the parameter channel
PWE, 3rd word PWE, 4th word

Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field num-
ber of the connector

6.2.10.5 Examples of the parameter channel
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (Parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (Index of the parameter)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 ≙ 90 hex)
● Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.
Figure 6-15 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]
Write request: Change restart mode (p1210)

The restart mode is inhibited in the factory setting (p1210 = 0). In order to activate the
automatic restart with "acknowledge all faults and restart for an ON command", p1210 must
be set to 26:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
● PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
● PWE2, bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)
Figure 6-16 Telegram, to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26

Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source,
ON/OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must fill the telegram of the parameter
channel as follows:
● PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change, parameter value (field, word))
● PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
● IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 1 hex (CDS1 = index1)
● IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 ≙ 0 hex)
● PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
● PWE2, bit 10 … 15: = 3F hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3f hex)
● PWE2, bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (index of parameter (DI 2 = 2))
Figure 6-17 Telegram, to assign DI 2 with ON/OFF1
"Reading and writing parameters" application example

See: Reading and writing parameters via PROFIBUS
6.2.10.6 Extend telegrams and change signal interconnection

When you have selected a telegram, the inverter interconnects the corresponding signals
with the fieldbus interface. Generally, these interconnections are protected so that they
cannot be changed. With the appropriate inverter settings, these interconnections can be
changed.
Extend telegram
Every telegram can be extended, by "attaching" additional signals.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to extend a telegram:
1. Using STARTER or an operator panel, set parameter p0922 = 999.
2. Set parameter p2079 to the appropriate value of the corresponding telegram.
3. Interconnect additional PZD send words and PZD receive words with signals of your
choice via parameters r2050 and p2051.
You have extended the telegram.

p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection
999: Free telegram (message frame) configuration
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended
1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
r2050[0…11] PROFIdrive PZD receive word
Connector output to interconnect the PZD (setpoints) in the word format received
from the PROFIdrive controller.
p2051[0…16] PROFIdrive PZD send word
Selection of the PZD (actual values) in the word format to be sent to the PROFIdrive
controller.
controller. For further information refer to the function block diagrams 2468 and 2470 of the
List Manual.
Freely selecting the signal interconnection of the telegram

The signals in the telegram can be freely interconnected.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to change the signal interconnection of a telegram:
3. Interconnect additional PZD send words and PZD receive words with signals of your
choice via parameters r2050 and p2051.
You have freely interconnected the signals transferred in the telegram.
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended
r2050[0…11] PROFIdrive PZD receive word
Connector output to interconnect the PZD (setpoints) in the word format received
from the PROFIdrive controller.
p2051[0…16] PROFIdrive PZD send word
controller.
For further information refer to the function block diagrams 2468 and 2470 of the List
Manual.

6.2.10.7 Configuring the IP interface
Configure communication with STARTER

STARTER provides a screen form to set the communication with the control system.
Open the dialog screen form "Control_Unit/Communication/Commissioning interface" and
activate the "Configure IP interfaces" tab
● Set the DHCP mode to 0 (factory setting).

● Enter the device name, address, gateway and the address for the subnet mask.
● In the Activation field select “[2] Save and activate configuration”.
● To activate the settings, you must switch off the inverter power supply and then switch on
again.
You can also enter or read out data using the expert list. You can find the corresponding
parameters in the number range r8909 … p8925
6.2.10.8 Slave-to-slave communication

"Direct data exchange" is sometimes called "slave-to-slave communication" or "data
exchange broadcast". Here, slaves exchange data without any direct involvement of the
master.
You can find more information in: "Manuals for your inverter in the fieldbus function manual
(Page 460)".

6.2.10.9 Acyclically reading and writing inverter parameters

The inverter supports the writing and reading of parameters via acyclic communication:
● For PROFIBUS: Up to 240 bytes per write or read request via data set 47
● For PROFINET: Write or read requests via B02E hex and B02F hex
You will find more information on acyclic communication in the Fieldbus Function Manual;
see also section: Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).

6.2.11 Control via additional fieldbuses
6.2.11.1 Modbus RTU
Settings for Modbus RTU
Parameter Explanation
p2020 Fieldbus interface baudrate 5: 4800 baud 10: 76800 baud
(Factory setting: 7) 6: 9600 baud 11: 93750 baud
7: 19200 baud 12: 115200 baud
8: 38400 baud 13: 187500 baud
9: 57600 baud
p2021 Fieldbus interface address (Factory setting: 1)
Valid USS addresses: 1 … 247.
The parameter is only active if address 0 is set at the Control Unit address switch.
A change only becomes effective after the inverter power supply has been switched
off and switched on again.
p2024 Fieldbus interface times [0] Maximum permissible telegram processing time of
(Factory setting: [0] 1000 ms, the Modbus slave
[2] 0 ms) [2] dead time between two telegrams
r2029 Fieldbus interface error sta- [0] number of error-free [4] number of parity errors
tistics telegrams [5] number of starting
[1] number of rejected character errors
telegrams [6] number of checksum
[2] number of framing errors
errors [7] number of length er-
[3] number of overrun rors
errors
p2030 = 2 Fieldbus interface protocol selection: Modbus RTU
p2031 Fieldbus interface Modbus 0: No parity
parity (Factory setting: 2) 1: Odd parity
2: Even parity
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time (Factory setting: 100 ms)
p2040 = 0: The monitoring is deactivated

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter-

connection
in the in-
verter
p1121 of the ramp-function generator. The in- r2090.0
verter switches off the motor at standstill.
the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor then p0844[0] =
coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).
4 0 = Disable RFG The inverter immediately sets its ramp-function p1140[0] =

generator output to 0. r2090.4
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator stops p1141[0] =
at the actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator follows
the setpoint.
down time p1121 of the ramp-function generator. r2090.6
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time p1120
to the setpoint.
state.
8, 9 Reserved
fieldbus. r2090.10
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, inverter accepts the process
data from the fieldbus.
r2090.11
12 Reserved
13 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized p1035[0] =
14 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized po- p1036[0] =
tentiometer. r2090.14
15 Reserved

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal inter-

connection
in the in-
verter
0 1 = Ready to start Power supply switched on; electronics initialized; p2080[0] =
pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault is p2080[1] =
active. With the command "Enable operation" r0899.1
(STW1.3), the inverter switches on the motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit 3. p2080[2] =
r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The inverter has a fault. Acknowledge fault using p2080[3] =
STW1.7. r2139.3
r0899.4
r0899.5
6 1 = Closing lockout active It is only possible to switch on the motor after an p2080[6] =
OFF1 followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowledgement p2080[7] =
is necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation within the Setpoint / actual value deviation within the toler- p2080[8] =
tolerance range ance range. r2197.7
9 1 = Master control requested The automation system is requested to accept p2080[9] =
the inverter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed Speed is greater than or equal to the correspond- p2080[10] =
reached or exceeded ing maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = Torque limit not reached Comparison value for current or torque has been p2080[11] =
fallen below. r0056.13 /
r1407.7
12 Reserved p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor overtemper- -- p2080[13] =
ature r2135.14
0 = Motor rotates counter- Internal inverter actual value < 0 r2197.3
clockwise
15 0 = Alarm, inverter thermal p2080[15] =
overload r2135.15
telegram is kept.
Further information
You can find additional information about Modbus RTU in the "Fieldbuses" Function Manual:
Manuals for the Control Unit

6.2.11.2 USS
Settings for USS
p2020 Fieldbus interface baudrate 4: 2400 baud 9: 57600 baud
(Factory setting: 8) 5: 4800 baud 10: 76800 baud
6: 9600 baud 11: 93750 baud
7: 19200 baud 12: 115200 baud
8: 38400 baud 13: 187500 baud
p2021 Fieldbus interface address (Factory setting: 0)
Valid USS addresses: 0 … 30.
The parameter is only active if address 0 is set at the Control Unit address switch.
p2022 Fieldbus interface USS PZD number (Factory setting: 2)
p2023 Fieldbus interface USS PKW number (Factory setting: 0: PKW 0 words
127) 3: PKW 3 words
4: PKW 4 words
127: PKW variable
p2024 Fieldbus interface times [0] Maximum permissible telegram processing time of
(Factory setting: [0] 1000 ms, the Modbus slave
[1] 0 ms, [2] 0 ms) [1] Character delay time
[2] dead time between two telegrams
r2029 Fieldbus interface error sta- [0] number of error-free [4] number of parity errors
tistics telegrams [5] number of starting
[1] number of rejected character errors
telegrams [6] number of checksum
[2] number of framing errors
errors [7] number of length er-
[3] number of overrun rors
errors
p2030 = 1 Fieldbus interface protocol selection: USS
p2031 Fieldbus interface Modbus 0: No parity
parity (Factory setting: 2) 1: Odd parity
2: Even parity
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time (Factory setting: 100 ms)
p2040 = 0: The monitoring is deactivated

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter-

connection
in the in-
verter
p1121 of the ramp-function generator. The in- r2090.0
verter switches off the motor at standstill.
the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor then p0844[0] =
coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).
4 0 = Disable RFG The inverter immediately sets its ramp-function p1140[0] =

generator output to 0. r2090.4
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator stops p1141[0] =
at the actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator follows
the setpoint.
down time p1121 of the ramp-function generator. r2090.6
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time p1120
to the setpoint.
state.
8, 9 Reserved
fieldbus. r2090.10
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, inverter accepts the process
data from the fieldbus.
r2090.11
12 Reserved
13 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized p1035[0] =
14 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized po- p1036[0] =
tentiometer. r2090.14
15 Reserved

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal inter-

connection
in the in-
verter
0 1 = Ready to start Power supply switched on; electronics initial- p2080[0] =
ized; pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault p2080[1] =
is active. With the command "Enable opera- r0899.1
tion" (STW1.3), the inverter switches on the
motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, p2080[2] =
bit 3. r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The inverter has a fault. Acknowledge fault p2080[3] =
using STW1.7. r2139.3
r0899.4
r0899.5
6 1 = Closing lockout active It is only possible to switch on the motor after p2080[6] =
an OFF1 followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowl- p2080[7] =
edgement is necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation within the Setpoint / actual value deviation within the p2080[8] =
tolerance range tolerance range. r2197.7
9 1 = Master control requested The automation system is requested to ac- p2080[9] =
cept the inverter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed reached or Speed is greater than or equal to the corre- p2080[10] =
exceeded sponding maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = Torque limit not reached Comparison value for current or torque has p2080[11] =
been fallen below. r0056.13 /
r1407.7
12 Reserved p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor overtemperature -- p2080[13] =
r2135.14
0 = Motor rotates counterclock- Internal inverter actual value < 0 r2197.3
wise
15 0 = Alarm, inverter thermal over- p2080[15] =
load r2135.15
telegram is kept.
Further information
You can find additional information about USS in the "Fieldbuses" Function Manual: Manuals
for the Control Unit (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/30563628/133300).

6.2.11.3 Ethernet/IP
Settings for Modbus RTU
p2030 = 10 Fieldbus interface protocol selection: Ethernet/IP
p8920 PN Name of Station
p8921 PN IP address (Factory setting: 0)
p8922 PN default gateway (factory setting: 0)
p8923 PN Subnet Mask (Factory setting: 0)
p8924 PN DHCP mode (Factory 0: DHCP off
setting: 0) 2: DHCP on, identification based on MAC address
3: DHCP on, identification based on Name of Station
p8925 PN interface configuration 0: No function
(Factory setting: 0) 1: Reserved
2: Save the configuration and activate
3: Delete configuration
p8980 Ethernet/IP profile (Factory setting: 0) 0: SINAMICS
A change only becomes effective after the inverter power 1: ODVA AC/DC
supply has been switched off and switched on again.
p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling (Factory setting: 128)
123: 32 127: 2 131: 0.125
124: 16 128: 1 132: 0.0625
125: 8 129: 0.5 133: 0.03125
126: 4 130: 0.25
Further information
You can find additional information about USS in the "Fieldbuses" Function Manual: Manuals
for the Control Unit (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/30563628/133300).

6.2.12 Switching over the inverter control (command data set)

In some applications, it must be possible to switch over the master control for operating the
inverter.
Example: The motor is to be operable either from a central control via the fieldbus or from a
local control box via the terminal strip.
Command data set (CDS)

This means that you can set the inverter con-
trol in various ways and toggle between the
settings. For instance, as described above,
the inverter can either be operated via a
fieldbus or via the terminal strip.
The settings in the inverter, which are as-
signed to a specific master control, are termed
the command data set.
You select the command data set using parameter p0810. To do this, you must interconnect
parameter p0810 with a control command of your choice, e.g. a digital input.
Figure 6-18 Example: Switching over the control via terminal strip to control via PROFIBUS or
PROFINET

An overview of all the parameters that belong to the command data sets is provided in the
List Manual.
Note
It takes approximately 4 ms to toggle between command data sets.
Advanced settings
To change the number of command data sets in STARTER, you must open your STARTER
project offline.
① You can edit command data sets if, in the STARTER project tree, you select "Configuration".
② If you require more than two command data sets, then add command data sets using this but-
ton or remove them.
③, To simplify commissioning several command data sets, under the "Command data sets" tab
④ there is a copy function.
Figure 6-19 Editing command data sets in STARTER
p0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
p0170 Number of command data sets (factory setting: 2)
p0170 = 2, 3, or 4
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
r0050 Displaying the number of the CDS that is currently active
p0809[0] Number of the command data set to be copied (source)
p0809[1] Number of the command data set to which the data is to be copied (target)
p0809[2] = 1 Copying is started
Once copying has been completed, the inverter sets p0809[2] to 0.
p0810 Command data set selection CDS bit 0
p0811 Command data set selection CDS bit 1
r0050 Displaying the number of the CDS that is currently active

6.3 Setpoints
6.3 Setpoints
6.3.1 Overview
The inverter receives its main setpoint from the setpoint source. The main setpoint generally
specifies the motor speed.
Figure 6-20 Setpoint sources for the inverter
You have the following options when selecting the source of the main setpoint:
● Inverter analog input.
● Inverter fieldbus interface.
● Motorized potentiometer simulated in the inverter.
● Fixed setpoints saved in the inverter.
You have the same selection options when selecting the source of the supplementary
setpoint.
Under the following conditions, the inverter switches from the main setpoint to other
setpoints:
● When the technology controller is active and appropriately interconnected, its output
specifies the motor speed.
● When jogging is active.
● When controlling from an operator panel or the STARTER PC tool.

6.3 Setpoints
6.3.2 Analog input as setpoint source
Interconnecting an analog input

If you have selected a pre-assignment without a function of the analog input, then you must
interconnect the parameter of the main setpoint with an analog input.
Figure 6-21 Example: Analog input 0 as setpoint source
Table 6- 19 Setting with analog input 0 as setpoint source
Parameter Remark
p1070 = 755[0] Main setpoint
Interconnect the main setpoint with analog input 0
p1075 = 755[0] Additional setpoint
Interconnect the additional setpoint with analog input 0
You must adapt the analog input to the connected signal, e.g. ± 10 V or 4 … 20 mA. You will
find additional information in the section: Analog inputs (Page 157).

6.3 Setpoints
6.3.3 Specifying the setpoint via the fieldbus
Interconnecting the fieldbus with the main setpoint
Figure 6-22 Fieldbus as setpoint source
Most standard telegrams receive the speed setpoint as a second process data PZD2.
Table 6- 20 Setting the fieldbus as setpoint source
Parameter Remark
p1070 = 2050[1] Main setpoint
Interconnect the main setpoint with process data PZD2 from the fieldbus.
p1075 = 2050[1] Additional setpoint
Interconnect the additional setpoint with process data PZD2 from the fieldbus.

6.3 Setpoints
6.3.4 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source

The "Motorized potentiometer" function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer. The
output value of the motorized potentiometer can be set with the "higher" and "lower" control
signals.
Interconnecting the motorized potentiometer (MOP) with the setpoint source
Figure 6-23 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source
Figure 6-24 Function chart of the motorized potentiometer
Table 6- 21 Basic setup of motorized potentiometer
p1035 Motorized potentiometer setpoint higher Interconnect these commands with sig-
p1036 Motorized potentiometer setpoint lower nals of your choice.
p1040 MOP start value (factory setting: 0 rpm)
Defines the start value [rpm] that is effective when the motor is switched on.
p1047 MOP ramp-up time (factory setting: 10 s)
p1048 MOP ramp-down time (factory setting: 10 s)
r1050 Motorized potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
p1070 = Main setpoint
1050

6.3 Setpoints
Table 6- 22 Extended setup of motorized potentiometer
p1030 MOP configuration (factory setting: 00110 bin)
.00 Storage active
= 0: After the motor has been switched on, the setpoint = p1040
= 1: After the motor has switched off, the inverter saves the setpoint. After the
motor has switched on, the setpoint = the stored value
.01 Automatic mode, ramp-function generator active (1-signal via BI: p1041)
= 0: Ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0
= 1: With ramp-function generator
In manual mode (p1041 = 0), the ramp-function generator is always active.
.02 Initial rounding active
1: With initial rounding. Using the initial rounding function it is possible to enter
very small setpoint changes
.03 Storage in NVRAM active
1: If bit 00 = 1, the setpoint is retained during a power failure
.04 Ramp-function generator always active
1: The inverter also calculates the ramp-function generator when the motor is
switched off
p1037 MOP maximum speed (factory setting: 0 rpm)
Automatically pre-assigned when commissioning
p1038 MOP minimum speed (factory setting: 0 rpm)
Automatically pre-assigned when commissioning
p1039 Motorized potentiometer, inversion (factory setting: 0)
Signal source for inverting the minimum speed / velocity or maximum speed / velocity
p1041 Motorized potentiometer, manual/automatic (factory setting: 0)
Signal source for switchover from manual to automatic
p1043 Motorized potentiometer, accept setting value (factory setting: 0)
Signal source for accepting the setting value. The motorized potentiometer accepts
the setting value p1044 on signal change p1043 = 0 → 1.
p1044 MOP setting value (factory setting: 0)
Signal source for the setting value.
For more information about the motorized potentiometer, refer to function diagram 3020 in
the List Manual.

6.3 Setpoints
6.3.5 Fixed speed as setpoint source

In many applications after switching on the motor, all that is needed is to run the motor at a
constant speed or to switch between different speeds.
Example: After it has been switched on, a conveyor belt only runs with two different
velocities.
Interconnecting the fixed speeds with a main setpoint
Figure 6-25 Fixed speeds as setpoint source
Table 6- 23 Setting the fixed speed as a setpoint source
Parameter Remark
p1070 = 1024 Main setpoint
Interconnecting the main setpoint with fixed speeds.
Select fixed setpoint by direct or binary selection

The converter distinguishes between two methods for selecting the fixed setpoints:
1. Direct selection:
You set 4 different fixed setpoints. By adding one or more of the four fixed setpoints, up
to 16 different resulting setpoints are obtained.
Figure 6-26 Simplified function diagram for directly selecting fixed setpoints
Additional information about direct selection can be found in function diagram 3011 in the
List Manual.

6.3 Setpoints
2. Binary selection:
You set 16 different fixed setpoints. You precisely select one of these 16 fixed setpoints
by a combination of four selection bits.
Figure 6-27 Simplified function diagram for binary selection of the setpoints
Additional information about binary selection can be found in function diagram 3010 in the
List Manual.
Parameter for setting the fixed setpoints
p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 1 (factory setting: 0 rpm)
... ...
p1016 Speed fixed setpoint mode (factory setting: 1)
1: Direct
2: Binary
p1020 Speed fixed setpoint selection bit 0 (factory setting: 0)
r1024 Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1025.0 Fixed speed setpoint status
1 signal Fixed speed setpoint is selected

6.3 Setpoints
Example: Select two fixed setpoints directly

The motor should operate at different speeds as follows:
● The signal on digital input 0 switches the motor on and accelerates it to 300 rpm.
● The signal at digital input 1 accelerates the motor to 2000 rpm.
● The signals at the two digital inputs accelerate the motor to 2300 rpm.
Table 6- 24 Settings for the example
p1001 = 300.000 Fixed speed setpoint 1 [rpm]
p1002 = 2000.000 Fixed speed setpoint 2 [rpm]
p0840 = 722.0 ON/OFF1: Switch on motor with digital input 0
p1070 = 1024 Main setpoint: Interconnect the main setpoint with the fixed speed set-
point.
p1020 = 722.0 Speed fixed setpoint selection Bit 0: Interconnect fixed setpoint 1 with
digital input 0 (DI 0).
p1021 = 722.1 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1: Interconnects fixed setpoint 2 with
digital input 1 (DI 1).
p1016 = 1 Fixed speed setpoint mode: Select direct selection of the fixed setpoints.
Table 6- 25 Resulting fixed setpoints for the example above
Fixed setpoint selected by Resulting setpoint

DI 0 = 0 Motor stops
DI 0 = 1 and DI 1 = 0 300 rpm
DI 0 = 1 and DI 1 = 1 2300 rpm

6.4 Setpoint calculation
6.4.1 Overview of setpoint processing

The setpoint can be modified as follows using the setpoint processing:
● Invert setpoint to reverse the motor direction of rotation (reversing).
● Inhibit positive or negative direction of rotation, e.g. for conveyor belts, pumps or fans.
● Skip frequency bands to prevent mechanical resonance effects.
The skip frequency band at speed = 0 results in a minimum speed after switching on the
motor.
● Limit to a maximum speed to protect the motor and mechanical system.
● Ramp-function generator to accelerate and brake the motor with an optimum torque.
Figure 6-28 Setpoint processing in the converter

6.4.2 Invert setpoint

The inverter provides an option to invert the setpoint sign using a bit. As an example, the
setpoint inversion is shown through a digital input.
In order to invert the setpoint through the digital input DI 1, connect the parameter p1113
with a binary signal, e.g. the digital input 1.
Table 6- 26 Examples of settings to invert the setpoint
Parameter Remark
p1113 = 722.1 Setpoint inversion
Digital input 1 = 0: Setpoint remains unchanged.
Digital input 1 = 1: Inverter inverts the setpoint.
p1113 = 2090.11 Invert setpoint via control word 1, bit 11.

6.4.3 Inhibit direction of rotation

In the factory setting of the inverter, both motor directions of rotation are enabled.
Set the corresponding parameter to a value = 1 to permanently block directions of rotation.
Table 6- 27 Examples of settings to inhibit the direction of rotation
Parameter Remark
p1110 = 1 Inhibit negative direction
Negative direction is permanently inhibited.
p1110 = 722.3 Inhibit negative direction
Digital input 3 = 0: Negative direction of rotation is enabled.
Digital input 3 = 1: Negative direction of rotation is inhibited.

6.4.4 Skip frequency bands and minimum speed
Skip frequency bands

The converter has four skip frequency bands that prevent continuous motor operation within
a specific speed range. You can find additional information in function diagram 3050 of the
List Manual, see also: Manuals and technical support (Page 460).
Minimum speed
The converter prevents continuous motor operation at speeds < minimum speed.
Speeds where the absolute value is less than the minimum speed are only possible during
motor operation when accelerating or braking.
Table 6- 28 Setting the minimum speed
p1080 Minimum speed (factory setting: 0 rpm)
p1106 CI: Minimum speed signal source (factory setting: 0)
Dynamic specification of the minimum speed

6.4.5 Speed limitation

The maximum speed limits the speed setpoint range for both directions of rotation.
The converter generates a message (fault or alarm) when the maximum speed is exceeded.
If you must limit the speed depending on the direction of rotation, then you can define speed
limits for each direction.
Table 6- 29 Parameters for the speed limitation
p1082 Maximum speed (factory setting: 1500 rpm)
p1083 Speed limit, positive direction of rotation (factory setting: 210,000 rpm)
p1085 CI: Speed limit, positive direction of rotation (factory setting: 1083)
p1086 Speed limit, negative direction of rotation (factory setting: -210,000 rpm)
p1088 CI: Speed limit, negative direction of rotation (factory setting: 1086)

6.4.6 Ramp-function generator

The ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel limits the rate of change of the speed
setpoint (acceleration). Reduced acceleration lowers the accelerating torque of the motor. In
this case, the motor reduces the load on the mechanical system of the driven machine.
You can select between two different ramp-function generator types:
● Extended ramp-function generator
The expanded ramp-function generator limits not only the acceleration but also the
change in acceleration (jerk) by rounding the setpoint. In this case, the torque does not
rise suddenly in the motor.
● Basic ramp-function generator
The basic ramp-function generator limits the acceleration, however not the rate the
acceleration changes (jerk).
Extended ramp-function generator

The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the extended ramp-function generator can be set
independently of each other. The optimum times that you select depend on your particular
application in question and can range from just a few 100 ms (e.g. for belt conveyor drives)
to several minutes (e.g. for centrifuges).
Initial and final rounding permit smooth, jerk-free acceleration and braking.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the motor are increased by the rounding times:
● Effective ramp-up time = p1120 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).
● Effective ramp-down time = p1121 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).

Table 6- 30 Additional parameters to set the extended ramp-function generator
p1115 Ramp-function generator selection (factory setting: 1)
Select ramp-function generator:
0: Basic ramp-function generator
1: Extended ramp-function generator
p1120 Ramp-function generator, ramp-up time (factory setting: 10 s)
Accelerating time in seconds from zero speed up to the maximum speed p1082
p1121 Ramp-function generator, ramp-down time (factory setting: 10 s)
Braking time in seconds from the maximum speed down to standstill
p1130 Ramp-function generator initial rounding time (factory setting: 0 s)
Initial rounding for the extended ramp-function generator. The value applies for ramp
up and ramp down.
p1131 Ramp-function generator final rounding time (factory setting: 0 s)
Final rounding for the extended ramp-function generator. The value applies for ramp
up and ramp down.
p1134 Ramp-function rounding type (factory setting: 0)
0: Continuous smoothing
1: Discontinuous smoothing
p1135 OFF3 ramp-down time (factory setting 0 s)

The quick stop (OFF3) has its own ramp-down time.
p1136 OFF3 initial rounding time (factory setting: 0 s)
Initial rounding for OFF3 for the extended ramp-function generator.
p1137 OFF3 final rounding time (factory setting: 0 s)
Final rounding for OFF3 for the extended ramp-function generator.
You can find more information in function diagram 3070 and in the parameter list of the List
Manual.

Setting the extended ramp-function generator
Procedure
Proceed as follows to set the extended ramp-function generator:
1. Enter the highest possible speed setpoint.
3. Evaluate your drive response.
– If the motor accelerates too slowly, then reduce the ramp-up time.
An excessively short ramp-up time means that the motor will reach its current limiting
when accelerating, and will temporarily not be able to follow the speed setpoint. In this
case, the drive exceeds the set time.
– If the motor accelerates too fast, then extend the ramp-up time.
– Increase the initial rounding if the acceleration is jerky.
– We recommend that you set the final rounding to the same value as the initial
rounding.
4. Switch off the motor.
5. Evaluate your drive response.
– If the motor decelerates too slowly, then reduce the ramp-down time.
The minimum ramp-down time that makes sense depends on your particular
application. Depending on the Power Module used, for an excessively short ramp-
down time, the converter either reaches the motor current, or the DC link voltage in
the converter becomes too high. Depending on the converter setting, the real braking
time exceeds the set ramp-down time, or the converter goes into a fault condition
when braking.
– Extend the ramp-down time if the motor is braked too quickly or the converter goes
into a fault condition when braking.
6. Repeat steps 1 … 5 until the drive behavior meets the requirements of the machine or
plant.
You have set the extended ramp-function generator.

Basic ramp-function generator

When compared to the extended ramp-
function generator, the basic ramp-
function generator has no rounding
times.
Table 6- 31 Parameters for setting the ramp-function generator
p1115 = 0 Ramp-function generator selection (factory setting: 1)
Select ramp-function generator:
0: Basic ramp-function generator
1: Extended ramp-function generator
p1120 Ramp-function generator, ramp-up time (factory setting: 10 s)
Accelerating time in seconds from zero speed up to the maximum speed p1082
p1121 Ramp-function generator, ramp-down time (factory setting: 10 s)
Braking time in seconds from the maximum speed down to standstill
p1135 OFF3 ramp-down time (factory setting: 0 s)
The quick stop (OFF3) has its own ramp-down time.
Changing the ramp-up and ramp-down times in operation

The ramping up and down
time of the ramp-function
generator can be changed
during operation. The scaling
value can come e.g. from the
field bus.

Table 6- 32 Parameters for setting the scaling
p1138 Up ramp scaling (factory setting: 1)
Signal source for scaling the acceleration ramp.
p1139 Down ramp scaling (factory setting: 1)
Signal source for scaling the deceleration ramp.
Example
In the following example, the higher-level control sets the ramp-up and ramp-down times of
the inverter via PROFIBUS.
Figure 6-29 Example for changing the ramp-function generator times in operation
Preconditions
● You have commissioned the communication between the inverter and the control system.
● Free telegram 999 has been set in the inverter and in your higher-level control system.
See also section: Extend telegrams and change signal interconnection (Page 183).
● The controller sends the scaling value to the inverter in PZD 3.
Procedure
To interconnect the scaling of the ramp-up and ramp-down times with PZD receive word 3
from the fieldbus in the inverter, proceed as follows:
1. Set p1138 = 2050[2].
This means that you have interconnected the scaling factor for the ramp-up time with
PZD receive word 3.
2. Set p1139 = 2050[2].
This means that you have interconnected the scaling factor for the ramp-down time with
PZD receive word 3.
The inverter receives the value for scaling the ramp-up and ramp-down times via PZD
receive word 3.
You will find further information in the Internet at: FAQ
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82604741).

6.5 Motor control
6.5 Motor control

The inverter has two alternative methods to control (closed loop) the motor speed:
● U/f control
● Vector control with speed controller
6.5.1 V/f control
Overview of the U/f control

The U/f control is a closed-loop speed control with the following characteristics:
● The inverter controls the output voltage using the V/f characteristic
● The output frequency is essentially calculated from the speed setpoint and the number of
pole pairs of the motor
● The slip compensation corrects the output frequency depending on the load and thus
increases the speed accuracy
● Not using a PI controller prevents the speed control from becoming unstable
● In applications in which greater speed accuracy is required, a closed-loop control with
load-dependent voltage boost can be selected (flux current control, FCC)
1) In the U/f control variant, "flux current control (FCC)," the inverter controls the motor current (start-
ing current) at low speeds
Figure 6-30 Simplified function diagram of the U/f control
One function not shown in the simplified function diagram is the resonance damping for
damping mechanical oscillations. You will find the complete function diagrams 6300 et seq.
in the List Manual.
For operation of the motor with U/f control, you must set at least the subfunctions shown with
a gray background in the figure to adapt them to your application:
● V/f characteristic
● Voltage boost

6.5 Motor control
Default setting after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control
Selecting application class Standard Drive Control adapts the structure and the setting
options of the U/f control as follows:
● Starting current closed-loop control: At low speeds, a controlled motor current reduces
the tendency of the motor to oscillate.
● With increasing speed, transition from closed-loop starting current control into U/f control
with voltage boost depending on the load.
● Soft starting is not possible.
● Fewer parameters
Figure 6-31 Default setting of the U/f control after selecting Standard Drive Control
The complete function diagrams 6850 ff. for application class Standard Drive Control are
provided in the List Manual.

6.5 Motor control
6.5.1.1 Characteristics of U/f control

The inverter has different V/f characteristics.
① The voltage boost of the characteristic optimizes the speed control at low speeds
② With the flux current control (FCC), the inverter compensates for the voltage drop in the stator
resistor of the motor
Figure 6-32 Characteristics of U/f control
The inverter increases its output voltage to the maximum possible output voltage. The
maximum possible output voltage of the inverter depends on the line voltage.
When the maximum output voltage is reached, the inverter only increases the output
frequency. At this point, the motor enters the field weakening range: At constant torque, the
slip decreases quadratically as the speed increases.

6.5 Motor control
The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency also depends on the following
variables:
● Ratio between the converter size and the motor size
● Line voltage
● Line impedance
● Actual motor torque
The maximum possible output voltage as a function of the input voltage is provided in the
technical data, also see Section Technical data (Page 381).
Table 6- 33 Linear and parabolic characteristics
Requirement Application examples Remark Characteristic Parameter

The required Conveyor belts, roller - Linear p1300 = 0
torque is inde- conveyors, chain con- The inverter equalizes the voltage drops Linear with Flux p1300 = 1
pendent of the veyors, eccentric worm across the stator resistance. Recom- Current Control
speed pumps, compressors, mended for motors less than 7.5 kW. (FCC)
extruders, centrifuges,
agitators, mixers Precondition: You have set the motor data
according to the rating plate and have
performed the motor identification after
the basic commissioning.
The required Centrifugal pumps, Lower losses in the motor and inverter Parabolic p1300 = 2
torque increases radial fans, axial fans than for a linear characteristic.
with the speed
Table 6- 34 Characteristics for special applications

Applications with a Centrifugal pumps, The ECO mode results in additional ener- ECO mode p1300 = 4
low dynamic re- radial fans, axial fans gy saving when compared to the parabolic or
sponse and con- characteristic. p1300 = 7
stant speed If the speed setpoint is reached and re-
mains unchanged for 5 seconds, the in-
verter again reduces its output voltage.
The inverter must Drives in the textile When the maximum current limit is Precise fre- p1300 = 5
keep the motor sector reached, the inverter only reduces the quency charac- or
speed constant stator voltage but not the speed. teristic p1300 = 6
under all circum-
stances.
Freely adjustable - - Adjustable char- p1300 = 3
U/f characteristic acteristic
U/f characteristic - The interrelationship between the fre- Independent p1300 = 19
with independent quency and voltage is not calculated in voltage setpoint
voltage setpoint the inverter, but is specified by the user.
Additional information on U/f characteristics can be found in the parameter list and in the
function diagrams 6300 ff of the List Manual.

6.5 Motor control
Characteristics after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control

Selecting application class Standard Drive Control reduces the number of characteristics and
the setting options:
● A linear and a parabolic characteristic are available.
● Selecting a technological application defines the characteristic.
● The following cannot be set - ECO mode, FCC, the programmable characteristic and a
specific voltage setpoint.
① The closed-loop starting current control optimizes the speed control at low speeds
② The inverter compensates the voltage drop across the motor stator resistance
Figure 6-33 Characteristics after selecting Standard Drive Control
Table 6- 35 Linear and parabolic characteristics

The required Conveyor belts, roller - Linear p0501 = 0
torque is inde- conveyors, chain con-
pendent of the veyors, eccentric worm
speed pumps, compressors,
extruders, centrifuges,
agitators, mixers
The required Centrifugal pumps, Lower losses in the motor and inverter Parabolic p0501 = 1
torque increases radial fans, axial fans than for a linear characteristic.
with the speed
Additional information on the characteristics can be found in the parameter list and in the
function diagrams 6851 ff of the List Manual.

6.5 Motor control
6.5.1.2 Optimizing motor starting
Setting the voltage boost for U/f control

After selection of the V/f characteristic, no further settings are required in most applications.
In the following circumstances, the motor cannot accelerate to its speed setpoint after it has
been switched on:
● Load moment of inertia too high
● Load torque too large
● Ramp-up time p1120 too short
To improve the starting behavior of the

motor, the V/f characteristic can be
raised at low speeds.
The inverter raises the voltage in ac-
cordance with the starting currents
p1310 … p1312.
The adjacent diagram shows the result-
ing voltage boost using a linear charac-
teristic as an example.
Requirements
● Set the ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator to a value 1 s (< 1 kW) … 10 s
(> 10 kW), depending on the power rating of the motor .
● Increase the starting current in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in p1310 ... p1312
can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the inverter due to overcurrent.
If the message A07409 appears, you must not increase any of the parameters.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to set the voltage boost:
1. Switch off the motor with a setpoint of just a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.
3. If the motor rotates eccentrically or even stops, increase the voltage boost p1310 until the
motor rotates smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum speed with maximum load.
5. Check whether the motor is following the setpoint.
6. If necessary, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without
problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must additionally set parameter p1312
higher to achieve a satisfactory response.
You have set the voltage boost.

6.5 Motor control
p1310 Starting current (voltage boost) permanent (factory setting 50 %)
Compensates for voltage drops caused by long motor cables and the ohmic losses in
the motor.
p1311 Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating (factory setting 0 %)
Provides additional torque when the motor accelerates.
p1312 Starting current (voltage boost) when starting (factory setting 0 %)
Provides additional torque, however, only when the motor accelerates for the first time
after it has been switched on ("break loose torque").
You will find more information on this function in the parameter list and in function diagram
6301 in the List Manual.
Starting current (boost) after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control
After selecting application class Standard Drive Control, in most applications, and no
additional settings have to be made.
At standstill, the inverter ensures that at least the rated motor magnetizing current flows.
Magnetizing current p0320 approximately corresponds to the no-load current at
50 % … 80 % of the rated motor speed.
In the following situations, after it has been switched on, the motor cannot accelerate up to
its speed setpoint:
● Excessively high load moment of inertia
● Excessively high load torque
● Ramp-up time p1120
The current can be increased at low

speeds to improve the starting behavior
of the motor.
The inverter boosts the voltage corre-
sponding to the starting currents
p1310 … p1312.
The adjacent diagram shows the volt-
age boost using a linear characteristic
as example.
Requirements
● Depending on the rated power of the motor, set the ramp-up time of the ramp-function
generator to a value of 1 s (< 1 kW) … 10 s (> 10 kW).
● Increase the starting current in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in p1310 ... p1312
can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the inverter due to overcurrent.
When message A07409 is displayed, it is not permissible that you further increase the
value of any of the parameters.

6.5 Motor control
Procedure
Proceed as follows to set the voltage boost:
1. Switch on the motor with a setpoint of a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.
3. If the motor does not rotate smoothly, or even remains stationary, increase the voltage
boost p1310 until the motor runs smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum speed with maximum load.
5. Check that the motor follows the setpoint.
6. When required, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without any
problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must also increase parameter p1312 in
order to achieve a satisfactory motor response.
You have set the voltage boost.
p1310 Starting current (voltage boost) permanent (Factory setting 50 %)
Compensates voltage losses as a result of long motor cables and the ohmic losses in
the motor.
After commissioning, depending on the motor power rating and the technological ap-
plication p0501, the inverter sets p1310.
p1311 Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating(Factory setting 0%)
Provides additional torque when the motor accelerates.
After commissioning, depending on the motor power rating and the technological ap-
plication p0501, the inverter sets p1311.
p1312 Starting current (voltage boost) when starting(Factory setting 0%)
Provides additional torque, however, only when the motor accelerates for the first time
after it has been switched on ("break loose torque").
You can find more information about this function in the parameter list and in function
diagram 6851 of the List Manual.

6.5 Motor control
6.5.2 Vector control with speed controller
6.5.2.1 Overview
Overview
The vector control comprises closed-loop current control and a higher-level closed-loop
speed control.
1) For induction motors

Figure 6-34 Simplified function diagram for sensorless vector control with speed controller
All of the function block diagrams 6020 ff. for vector control are provided in the List Manual:
Using the motor model, the inverter calculates the following closed-loop control signals from
the measured phase currents and the output voltage:
● Current component Id
● Current component Iq
● Speed actual value
The setpoint of the current component Id (flux setpoint) is obtained from the motor data. For
speeds above the rated speed, the inverter reduces the flux setpoint along the field
weakening characteristic.
When the speed setpoint is increased, the speed controller responds with a higher setpoint
for the current component Iq (torque setpoint). The closed-loop control responds to a higher
torque setpoint by adding a higher slip frequency to the output frequency. Also in the motor,
the higher output frequency results in a higher slip, which is proportional to the accelerating

6.5 Motor control
torque. Iq and Idcontrollers keep the motor flux constant using the output voltage, and adjust
the matching current component Iq in the motor.
In order to achieve a satisfactory controller response, as a minimum, you must match the
subfunctions having a gray background as shown in the diagram above with your particular
application.
● Motor and current model: In the basic commissioning, correctly set the motor data from
the rating plate corresponding to the connection type (Y/Δ), and carry out a motor data
identification routine at standstill.
● Speed limits and torque limits: In the basic commissioning, set the maximum speed
(p1082) and current limit (p0640) to match your particular application. When completing
the basic commissioning, the inverter calculates the torque and power limits
corresponding to the current limit. The actual torque limits are obtained from the
converted current and power limits and the set torque limits.
● Speed controller: Start the rotating measurement of the motor data identification. You
must manually optimize the controller if the rotating measurement is not possible.
Default settings after selecting the application class Dynamic Drive Control
Selecting application class Dynamic Drive Control adapts the structure of the vector control
and reduces the setting options:
Vector control after Vector control without se-

selecting the applica- lecting an application class
tion class Dynamic
Drive Control
Closed-loop torque control without higher- Not possible Possible
level speed controller
Droop Not possible Possible
KP- and TIadaptation Simplified Advanced
Hold or set the integral component of the Not possible Possible
speed controller
Acceleration model for precontrol Default setting Can be activated
Motor data identification at standstill or with Shortened, with op- Complete
rotating measurement tional transition into
operation

6.5 Motor control
6.5.2.2 Optimizing the closed-loop speed controller
Optimum control response - post optimization not required

Preconditions for assessing the controller response:
● The moment of inertia of the load is constant and does not depend on the speed
● The inverter does not reach the set torque limits during acceleration
● You operate the motor in the range 40 % … 60 % of its rated speed
If the motor exhibits the following response, the speed control is well set and you do not
have to adapt the speed controller manually:
The speed setpoint (broken line) increases with the set ramp-
up time and rounding.
The actual value follows the setpoint without overshooting.
Control optimization required

In some cases, the self-optimization result is not satisfactory or self-optimization is not
possible because the motor cannot rotate freely.
In these cases, you must optimize the closed-loop speed control manually. The following
parameters influence the response of the speed control:
• p1496 Acceleration pre-control scaling

• p0342 Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia
• p1470 P gain KP
• p1472 Integration time (integral time) TI
• p1452 Speed controller actual speed value smoothing time (without encoder)
Optimizing the speed controller
Requirements
● Torque precontrol is active: p1496 = 100 %.
● The load moment of inertia is constant and independent of the speed.
● The inverter requires 10 % … 50 % of the rated torque to accelerate.
When necessary, adapt the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function
generator (p1120 and p1121).
● You have prepared the trace function in STARTER or Startdrive to be able to trace the
speed setpoint and the speed actual value.

6.5 Motor control
Procedure
To optimize the speed controller, proceed as follows:
2. Enter a speed setpoint of approximately 40 % of the rated speed.
3. Wait until the actual speed has stabilized.
4. Increase the setpoint up to a maximum of 60 % of the rated speed.
5. Monitor the associated characteristic of the setpoint and actual speed.
6. Optimize the controller by adapting the ratio of the moments of inertia of the load and
motor (p0342):
Initially, the actual speed follows the setpoint speed; however, it

then overshoots the setpoint speed.
• Increase p0342
Initially, the actual speed exceeds the setpoint speed; however,

it does not overshoot but instead approaches the setpoint speed
"from below".
• Reduce p0342

8. Start a new calculation of the speed controller: p0340 = 4.
10.Over the complete speed range check whether the speed control responds satisfactorily
with the optimized settings.
You have optimized the speed controller.
When necessary, set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator
(p1120 and p1121) back to the value before optimization.
Mastering critical applications

The drive control can become unstable for drives with a high load moment of inertia and
gearbox backlash or a coupling between the motor and load that can possibly oscillate. In
this case, we recommend the following settings:
● Increase the smoothing of speed actual value p1452.
● Increase the integral time: TI ≥ 4 × p1452.
● If the closed-loop speed control no longer has an adequate dynamic performance after
these measures, then increase the P gain KP step-by-step.

6.5 Motor control
6.5.2.3 Advanced settings
KP- and TIadaptation

Kp and TI adaptation suppress speed control oscillations that may occur. The "rotating
measurement" of the motor data identification optimizes the speed controller. If you have
performed the rotating measurement, then the Kp- and Tnadaptation has been set.
You can find additional information in the List Manual:
● Vector control with speed controller: Function diagram 6050
● Vector control after presetting the application class Dynamic Drive Control Function
diagram 6824
Droop
For mechanically coupled drives, there is the risk that the drives oppose one another: Small
deviations in the speed setpoint or actual value of the coupled drives can mean that the
drives are operated with significantly different torques.
The droop function ensures even torque distribution between several mechanically coupled
drives.
The droop function reduces the speed setpoint as a function of the torque setpoint.
Figure 6-35 Effect of droop in the speed controller
When droop is active, the ramp-function generators of all of the coupled drives must be set
to have identical ramp-up and ramp-down times as well as rounding-off.
Par. Explanation
r1482 Speed controller I torque output
p1488 Droop input source (factory setting: 0)
0: Droop feedback not connected
1: Droop from the torque setpoint
2: Droop from the speed control output
3: Droop from the integral output, speed controller
p1489 Droop feedback scaling (factory setting: 0.05)
A value of 0.05 means: At the rated motor torque, the inverter reduces the speed by 5% of
the rated motor speed.
r1490 Droop feedback speed reduction
p1492 Droop feedback enable (factory setting: 0)
After selecting application class "Dynamic Drive Control", droop is no longer possible.
You can find additional information in the List Manual, function block diagram 6030.

6.5 Motor control
6.5.2.4 Friction characteristic
Function
In many applications, e.g. applications with geared motors or belt conveyors, the frictional
torque of the load is not negligible.
The inverter provides the possibility of precontrolling the torque setpoint, bypassing the
speed controller. The precontrol reduces overshooting of the speed after speed changes.
Figure 6-36 Precontrol of the speed controller with frictional torque
The inverter calculates the current frictional torque from a friction characteristic with 10
intermediate points.
Figure 6-37 Friction characteristic
The intermediate points of the friction characteristic are defined for positive speeds. In the
negative direction of rotation, the inverter uses the intermediate points with a negative sign.

6.5 Motor control
Recording a friction characteristic

After basic commissioning, the inverter sets the speeds of the intermediate points to values
suitable for the rated speed of the motor. The frictional torque of all intermediate points is still
equal to zero. On request, the inverter records the friction characteristic: The inverter
accelerates the motor step by step up to the rated speed, measures the frictional torque und
writes the frictional torque into the intermediate points of the friction characteristic.
Requirement
The motor is permitted to accelerate up to the rated speed without endangering persons or
property.
Procedure
To record the friction characteristic, proceed as follows:
1. Set P3845 = 1: The inverter accelerates the motor successively in both directions of
rotation and averages the measurement results of the positive and negative directions.
2. Switch on the motor (ON/OFF1 = 1).
3. The inverter accelerates the motor.
During measurement, the inverter signals the warning A07961.
When the inverter has determined all the intermediate points of the friction characteristic
without fault code F07963, the inverter stops the motor.
You have recorded the friction characteristic.
Interconnect the precontrol of the speed controller with the frictional torque
To interconnect the precontrol of the speed
controller with the frictional torque, set p1513
= r3841 (frictional torque = additional torque
2).
You will find additional information in function
diagram 6060 of the List Manual.

6.5 Motor control
Parameter
p3820 Intermediate points of the friction characteristic [rpm; Nm]
…
p2839
r3840 Friction characteristic status word
.00 1 signal: Friction characteristic OK
.01 1 signal: Determination of the friction characteristic is active
.02 1 signal: Determination of the friction characteristic is complete
.03 1 signal: Determination of the friction characteristic has been aborted
.08 1 signal: Friction characteristic positive direction
r3841 Friction characteristic, output [Nm]
p3842 Activate friction characteristic
0: Friction characteristic deactivated
1: Friction characteristic activated
p3845 Activate friction characteristic plot (factory setting: 0)
0: Friction characteristic plot deactivated
1: Friction characteristic plot activated, both directions
2: Friction characteristic plot activated, positive direction
3: Friction characteristic plot activated, negative direction
p3846 Friction characteristic plot ramp-up/ramp-down time (factory setting: 10 s)
Ramp-up/ramp-down time for automatic plotting of the friction characteristic.
p3847 Friction characteristic plot warm-up period (factory setting: 0 s)
At the start of automatic plotting, the inverter accelerates the motor up to the speed =
p3829 und keeps the speed constant for this time.
You will find more information in the List Manual.

6.5 Motor control
6.5.2.5 Moment of inertia estimator
Background
From the load moment of inertia and the speed setpoint change, the inverter calculates the
accelerating torque required for the motor. Via the speed controller precontrol, the
accelerating torque specifies the main percentage of the torque setpoint. The speed
controller corrects inaccuracies in the precontrol (feed-forward control).
Figure 6-38 Influence of the moment of inertia estimator on the speed control
The more precise the value of the moment of inertia in the inverter, the lower the overshoot
after speed changes.
Figure 6-39 Influence of the moment of inertia estimator on the speed
Function
From the actual speed, the actual motor torque and the frictional torque of the load, the
inverter calculates the total moment of inertia of the load and motor.
Figure 6-40 Overview of the function of the moment of inertia estimator

6.5 Motor control
Calculating the load torque
At low speeds, the inverter calculates the load torque

ML from the actual motor torque.
The calculation takes place under the following con-
ditions:
• Speed ≥ p1226
• Acceleration setpoint < 8 1/s2 (≙ speed change
480 rpm per s)
• Acceleration × moment of inertia (r1493) < 0.9 ×
p1560
Calculating the moment of inertia
For larger changes, the inverter initially cal-

culates the accelerating torque MB as differ-
ence between the motor torque MM, load
torque ML and frictional torque MR:
MB = MM - ML - MR
The moment of inertia J of the motor and
load is then obtained from the accelerating
torque MB – and the angular acceleration α
(α = rate of change of speed):
J = MB / α
If all of the following conditions are met, the inverter calculates the moment of inertia:
• ① The rated accelerating torque MB must satisfy the following two conditions:
– The sign of MB is the same as the direction of the actual acceleration
– MB > p1560 × rated motor torque (r0333)
• ② speed > p1755
• The inverter has calculated the load torque in at least one direction of rotation.
• Acceleration setpoint > 8 1/s2 (≙ speed change 480 rpm per s)
③ The inverter calculates the load torque again after acceleration.

6.5 Motor control
Moment of inertia precontrol

In applications where the motor predominantly operates with a constant speed, the inverter
can only infrequently calculate the moment of inertia using the function described above.
Moment of inertia precontrol is available for situations such as these. The moment of inertia
precontrol assumes that there is an approximately linear relationship between the moment of
inertia and the load torque.
Example: For a horizontal conveyor, in a first approximation, the moment of inertia depends
on the load.
The relationship between load torque and torque

is saved in the inverter as linear characteristic.
In a positive direction of rotation:
Moment of inertia J = p5312 × load torque ML +
p5313
In a negative direction of rotation:
Moment of inertia J = p5314 × load torque ML +
p5315
You have the following options to determine the characteristic:
• You already know the characteristic from other measurements. In this case, you must set
the parameters to known values when commissioning the system.
• The inverter iteratively determines the characteristic by performing measurements while
the motor is operational.
Activating the moment of inertia estimator

The moment of inertia estimator is deactivated in the factory setting. p1400.18 = 0,
p1400.20 = 0, p1400.22 = 0.
If you performed the rotating measurement for the motor identification during basic
commissioning, we recommend leaving the moment of inertia estimator deactivated.
Preconditions
● You are using a 1FK7 encoderless permanent-field synchronous motor.
● You have selected encoderless vector control.
● The load torque must be constant whilst the motor accelerates or brakes.
Typical of a constant load torque are conveyor applications and centrifuges, for example.
Fan applications, for example, are not permitted.
● The speed setpoint is free from superimposed unwanted signals.
● The motor and load are connected to each other with an interference fit.
Drives with slip between the motor shaft and load are not permitted, e.g. as a result of
loose or worn belts.
If the conditions are not met, you must not activate the moment of inertia estimator.

6.5 Motor control
Procedure
To activate the moment of inertia estimator, proceed as follows:
1. Set p1400.18 = 1
2. Check: p1496 ≠ 0
3. Activate the acceleration model of the speed controller pre-control: p1400.20 = 1.
You have activated the moment of inertia estimator.
r0333 Rated motor torque [Nm]
p0341 Motor moment of inertia (factory setting: 0 kgm2)
The inverter sets the parameter when selecting a listed motor. The parameter is then
write-protected.
p0342 Moment of inertia ratio, total to motor (factory setting: 1)
Ratio of moment of inertia load + motor to moment of inertia of motor without load
p1400 Speed control configuration
.18 1 signal: Moment of inertia estimator active
.20 1 signal: Acceleration model on
.22 1 signal Moment of inertia estimator retain value when motor switched off
0 signal Moment of inertia estimator reset value to initial value J0 when
motor switched off:
J0 = p0341 × p0342 + p1498
If the load torque can change when the motor is switched off, set
p1400.22 = 0.
.24 1 signal Accelerated moment of inertia estimator is active.
r1407 Status word, speed controller
.24 1 signal: Moment of inertia estimator is active
.25 1 signal: Load estimator is active
.26 1 signal: Moment of inertia estimator is engaged
.27 1 signal: Accelerated moment of inertia estimator is active.
r1493 Total moment of inertia, scaled
r1493 = p0341 × p0342 × p1496
p1496 Acceleration precontrol scaling (factory setting: 0 %)
According to rotating measurement of the motor data identification is p1496 = 100 %.
p1498 Load moment of inertia (factory setting: 0 kgm2)
p1502 Freeze moment of inertia estimator (factory setting: 0)
If the load torque changes when accelerating the motor, set this signal to 0.
0 signal Moment of inertia estimator is active
1 signal Determined moment of inertia is frozen
p1775 Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation
Defines the switchover between open-loop and closed-loop controlled operation of
the encoderless vector control.
When selecting the closed-loop speed control, the inverter sets p1755 = 13.3 % ×
rated speed.

6.5 Motor control
Advanced settings
p1226 Standstill detection, speed threshold (Factory setting: 20 rpm)
The moment of inertia estimator only measures the load torque for speeds ≥ p1226.
p1226 also defines from which speed the inverter switches-off the motor for OFF1
and OFF3.
p1560 Moment of inertia estimator accelerating torque threshold value (factory setting:
10 %)
p1561 Moment of inertia estimator change time iner- The lower that p1561 or p1562 is,
tia (factory setting: 500 ms) the shorter the moment of inertia
p1562 Moment of inertia estimator change time load estimator measurements.
(factory setting: 10 ms) The larger p1561 or p1562 is, the
more accurate the results provided
by the moment of inertia estimator.
p1563 Moment of inertia estimator load torque positive direction of rotation(factory setting:
0 Nm)
p1564 Moment of inertia estimator load torque negative direction of rotation(factory setting:
0 Nm)
p5310 Moment of inertia precontrol configuration (factory setting: 0000 bin)
.00 1 signal: activates calculation of the characteristic (p5312 … p5315)
.01 1 signal: activates moment of inertia precontrol
p5310.00 = 0, p5310.01 = 0 Deactivating moment of inertia precontrol
p5310.00 = 1, p5310.01 = 0 Adapting the moment of inertia precontrol
p5310.00 = 0, p5310.01 = 1 Activating the moment of inertia precontrol.
The characteristic of the moment of inertia
precontrol remains unchanged.
p5310.00 = 1, p5310.01 = 1 Activating the moment of inertia precontrol. The
inverter adapts the characteristic in parallel.
r5311 Moment of inertia precontrol status word
.00 1 signal: New measuring points for the characteristic of the moment of inertia
precontrol are available
.01 1 signal: new parameters are been calculated
.02 1 signal: moment of inertia precontrol active
.03 1 signal: the characteristic in the positive direction of rotation has been calcu-
lated and is ready
.04 1 signal: the characteristic in the negative direction of rotation has been calcu-
lated and is ready
.05 1 signal: The inverter writes actual results to the parameter
p5312 Moment of inertia precontrol linear positive (factory In a positive direction of rota-
setting: 0 1/s2) tion:
p5313 Moment of inertia precontrol constant positive (fac- Moment of inertia = p5312 ×
tory setting: 0 kgm2) load torque + p5313
p5314 Moment of inertia precontrol linear negative (factory In a negative direction of rota-
setting: 0 1/s2) tion:
p5315 Moment of inertia precontrol constant negative Moment of inertia = p5314 ×
(factory setting: 0 kgm2) load torque + p5315

6.5 Motor control
6.5.2.6 Pole position identification
The pole position of a synchronous motor

The pole position of a synchronous motor is the deviation between the
magnetic axis in the rotor and the magnetic axis in the stator.
The image below shows you the pole position of a synchronous motor
in a simplified cross-section.
The inverter must know the pole position of the rotor in the motor in order to be able to
control the torque and speed of a synchronous motor.
Pole position identification

The inverter must measure the pole position for motors not equipped with an encoder, or for
encoders, which do not supply the information regarding the pole position.
If you are using a Siemens motor, then the inverter automatically selects the appropriate
technique to determine the pole position, and when required starts the pole position
identification.
Motor without an encoder

Each time the motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 command),
the inverter measures the pole position.
As a result of the measurement, the motor responds to an
ON command with a delay of up to 1 second. The motor
shaft can rotate slightly during the measurement.
Identifying the pole position

using a measurement

6.5 Motor control
6.5.3 Torque control

Torque control is part of the vector control and normally receives its setpoint from the speed
controller output. By deactivating the speed controller and directly entering the torque
setpoint, the closed-loop speed control becomes closed-loop torque control. The inverter
then no longer controls the motor speed, but the torque that the motor generates.
Figure 6-41 Simplified function diagram of the closed-loop torque control
Typical applications for torque control

The torque control is used in applications where the motor speed is specified by the
connected driven load. Examples of such applications include:
● Load distribution between master and slave drives:
The master drive is speed controlled, the slave drive is torque controlled.
● Winding machines
Commissioning the torque control

The torque control only functions error-free if, during the basic commissioning, you correctly
set the motor data and performed the motor data identification with the motor in the cold
state.

6.5 Motor control
See also section: Commissioning (Page 111).
Table 6- 36 The most important torque control parameters
p1300 Control mode:
22: Torque control without speed encoder
p0300 … Motor data is transferred from the rating plate during basic commissioning and calcu-
p0360 lated with the motor data identification
p1511 Additional torque
p1520 Upper torque limit
p1521 Lower torque limit
p1530 Motoring power limit
p1531 Regenerative power limit
Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in function
diagrams 6030 onwards in the List Manual.

6.6 Protection functions

The frequency inverter offers protective functions against overtemperature and overcurrent
for both the frequency inverter as well as the motor. Further, the frequency inverter protects
itself against an excessively high DC link voltage when the motor is regenerating.
6.6.1 Inverter temperature monitoring

The inverter temperature is essentially defined by the following effects:
● The ambient temperature
● The ohmic losses increasing with the output current
● Switching losses increasing with the pulse frequency
Monitoring types
The inverter monitors its temperature using the following monitoring types:
● I2t monitoring (alarm A07805, fault F30005)
● Measuring the chip temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05006, fault F30024)
● Measuring the heat sink temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05000, fault F30004)
Inverter response to thermal overload
r0036 Power unit overload I2t [%]
The I2t monitoring calculates the inverter utilization based on a current reference value
defined in the factory.
• Actual current > reference value: r0036 becomes higher.
• Actual current < reference value: r0036 becomes lower or remains = 0.
r0037 Power unit temperatures [°C]
p0290 Power unit overload response
Factory setting and the ability to be changed depends on the hardware. The dependency
is described in the List Manual.
A thermal overload is present if the inverter temperature is greater than that specified in
p0292.
You define how the inverter responds if there is a risk of thermal overload using this
parameter. The details are described below.
p0292 Power unit temperature warning threshold (factory setting: Heat sink [0] 5 °C, power
semiconductor [1] 15 °C)
The value is set as a difference to the shutdown temperature.
p0294 Power unit warning at I2t overload (factory setting: 95 %)

Overload response for p0290 = 0

The inverter responds depending on the control mode that has been set:
● In vector control, the inverter reduces the output current.
● In U/f control, the inverter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the inverter re-enables the output current or
speed.
If the measure cannot prevent an inverter thermal overload, then the inverter switches off the
motor with fault F30024.

The inverter immediately switches off the motor with fault F30024.

We recommend this setting for drives with square-law torque characteristic, e.g. fans.
The inverter responds in two stages:
1. If you operate the inverter with increased pulse frequency setpoint p1800, then the
inverter reduces its pulse frequency starting at p1800.
In spite of the temporarily reduced pulse frequency, the base load output current remains
unchanged at the value that is assigned to p1800.
Figure 6-42 Derating characteristic and base load output current for overload
Once the overload condition has been removed, the inverter increases the pulse
frequency back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
2. If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the risk of thermal
overload cannot be prevented, then stage 2 follows:
– In vector control, the inverter reduces its output current.
– In U/f control, the inverter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the inverter re-enables the output
current or speed.
If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload, then the inverter switches off
the motor with fault F30024.


If you operate the inverter with increased pulse frequency, then the inverter reduces its pulse
frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
In spite of the temporarily reduced pulse frequency, the maximum output current remains
unchanged at the value that is assigned to the pulse frequency setpoint. Also see p0290 = 2.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the inverter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the measure cannot prevent
a power unit thermal overload, then the inverter switches off the motor with fault F30024.

The inverter responds in two stages:
1. If you operate the inverter with increased pulse frequency setpoint p1800, then the
inverter reduces its pulse frequency starting at p1800.
There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the inverter increases the pulse
frequency back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
2. If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the risk of inverter
thermal overload cannot be prevented, then stage 2 follows:
– In vector control, the inverter reduces the output current.
– In U/f control, the inverter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the inverter re-enables the output
current or speed.
If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload, then the inverter switches off
the motor with fault F30024.

We recommend this setting for drives with high starting torque, e.g. horizontal conveyors or
extruders.
If you operate the inverter with increased pulse frequency, then the inverter reduces its pulse
frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the inverter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the measure cannot prevent
a power unit thermal overload, then the inverter switches off the motor with fault F30024.

6.6.2 Motor temperature monitoring using a temperature sensor
Connecting the temperature sensor

It is permissible to use one of the following sensors to protect the motor against
overtemperature:
● Temperature switch (e.g. bimetallic switch)
● PTC sensor
● KTY84 sensor
Connect the temperature sensor of the motor to terminals

14 and 15 of the inverter.
Temperature switch
The converter interprets a resistance ≥ 100 Ω as being an opened temperature
switch and responds according to the setting for p0610.
PTC sensor
The converter interprets a resistance > 1650 Ω as being an overtemperature and
responds according to the setting for p0610.
The converter interprets a resistance < 20 Ω as being a short-circuit and responds
with alarm A07015. If the alarm is present for longer than 100 milliseconds, the con-
verter shuts down with fault F07016.

KTY84 sensor
NOTICE
Motor overheating due to incorrectly connected KTY sensor
If a KTY sensor is connected with incorrect polarity, the motor can become damaged due to
overheating, as the converter cannot detect a motor overtemperature condition.
• Connect the KTY sensor with the correct polarity.
Using a KTY sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature and the sensor
itself for wire-break or short-circuit:
● Temperature monitoring:
The converter uses a KTY sensor to evaluate the motor temperature in the range from -
48° C ... +248° C.
Use the p0604 or p0605 parameter to set the temperature for the alarm and fault
threshold.
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter switches off with fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 ≠ 0
● Sensor monitoring (A07015 or F07016):
– Wire-break:
The converter interprets a resistance > 2120 Ω as a wire-break and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
– Short-circuit:
The converter interprets a resistance < 50 Ω as a short-circuit and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.

Setting parameters for the temperature monitoring
p0335 Specify the motor cooling
0: Natural cooling - with fan on the motor shaft (factory setting)
1: Forced ventilation - with a separately driven fan
2: Liquid cooling
128: No fan
p0601 Motor-temperature sensor type
0: No sensor (factory setting)
1: PTC (→ p0604)
2: KTY84 (→ p0604, p0605)
4: Temperature switch
p0604 Motor temperature alarm threshold (factory setting 130° C)
p0605 Motor temperature fault threshold (factory setting 145° C)
Setting for KTY84 sensor. The parameter has no significance for a PTC sensor.
p0610 Motor overtemperature response (factory setting: 12)
Determines the behavior as soon as the motor temperature reaches the warning
threshold p0604.
0: Alarm (A07910), no fault.
1: Alarm (A07910); the converter reduces the current limit and starts the timer.
Shutdown with fault (F07011).
2: Alarm (A07910); the converter starts the timer. Shutdown with fault (F07011).
12: As for 2, but the converter considers the last shutdown temperature to calculate
the motor temperature.
p0640 Current limit (input in A)
Additional information on the motor temperature monitoring can be found in function diagram
8016 of the List Manual.

6.6.3 Protecting the motor by calculating the motor temperature

The converter calculates the motor temperature based on a thermal motor model.
Requirements
The inverter can only calculate a realistic motor temperature if the following requirements are
met:
● Perform basic commissioning
● In the basic commissioning, set the motor data via the motor code, the motor Article No.,
or according to the motor nameplate.
● Check the value of the motor mass (P0344). The inverter calculates the p0344 based on
the basic commissioning.
Settings
Table 6- 37 Parameters for temperature acquisition without using a temperature sensor
p0601 Motor temperature sensor type (factory setting: 0)
0: No sensor
p0604 Mot_temp_mod 2/KTY Warning threshold (factory setting: 130 °C)
Threshold for monitoring the motor temperature..
After exceeding the threshold, the converter reports fault F07011.
p0605 Mot_temp_mod 1/2 threshold (factory setting: 145 °C)
Threshold for monitoring the motor temperature with motor temperature model 1, 2, or
KTY.
Motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1): Alarm threshold - If the alarm threshold is
exceeded, the inverter reports alarm A07012.
Motor temperature model 2 (p0612.1 = 1) or KTY: Fault threshold - If the fault thresh-
old is exceeded, the inverter reports fault F07011.
p0610 Motor overtemperature response (factory setting: 12)
Determines the behavior as soon as the motor temperature reaches the warning
threshold p0604.
0: Warning (A07910), no fault.
1: Warning (A07910); current limit will be reduced and timer started. Shutdown
with fault (F07011).
2: Warning (A07910); timer is started. Shutdown with fault (F07011).
12: As for 2 but the last shutdown temperature is used to calculate the motor
temperature (factory setting).
p0611 I2t motor model thermal time constant (factory setting: 0 s)
The parameter is only effective for synchronous motors.
On selecting a motor from the motor list (p0301), the converter sets up the parameter
value automatically.
p0612 Mot_temp_mod activation

.00 1 signal: Activate motor temperature model 1 (I2t) for permanently excited
synchronous motors
.01 1 signal: Activate motor temperature model 2 for asynchronous motors
.02 1 signal: Activate motor temperature model 3 for 1FK7 encoderless synchro-
nous motors
p0612.02 cannot be set for every inverter.
.09 1 signal: Activate motor temperature model 2 expansions
p0614 Thermal resistance adaptation reduction factor (factory setting: 30 %)
Derating factor for overtemperature of the thermal adaptation of the stator and rotor
resistance
p0615 Mot_temp_mod 1 (I2t) Interference threshold (factory setting: 180 °C)
Interference threshold for monitoring the motor temperature in motortemperature
model 1.
After exceeding the interference threshold, the converter reports fault F07011.
p0621 Identification of stator resistance (Rs) when switched on again (factory setting: 0)
The converter measures the current stator resistance and from this calculates the
current motor temperature as the start value of the thermal motor model.
0: No Rs identification
1: Rs identification on first switching on the motor
2: Rs identification each time the motor is switched on
p0622 Motor excitation time for Rs_ident on switching on again
The converter sets the parameter value to the corresponding result of the motor data
identification.
p0625 Motor ambient temperature during commissioning (factory setting: 20 °C)
Enter the ambient motor temperature in °C at the instant that the motor data is ac-
quired.
More information on temperature calculation can be found in function plans 8016 and 8017
and the list manual.

6.6.4 Overcurrent protection

The vector control ensures that the motor current remains within the set torque limits.
If you use U/f control, you cannot set any torque limits. The U/f control prevents too high a
motor current by influencing the output frequency and the motor voltage (I-max controller).
I_max controller
Requirements
The torque of the motor must decrease at lower speeds, which is the case, for example, with
fans.
The load must not drive the motor continuously, e.g. when lowering hoisting gear.
Function
The I-max controller influences the output frequency and the motor voltage.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during acceleration, the I-max controller extends
the acceleration operation.
If the load of the motor is so large during stationary operation that the motor current reaches
the current limit, the I-max controller reduces the speed and the motor voltage until the motor
current is in the permissible range again.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during deceleration, the I-max controller extends
the deceleration operation.
Settings
You only have to change the factory settings of the I-max controller if the drive tends to
oscillate when it reaches the current limit or if it is shut down due to overcurrent.
Table 6- 38 I-max controller parameters
p0305 Rated motor current
p0640 Motor current limit
p1340 Proportional gain of the I-max controller for speed reduction
p1341 Integral time of the I-max controller for speed reduction
r0056.13 Status: I-max controller active
r1343 Speed output of the I-max controller
Shows the amount to which the I-max controller reduces the speed.
For more information about this function, see function diagram 6300 in the List Manual.

6.6.5 Limiting the maximum DC link voltage
How does the motor generate overvoltage?

An induction motor operates as a generator if it is driven by the connected load. A generator
converts mechanical energy into electrical energy. The electrical energy flows back into the
inverter. If the inverter cannot dissipate the electrical energy, for example in a braking
resistor, then the DC link voltage Vdc increases in the inverter.
Above a critical DC-link voltage both the inverter and the motor will be damaged. Before the
voltage can reach critical levels, however, the inverter switches the motor off with the fault
message "DC-link overvoltage".
Protecting the motor and inverter against overvoltage

The Vdc_max control avoids an excessively high DC link voltage, assuming that the
application permits this. The Vdc_max control increases the ramp-down time of the motor
when braking, so that the motor feeds back only as little energy to the inverter as is covered
by the losses in the inverter.
The Vdc_max control is not suitable for applications where the motor is continuously in the
generator mode. This includes, for example, cranes or applications involving braking large
moments of inertia. Further information on inverter braking methods can be found in Section
Electrically braking the motor (Page 256).
The Vdc_max control is only possible with the PM230, PM240, PM240-2 and PM340 Power
Modules. The Vdc_max control is not required if you use a braking resistor.
PM250 Power Modules feed back regenerative energy into the line supply. Therefore, the
Vdc_max control is not required for a PM250 Power Module.

Parameters of the Vdc_max control

The parameters differ depending on the motor control mode.
Parameter for Parameter for Description

V/f control vector control
p1280 = 1 p1240 = 1 Vdc controller configuration(Factory setting: 1)
1: Vdc controller is enabled
r1282 r1242 Vdc_max control activation level
DC link voltage value above which the Vdc_max control is acti-
vated
p1283 p1243 Vdc_max control dynamic factor (factory setting: 100 %)
Scaling control parameters p1290, p1291 and p1292
p1284 --- Vdc_max controller time threshold
Setting the monitoring time of the Vdc_max controller.
p1290 p1250 Vdc_max control proportional gain (factory setting: 1)
p1291 p1251 Vdc_max control integral time (factory setting p1291: 40 ms,
p1251: 0 ms)
p1292 p1252 Vdc_max control rate time (factory setting p1292: 10 ms, p1252:
0 ms)
p1294 p1254 Vdc_max control automatic ON level sensing(Factory setting,
dependent on the Power Module)
Automatically sense switch-on levels of the Vdc_max control.
0: Automatic detection disabled
1: Automatic detection enabled
p0210 p0210 Unit supply voltage
If p1254 or p1294 = 0, the inverter uses this parameter to calcu-
late the switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max control.
Set this parameter to the actual value of the input voltage.
For more information about this function, see the List Manual (function diagrams 6320 and
6220).

6.7 Application-specific functions

The inverter offers a series of functions that you can use depending on your particular
application, e.g.:
● Switching over units
● Braking functions
● Automatic restart and flying restart
● Basic process control functions
● Logical and arithmetic functions using function blocks that can be freely interconnected
● Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines
Refer to the following sections for detailed descriptions.
6.7.1 Unit changeover
Description
Using the unit switchover function, you can switch over parameters and process variables for
input and output to an appropriate system of units: US units, SI units or relative variables as
a %.
Independent of this, you can define the units for process variables or change over to
percentage values.
Specifically, you have the following options:
● Changing over the motor standard (Page 250) IEC/NEMA
● Changing over the unit system (Page 251)
● Changing over process variables for the technology controller (Page 251)
The motor standard, the unit system as well as the process variables can only be changed
offline.
Restrictions for the unit changeover function

● The values on the rating plate of the inverter or motor cannot be displayed as percentage
values.
● Using the unit changeover function several times (for example, percent → physical unit 1
→ physical unit 2 → percent) may lead to the original value being changed by one decimal
place as a result of rounding errors.
● If the unit is changed over into percent and the reference value is then changed, the
percentage values relate to the new reference value.
Example:
– For a reference speed of 1500 rpm, a fixed speed of 80% corresponds to a speed of
1200 rpm.
– If the reference speed is changed to 3000 rpm, then the value of 80% is kept and now
means 2400 rpm.

Reference variables for unit changeover

p2000 Reference frequency/speed
p2001 Reference voltage
p2002 Reference current
p2003 Reference torque
r2004 Reference power
p2005 Reference angle
p2006 Reference temperature
6.7.1.1 Changing over the motor standard

You change over the motor standard using p0100. The following applies:
● p0100 = 0: IEC motor (50 Hz, SI units)
● p0100 = 1: NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units)
● p0100 = 2: NEMA motor (60 Hz, SI units)
The parameters listed below are affected by the changeover.
Table 6- 39 Variables affected by changing over the motor standard
P no. Designation Unit for p0100 =

0*) 1 2
r0206 Power Module rated power kW HP kW
p0307 Rated motor power kW HP kW
p0316 Motor torque constant Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A
r0333 Rated motor torque Nm lbf ft Nm
p0341 Motor moment of inertia kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2
p0344 Motor weight (for thermal motor type) kg Lb kg
r1969 Speed_cont_opt moment of inertia determined kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2
*) Factory setting

6.7.1.2 Changing over the unit system

You change over the unit system using p0505. The following selection options are available:
● p0505 = 1: SI units (factory setting)
● p0505 = 2: SI units or % relative to SI units
● p0505 = 3: US units
● p0505 = 4: US units or % relative to US units
Note
Special features
The percentage values for p0505 = 2 and for p0505 = 4 are identical. For internal
calculation and for the output of physical variables, it is, however, important whether the
conversion is made to SI or US units.
In the case of variables for which changeover to % is not possible, the following applies:
p0505 = 1 ≙ p0505 = 2 and p0505 = 3 ≙ p0505 = 4.
In the case of variables whose units are identical in the SI system and US system, and
which can be displayed as a percentage, the following applies:
p0505 = 1 ≙ p0505 = 3 and p0505 = 2 ≙ p0505 = 4.
Parameters affected by changeover
The parameters affected by changing over the unit system are grouped according to unit.
An overview of the unit groups and the possible units can be found in the List Manual in
the Section "Unit group and unit selection".
6.7.1.3 Changing over process variables for the technology controller
Note
We recommend that the units and reference values of the technology controller are
coordinated and harmonized with one another during commissioning.
Subsequent modification in the reference variable or the unit can result in incorrect
calculations or displays.
Changing over process variables of the technology controller

You change over the process variables of the technology controller using p0595. For
physical values, you define the reference variable in p0596.
The parameters affected by changing over units of the technology controller belong to unit
group 9_1. For details, please refer to the section titled "Unit group and unit choice" in the
List Manual.

6.7.1.4 Switching units with STARTER
Precondition
The inverter must be in the offline mode in order to change over the units.
STARTER shows whether you change settings online in the inverter or change offline in the
PC ( / ).
You switch over the mode using the adjacent

buttons in the menu bar.
Procedure
To change over the units with STARTER, proceed as follows:
1. Select the configuration
2. Go to the "Units" tab in the configuration screen form to change over the units
3. Changing over the system of units
4. Select process variables of the technology controller
5. Adapting to the line supply

6. Save your set-

tings.
7. Go online.
The inverter
signals that
offline, other
units and pro-
cess variables
are set than in
the inverter
itself.
8. Accept these
settings in the
inverter.
You have changed over the units.

6.7.2 Calculating the energy saving
Background
Fluid flow machines, which mechnically control the flow rate using valves or throttle flaps,
operate with a constant speed corresponding to the line frequency. The lower the flow rate,
the poorer the system efficiency. The machine has the poorest efficiency when the valve or
throttle flaps are completely closed. Further, undesirable effects can occur, for example the
formation of vapor bubbles in liquids (cavitation) or the temperature of the medium being
pumped can increase.
The converter controls the flow rate by appropriately varying the speed of the fluid flow
machine. As a consequence, the fluid flow machine has the optimum efficiency for each flow
rate, and draws less electric power in the partial load range than for closed-loop control
concepts based on valves and throttle flaps.
Function
The converter calculates the energy
saving from the flow characteristic
associated with a mechanical flow
control and the measured electric
power that is drawn.
The calculation is suitable for centrif-
ugal pumps, fans, radial and axial
compressors, for instance.

p3320 … Flow characteristic
p3329
Factory setting of the flow characteristic
To set the characteristic, you require the following data from the machine manufactur-
er for each speed interpolation point:
• The flow rate of the fluid-flow machine associated with the 5 selected converter
speeds
• The power drawn at constant speed associated with the five flow rates corre-
sponds to the line frequency and mechanical throttling of the flow rate.
r0039 Energy display [kWh]
[0] Energy balance
Energy usage since the last reset
[1] Energy drawn since the last reset
[2] Energy fed back since the last reset
p0040 Reset energy consumption display
A signal change 0 → 1 sets r0039[0…2] = 0, r0041 = 0 and r0042 = 0.
r0041 Energy consumption saved (kWh)
Energy saved referred to 100 operating hours.
For less than 100 operating hours, the inverter interpolates the energy saving to 100
operating hours.
r0042 CO: Process energy display [1 ≙ 1 Wh]
For display as process variable. Enable with p0043.
[0] Energy balance
Energy consumption since the last reset.
[1] Energy drawn since the last reset
[2] Energy fed back since the last reset.
p0043 BI: Enable energy usage display
1 signal: Process energy display is active in r0042.

6.7.3 Electrically braking the motor
Braking with the motor in generating mode

If the motor brakes the connected load electrically, it will convert the kinetic energy of the
motor to electrical energy. The electrical energy E released on braking the load is
proportional to the moment of inertia J of the motor and load and to the square of the speed
n. The motor attempts to pass the energy on to the inverter.
Main features of the braking functions

DC braking
DC braking prevents the motor from transferring braking energy
to the inverter. The inverter impresses a DC current into the mo-
tor, therefore braking the motor. The motor converts braking
energy E of the load into heat.
• Advantage: The motor brakes the load without the inverter
having to process regenerative power.
• Disadvantages: significant increase in the motor temperature;
no defined braking characteristics; no constant braking
torque; no braking torque at standstill; braking energy is lost
as heat; does not function when the power fails
Compound braking
One version of DC braking. The inverter brakes the motor with a
defined ramp-down time and superimposes a DC current on the
output current.
Dynamic braking
Using a braking resistor, the inverter converts the electrical en-
ergy into heat.
• Advantages: defined braking response; motor temperature
does not increase any further; constant braking torque
• Disadvantages: Braking resistor required; braking energy E is
lost in the form of heat

Braking with regenerative feedback into the line supply

The inverter feeds electrical energy back into the line supply
(energy recovery).
• Advantages: Constant braking torque; the braking energy is
not completely converted into heat, but regenerated into the
line supply; is suitable for all applications; continuous
regenerative operation is possible - e.g. when lowering a
suspended load
• Disadvantage: Does not function for a power failure
Which Power Module permits which braking technique?
Electrical braking methods Power Modules that can be used

DC braking, compound braking PM240, PM340
Dynamic braking PM240, PM340
Braking with regenerative feedback into the line supply PM250, PM260
6.7.3.1 DC braking
DC braking is used for applications without regenerative feedback into the line supply, where
the motor can be more quickly braked by impressing a DC current than along a braking
ramp.
Typical applications for DC braking include:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
● Grinding machines
● Conveyor belts
Function
NOTICE
Motor damage caused by overheating
The motor can overheat if it is braked for long periods of time or frequently using DC
braking. This may damage the motor.
• Monitor the motor temperature.
• If the motor gets too hot during operation you must select another braking method or
give the motor more time to cool down.

With DC braking, the inverter outputs an internal OFF2 command for the time that it takes to
de-energize the motor p0347 - and then impresses the braking current for the duration of the
DC braking.
The DC-braking function is possible only for induction motors.
DC braking when falling below a start speed DC braking when a fault occurs
Precondition: p1230 = 1 and p1231 = 14 Precondition: Fault number and fault response
are assigned using p2100 and p2101
DC braking initiated using a control command DC braking when switching off the motor
Precondition: p1231 = 4 and p1230 = control Precondition: p1231 = 5 or p1230 = 1 and p1231
command, e.g. p1230 = 722.3 (control command = 14
via DI 3)
DC braking when falling below a starting speed

1. The motor speed has exceeded the starting speed.
2. The inverter activates the DC braking as soon as the motor speed falls below the starting
speed.
DC braking when a fault occurs

1. A fault occurs, which initiates DC braking as response.
2. The motor brakes along the down ramp to the speed for the start of DC braking.
3. DC braking starts.
DC braking initiated by a control command

1. The higher-level control issues the command for DC braking, e.g. using DI3: p1230 =
722.3.

If the higher-level control withdraws the command during DC braking, the inverter interrupts
DC braking and the motor accelerates to its setpoint.
DC braking when the motor is switched off

1. The higher-level control switches off the motor (OFF1 or OFF3).
2. The motor brakes along the down ramp to the speed for the start of DC braking.
Settings for DC braking
p0347 Motor de-excitation time (calculated after the basic commissioning)
The inverter can trip due to an overcurrent during DC braking if the de-excitation time is
too short.
p1230 DC braking activation (factory setting: 0)
Signal source to activate DC braking
• 0 signal: Deactivated
• 1 signal: Active
p1231 Configuring DC braking (factory setting: 0)
0 No DC braking
4 General release for DC braking
5 DC braking for OFF1/OFF3
14 DC braking below the starting speed
p1232 DC braking braking current (factory setting 0 A)
p1233 DC braking duration (factory setting 1 s)
p1234 DC braking start speed (factory setting 210000 rpm)
r1239 DC braking status word
.08 DC braking active
.10 DC braking ready
.11 DC braking selected
.12 DC braking selection internally locked
.13 DC braking for OFF1/OFF3

Table 6- 40 Configuring DC braking as a response to faults
p2100 Set fault number for fault response (factory setting 0)
Enter the fault number for which DC braking should be activated, e.g. p2100[3] = 7860
(external fault 1).
p2101 = 6 Fault response setting (factory setting 0)
Assigning the fault response: p2101[3] = 6.
The fault is assigned an index of p2100. Assign the same index of p2100 or p2101 to the fault and
fault response.
The inverter's List Manual lists in the "Faults and alarms" list the possible fault responses for every
fault. The "DCBRAKE" entry means that it is permissible to set DC braking as response for this par-
ticular fault.
6.7.3.2 Compound braking

Typical applications for compound braking include:
● Centrifuges
● Saws
● Grinding machines
● Horizontal conveyors
For these applications, the motor is normally operated with a constant speed, and is only
braked down to standstill after longer periods of time.
Principle of operation
Figure 6-43 Motor brakes with and without active compound braking

Compound braking prevents the DC-link voltage increasing above a critical value. The
inverter activates compound braking depending on the DC-link voltage. Above a DC-link
voltage threshold (r1282), the inverter adds a DC current to the motor current. The DC
current brakes the motor and prevents an excessive increase in the DC-link voltage.
Note
Compound braking is possible only with the U/f control.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
• The "flying restart" function is active
• DC braking is active
• Vector control is selected
Setting and enabling compound braking
p3856 Compound braking current (%)
With the compound braking current, the magnitude of the DC current is defined, which
is additionally generated when stopping the motor for operation with U/f control to in-
crease the braking effect.
p3856 = 0
Compound braking locked
p3856 = 1 … 250
Current level of the DC braking current as a % of the rated motor current (p0305)
Recommendation: p3856 < 100% × (r0209 - r0331) / p0305 / 2
r3859.0 Compound-braking status word
r3859.0 = 1: Compound braking is active
NOTICE
Motor damage from overheating with compound braking
The motor will overheat if braking lasts too long or the motor is braked too often. This may
damage the motor.
Monitor the motor temperature. If the motor gets too hot during operation you must select
another braking method or give the motor more time to cool down.

6.7.3.3 Dynamic braking

Typical applications for dynamic braking include:
● Horizontal conveyors
● Vertical and inclined conveyors
● Hoisting gear
For these applications, dynamic motor behavior with different speeds or continuous change
of direction is required.
CAUTION
Burns when touching a hot braking resistor
A braking resistor reaches high temperatures during operation. Touching the braking
resistor may result in burns.
• Do not touch a braking resistor during operation.
The inverter controls the braking chopper depending on its DC-link voltage. The DC-link
voltage increases as soon as the inverter absorbs the regenerative power when braking the
motor. The braking chopper converts this power into heat in the braking resistor. This
prevents the DC-link voltage from increasing above the limit value UDC link, max .
Figure 6-44 Simplified representation of dynamic braking with respect to time

Set dynamic braking
p0219 Braking power of the braking resistor (factory setting: 0 kW)
Set the braking power of the braking resistor.
Example: In your particular application, the motor brakes every 10 seconds. In so doing,
the braking resistor must handle a braking power of 1 kW for 2 s. Use a braking resistor
with a continuous rating of 1 kW × 2 s / 10 s = 0.2 kW, and set the maximum braking
power to: p0219 = 1 (kW).
Under certain circumstances, for low braking power ratings, the inverter extends the
ramp-down time of the motor.
For p0219 > 0, the inverter deactivates the VDC_max controller.
p0844 No coast down/coast down (OFF2) signal source 1
p0844 = 722.x Monitor the overtemperature of the braking resistor with digital input x
of the inverter.
6.7.3.4 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line

The typical applications for braking with energy recovery (regenerative feedback into the line
supply) are as follows:
● Hoist drives
● Centrifuges
● Unwinders
For these applications, the motor must brake for longer periods of time.
The inverter can feed back up to 100% of its rated power into the line supply (referred to
"High Overload" base load, see section Technical data, PM250 (Page 422)).
Setting the braking with regenerative feedback to the line
Limiting the regenerative feedback for U/f control (p1300 < 20)
p0640 Motor series overload factor (factory setting: 0.00 A, default for basic commissioning)
It is only possible to limit the regenerative power with V/f control by limiting the motor
current.
If the current exceeds this value for longer than 10 s, the inverter shuts down the motor
with fault F07806.
Limiting feedback with vector control (p1300 ≥ 20)
p1531 Power limit, generating (factory setting: -0.01 kW)
The inverter calculates the parameter based on the basic commissioning or with p0340
= 5.

6.7.4 Motor holding brake

The motor holding brake holds the motor in position when it is switched off. If the setting is
correct, the motor will produce an electrical holding torque before the inverter opens the
brake. The inverter does not close the motor holding brake until the motor is at a standstill.
Function
Figure 6-45 Motor holding brake function
Function after an ON command:

1. With the ON command, the inverter switches the motor on.
2. At the end of the "motor excitation build-up time" (p0346), the inverter issues the
command to open the brake.
3. The inverter keeps the motor at a standstill until the "motor holding brake opening time"
p1216 has ended.
The motor holding brake must be opened within time p1216.
4. The inverter accelerates the motor to the speed setpoint.
Function after an OFF1 or OFF3 command:

1. The inverter brakes the motor down to a standstill and switches it off using the OFF1 or
OFF3 command.
2. When braking, the inverter compares the speed setpoint and the actual speed with the
"standstill detection speed threshold" p1226:
– Speed setpoint < p1226: The "standstill detection monitoring time" p1227 starts
– Current speed < p1226: The "pulse cancellation deceleration time" p1228 starts

3. When the first of the two times (p1227 or p1228) has elapsed, the inverter issues the
command to close the brake.
4. After the "motor holding brake closing time" p1217, the inverter switches off the motor.
The motor holding brake must close within the time p1217.
Function after an OFF2 command
Figure 6-46 Controlling the motor holding brake after OFF2
After an OFF2 command, the inverter issues the signal to immediately close the motor
holding brake, irrespective of the motor speed.
Commissioning a motor holding brake
DANGER
Danger to life due to falling loads
For applications such as lifting equipment, cranes or elevators, there is a danger to life if
the "Motor holding brake" function is incorrectly set.
• When commissioning the "Motor holding brake" function, secure any dangerous loads,
e.g. by applying the following measures:
– Lower the load down to the floor
– Cordon off the hazardous area so that nobody can enter it
Precondition
The motor holding brake is connected to the inverter.

Procedure
To commission the "motor holding brake" function, proceed as follows:
1. Set p1215 = 1.
The "Motor holding brake" function" is enabled.
2. Check the magnetizing time p0346; the magnetizing time is pre-assigned during
commissioning and must be greater than zero.
3. Find out the mechanical opening and closing times from the technical data of the motor
holding brake.
– Depending on the brake size, brake opening times lie between 25 ms and 500 ms.
– Depending on the brake size, brake closing times lie between 15 ms and 300 ms.
4. Set the following parameters in the inverter suitably for the mechanical opening and
closing times of the motor holding brake:
– p1216 > mechanical opening time of the motor holding brake
– p1217 > mechanical closing time of the motor holding brake
6. Check the acceleration behavior of the drive immediately after the motor has been
switched on:
– If the motor holding brake opens too late, the inverter will accelerate the motor
suddenly against the closed motor holding brake.
Set p1216 larger.
– If the motor waits too long before accelerating after the motor holding brake has
opened, reduce p1216.
7. If the load sags after switching on the motor, then you must increase the motor torque
when opening the motor holding brake. Depending on the control mode, you must set
different parameters:
– U/f operation (p1300 = 0 to 3):
Increase p1310 in small steps.
– Vector control (p1300 ≥ 20):
9. Check the behavior of the drive immediately after the motor has been switched off:
– If the motor holding brake closes too late, the load briefly sags before the motor
holding brake closes.
Set a larger value for p1217.
– If the motor waits too long before switching off after the motor holding brake has
closed, reduce p1217.
You have commissioned the "Motor holding brake" function.

Table 6- 41 Setting the control logic of the motor holding brake
p1215 = 1 Enable motor holding brake
0 Motor holding brake locked (factory setting)
1 Motor holding brake just like the sequence control
2: Motor holding brake permanently open
3: Motor holding brake just like the sequential control, connected via BICO
p1216 Motor holding brake opening time (factory setting 0.1 s)
p1216 > braking signal relay runtimes + brake release time
p1217 Motor holding brake closing time (factory setting 0.1 s)
p1217 > braking signal relay runtimes + brake closing time
r0052.12 "Open motor holding brake" command
Table 6- 42 Advanced settings
p0346 Magnetizing time (factory setting 0 s)
During this time the induction motor is magnetized. The inverter calculates this pa-
rameter using p0340 = 1 or 3.
p0855 Open motor holding brake (imperative) (factory setting 0)
p0858 Close motor holding brake (imperative) (factory setting 0)
p1226 Stationary state detection speed threshold (factory setting 20 rpm)
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the speed falls below this threshold, stand-
still is detected and the monitoring time p1227 or p1228 is started
p1227 Stationary state detection monitoring time (factory setting 300 s)
p1228 Pulse deletion delay time (factory setting 0.01 s)
p1351 Starting frequency, motor holding brake (factory setting 0%)
Setting the frequency set value at the slip compensation output when starting with
motor holding brake.
When the parameter p1351 is set to > 0, slip compensation is automatically switched
on.
p1352 Starting frequency for motor holding brake (factory setting 1351)
Setting the signal source for the frequency set value at the slip compensation output
when starting with motor holding brake.
p1475 Speed controller torque set value for motor holding brake (factory setting 0)
Setting the signal source for the torque set value when starting with motor holding
brake.

6.7.5 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running

If you switch on the motor while it is still rotating, without the "Flying restart" function, there is
a high probability that a fault will occur as a result of overcurrent (F30001 or F07801).
Examples of applications involving an unintentionally rotating motor directly before switching
on:
● The motor rotates after a brief line interruption.
● A flow of air turns the fan impeller.
● A load with a high moment of inertia drives the motor.
The "Flying restart" function comprises the following steps:
1. After the on command, the inverter impresses the search current in the motor and
increases the output frequency.
2. When the output frequency reaches the actual motor speed, the inverter waits for the
motor excitation build up time.
3. The inverter accelerates the motor to the actual speed setpoint.
Figure 6-47 Principle of operation of the "flying restart" function
Setting "flying restart" function
p1200 Flying restart operating mode (factory setting: 0)
0 Flying restart is disabled
1 Flying restart is enabled, search for the motor in both directions, start in the direc-
tion of the setpoint
4 Flying restart is enabled, search for the motor only in the direction of the setpoint
No "Flying restart" function for group drives

It is not permissible that you enable the "Flying restart" function if the inverter is
simultaneously driving several motors.
Exception: a mechanical coupling ensures that all of the motors always operate with the
same speed.

Table 6- 43 Advanced settings
p0346 Motor excitation build up time
Wait time between switching on the motor and enabling the ramp-function generator.
p0347 Motor de-excitation time
Within the motor de-excitation time, after an OFF command, the inverter prevents the
induction motor from being switched on again.
When using a reluctance motor, the inverter ignores the motor de-excitation time.
p1201 Flying restart enable signal source (factory setting: 1)
Defines a control command, e.g. a digital input, which enables the flying restart function.
p1202 Flying restart search current (Factory setting depends on the Power Module)
Defines the search current with respect to the magnetizing current (r0331), which flows
in the motor during the flying restart.
p1203 Flying restart search current factor (Factory setting depends on the Power Module)
The value influences the speed with which the output frequency is changed during the
flying restart. A higher value results in a longer search time.
If the inverter does not find the motor, reduce the search speed (increase p1203).

6.7.6 Automatic switch-on

The automatic restart includes two different functions:
● The inverter automatically acknowledges faults.
● After a fault occurs or after a power failure, the inverter automatically switches-on the
motor again.
The inverter interprets the following events as power failure:
● The inverter signals fault F30003 (DC-link undervoltage), as the line supply voltage of the
inverter has briefly failed.
● The inverter power supply has failed for a long enough time so that the inverter has been
switched-off.
WARNING
Danger to life as a result of machine parts unexpectedly starting
When the "automatic restart" function is active (p1210 > 1), the motor automatically
starts after a power failure. Unexpected movement of machine parts can result in
serious injury and material damage.
• Block off hazardous areas within the machine to prevent inadvertent access.
Setting the automatic restart function

If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power failure or
after a fault, then in addition, you must activate the "flying restart" function, see Flying restart
– switching on while the motor is running (Page 268).
Using p1210, select the automatic restart mode that best suits your application.
Figure 6-48 Automatic restart modes

The principle of operation of the other parameters is explained in the following diagram and
in the table below.
1) The inverter automatically acknowledges faults under the following conditions:

• p1210 = 1 or 26: Always.
• p1210 = 4 or 6: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or via the
fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
• p1210 = 14 or 16: Never.
2) The inverter attempts to automatically switch the motor on under the following conditions:
• p1210 = 1: Never.
• p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, or 26: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input
or via the fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
3) If,
after a flying restart and magnetization (r0056.4 = 1) no fault occurs within one second, then the
start attempt was successful.
Figure 6-49 Time response of the automatic restart
Parameter for setting the automatic restart
p1210 Automatic restart mode (factory setting: 0)
0: Disable automatic restart.
1: Acknowledge all faults without restarting.
4: Restart after power failure without further restart attempts.
6: Restart after fault with further restart attempts.
14: Restart after power failure after manual acknowledgement.
16: Restart after fault after manual acknowledgement.
26: Acknowledgement of all faults and restart with ON/OFF1 = 1 command.

p1211 Automatic restart start attempts (factory setting: 3)
This parameter is only effective for the settings p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, 26.
You define the maximum number of start attempts using p1211. After each successful
acknowledgement, the inverter decrements its internal counter of start attempts by 1.
p1211 = 0 or 1: The inverter only tries to start once. After an unsuccessful start attempt,
the inverter issues fault F07320.
p1211 = n, n > 1: The inverter tries to start n-times The inverter outputs fault F07320 if
the nth starting attempt was unsuccessful.
The inverter sets the start attempt counter back again to the value of p1211, if one of
the following conditions is fulfilled:
• After a successful start attempt, the time in p1213[1] has expired.
• After fault F07320, switch off the motor (OFF1) and acknowledge the fault.
• You change the start value p1211 or the mode p1210.
p1212 Automatic restart wait time start attempt (factory setting: 1.0 s)
This parameter is only effective for the settings p1210 = 4, 6, 26.
Examples for setting this parameter:
1. After a power failure, a certain time must elapse before the motor can be switched-
on, e.g. because other machine components are not immediately ready. In this case,
set p1212 longer than the time, after which all of the fault causes have been re-
moved.
2. In operation, the inverter develops a fault condition. The lower you select p1212,
then the sooner the inverter attempts to switch-on the motor again.
p1213[0] Automatic restart monitoring time
for restart (factory setting: 60 s)
With this monitoring function, you limit the time in which the inverter may attempt to
automatically switch-on the motor again.
The monitoring function starts when a fault is identified and ends with a successful start
attempt. If the motor has not successfully started after the monitoring time has expired,
fault F07320 is signaled.
Set the monitoring time longer than the sum of the following times:
+ p1212
+ Time that the inverter requires to start the motor on the fly.
+ Motor magnetizing time (p0346)
+ 1 second
You deactivate the monitoring function with p1213 = 0.
p1213[1] Automatic restart monitoring time
to reset the fault counter (factory setting: 0 s)
Using this monitoring time, you prevent that faults, which continually occur within a
certain time period, are automatically acknowledged each time.
The monitoring function starts with a successful start attempt and ends after the moni-
toring time has expired.
If, during the monitoring time p1213[1], the inverter made more successful starting at-
tempts than defined in p1211, the inverter interrupts the automatic restart function and
signals fault F07320. To switch on the motor again you must acknowledge the fault and
switch on the inverter (ON/OFFS1 = 1).
Additional information is provided in the parameter list of the List Manual.

Advanced settings
If you with to suppress the automatic restart function for certain faults, then you must enter
the appropriate fault numbers in p1206[0 … 9].
Example: p1206[0] = 07331 ⇒ No restart for fault F07331.
Suppressing the automatic restart only functions for the setting p1210 = 6, 16 or 26.
WARNING
Danger to life if an OFF command has no effect.
When the inverter is only controlled via the fieldbus interface, the motor restarts with the
setting p1210 = 6, 16, 26 – even if the communication link is currently interrupted. When
communication is interrupted, the control system cannot switch off the motor.
• Enter the fault number of the communication error in parameter p1206.
Example:
Fault number F01910 means: Communication via PROFIBUS failed.
Set p1206[n] = 1910 (n = 0 … 9).

6.7.7 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control)

Kinetic buffering increases the drive availability. The kinetic buffering utilizes the kinetic
energy of the load to buffer line dips and failures. During a line dip, the inverter keeps the
motor in the switched-on state for as long as possible. One second is a typical, maximum
buffer time.
Preconditions
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled to practically use the "kinetic buffering" function:
● The driven load has a sufficiently high inertia.
● The application allows a motor to be braked during a power failure.
Function
When the line supply dips or is interrupted, the DC link voltage in the inverter decreases. At
an adjustable threshold, kinetic buffering intervenes (VDC min control). The VDC min control
forces the load to go into slightly regenerative operation. As a consequence, the inverter
covers its power loss and the losses in the motor with the kinetic energy of the load. The
load speed decreases; however, during kinetic buffering, the DC voltage remains constant.
After the line supply returns, the inverter immediately resumes normal operation.
Figure 6-50 Principle mode of operation of kinetic buffering

r0056.15 Status word closed-loop control
0 signal VDC min controller is not active
1 signal VDC min controller is active (kinetic buffering)
p0210 Device supply voltage (factory setting: 400 V)
p1240 VDC controller configuration (factory setting: 1)
0 Inhibit VDC controller
1 Enable VDC max controller
2 Enable VDC min controller (kinetic buffering)
3 Enable VDC min controller and VDC max controller
p1245 VDC min controller activation level (kinetic buffering) (factory setting: 76 %)
r1246 VDC min controller activation level[V]
r1246 = p1245 × √2 × p0210
p1247 VDC min controller dynamic factor (factory setting: 300 %)
p1255 VDC min controller time threshold (factory setting: 0 s)
Maximum duration of the kinetic buffering If kinetic buffering lasts longer than that
specified in the parameter value, the inverter outputs fault F7406.
A value of 0 deactivates the monitoring.
p1257 VDC min controller speed threshold (factory setting: 50 rpm)
When fallen below, the inverter outputs fault F7405.

6.7.8 Line contactor control

The line contactor control is used to switch on and switch off the power supply voltage for the
inverter via a digital output of the inverter. Precondition is an external 24 V power supply for
the inverter CU.
You can monitor when the line contactor opens and closes using the feedback signal contact
of the contactor.
The function has the advantage that you only switch on the line voltage for the inverter briefly
before the motor must be switched on. If the motor is switched off, after an adjustable wait
time, the line voltage for the inverter is switched off again.
This means that you reduce the inverter losses for the times when the motor is not
operational.
Activate line contactor control

You activate the line contactor control by interconnecting the signal source of a digital output
of the inverter (depending on the particular inverter, p0730 … p0741) with the signal to
control the line contactor (r0863.1). For example: p0732 = 863.1.
Line contactor control without monitoring - factory setting:

In the factory setting, the function for a line contactor without feedback signal contact is set.
The feedback signal is linked with the signal to control the line contactor: p0860 = 863.1.
For an OFF1, the line contactor opens after the delay time setting in p0867.
Line contactor control with monitoring:

If you use a line contactor with feedback signal contact, activate the feedback signal by
linking the parameter for the feedback signal - p0860 -with the inverted signal of a digital
input: p0860 = 723.x.
If monitoring is active, when switching off or switching on, message F07300 is output, if, after
the time set in p0861 no feedback signal is received via r723.x.
In addition for inverters with STO: Sequence control via p0869
Using p0869, you set whether the line contactor immediately opens for an STO signal, or
only after the time set in p0867 has expired.

Figure 6-51 Line contactor control with monitoring
Parameter to set the line contactor control
p0860 Line contactor feedback signal
• p0860 = 863.1: No feedback signal
• p0860 = 723.x: Feedback signal via DIx
p0861 Line contactor monitoring time (Factory setting: 100 ms)
Fault F07300 is output if, for an activated feedback signal, no feedback signal is re-
ceived via the selected digital input after the time set here has expired.
r0863.1 Drive coupling status/control word
Bit to activate the line contactor control: Assign 863.1 to DO x,
Example: Control line contactor via digital output DO 2: p0732 = 863.1
p0867 Main contactor holding time after OFF1 (Factory setting: 50 ms)
Time where, after an OFF1, the main contactor remains closed.
p0869 Sequence control configuration
• p0689 = 0: Line contactor opens immediately for an STO
• p0689 = 1: For an STO, the line contactor opens after the time set in p0867 has
expired

6.7.9 PID technology controller
6.7.9.1 Overview
The technology controller controls process variables, e.g. pressure, temperature, level or
flow.
Figure 6-52 Example: Technology controller as a level controller

6.7.9.2 Setting the controller
Simplified representation of the technology controller

The technology controller is implemented as a PID controller (controller with proportional,
integral, and derivative action).
① The inverter uses the start value when all the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
• The technology controller supplies the main setpoint (p2251 = 0).
• The ramp-function generator output of the technology controller has not yet reached the start value.
Figure 6-53 Simplified representation of the technology controller
The settings required as a minimum are marked in gray in the function diagram: Interconnect
setpoint and actual values with signals of your choice, set the ramp-function generator and
controller parameters KP, TI and Td.
You will find information on the following PID controller topics in the Internet at: FAQ
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/92556266)
● Setpoint value specification: Analog value or fixed setpoint
● Setpoint channel: Scaling, ramp-function generator and filter
● Actual value channel: Filter, limiting and signal processing
● PID controller Principle of operation of the D component, inhibiting the I component and
the control sense
● Enable, limiting the controller output and fault response

Setting the technology controller
Parameter Remark
p2200 BI: Technology controller enable (factory setting: 0)
1 signal: Technology controller is enabled.
r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal
To interconnect the main speed setpoint with the technology controller output, set
p1070 = 2294.
p2253 CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 (factory setting: 0)
Setpoint for the technology controller.
Example:
p2253 = 2224: The inverter interconnects the fixed setpoint p2201 with the setpoint
of the technology controller.
p2220 = 1: The fixed setpoint p2201 is selected.
p2264 CI: Technology controller actual value (factory setting: 0)
Technology controller actual value.
p2257, p2258 Technology controller ramp-up time and ramp-down time (factory setting: 1 s)
p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant Td (factory setting: 0.0 s)
The differentiation improves the rise time for very slow controlled variables, e.g. a
temperature control.
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain KP (factory setting: 1,0)
p2285 Technology controller integration time (integral time) Td (factory setting: 30 s)
Advanced settings
Parameter Remark
Limiting the output of the technology controller
In the factory setting, the output of the technology controller is limited to ± maximum speed. You must
change this limit, depending on your particular application.
Example: The output of the technology controller supplies the speed setpoint for a pump. The pump
should only run in the positive direction.
p2297 CI: Technology controller maximum limiting signal source (factory setting: 1084)
p2298 CI: Technology controller minimum limiting signal source (factory setting: 2292)
p2291 CO: Technology maximum limiting (factory setting: 100 %)
p2292 CO: Technology minimum limiting (factory setting: 0 %)
Manipulating the actual value of the technology controller
p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value (factory setting: 100 %)
p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value (factory setting: -100 %)
p2269 Technology controller gain actual value (factory setting: 100 %)
p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type)
0: No inversion
1: Inversion actual value signal
If the actual value decreases with increasing motor speed, then p2271 must
be set = 1.

Parameter Remark
p2270 Technology controller actual value function
0: No function
1: √
2: x2
3: x3
For further information refer to the function block diagrams 7950 ff of the List Manual.
Autotuning of the PID controller
Requirements
The PID technology controller must be set the same as when used in subsequent operation:
● The actual value is interconnected.
● Scalings, filter and ramp-function generator have been set.
● The PID technology controller has been enabled (p2200 = 1 signal)
Procedure
Proceed as follows to auto tune the PID controller:
1. Set p2350 to a value of your choice.
2. Set offset p2355. The slower the controlled variable responds, the higher p2350 must be.
The inverter signals Alarm A07444.
4. Wait until alarm A07444 goes away.
The inverter has recalculated parameters p2280, p2274 and p2285.
If the inverter signals fault F07445, then increase p2354 and repeat the autotuning.
5. Back up the calculated values so that they are protected against power failure, e.g. using
the BOP-2: OPTIONS → RAM-ROM.
You have auto tuned the PID controller.

Parameter Remark
p2350 PID Autotune Enable (Factory setting: 0)
0: No function
1: Autotuning based on the “Ziegler Nichols” tech-
nique. The controlled variable follows the set-
point relatively quickly after a step-like setpoint
change, however with some overshoot.
2: Faster controller setting than setting 1, with a

higher overshoot of the controlled variable.
3: Slower controller setting then setting 1. Over-

shoot of the controlled variable is, to a large
extent, avoided.
4: The autotuning only optimizes the P and I com-

ponent of the PID controller.
p2354 PID tuning timeout length (Factory setting: 240 s)

Max. wait time until the autotuning must have identified the control loop oscillating.
p2355 PID tuning offset (Factory setting: 5 %)
Offset and deviation for autotuning

6.7.9.3 Optimizing the controller
Setting the technology controller without autotuning (manual)
Procedure
Proceed as follows to manually set the technology controller:
1. Temporarily set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator (p2257
and p2258) to zero.
2. Enter a setpoint step and monitor the associated actual value, e.g. with the trace function
of STARTER.
The slower the response of the process to be controlled, the longer you must monitor the
controller response. Under certain circumstances (e.g. for a temperature control), you
need to wait several minutes until you can evaluate the controller response.
Optimum controller response for applications that do not per-

mit any overshoot.
The actual value approaches the setpoint without any signifi-
cant overshoot.
Optimum controller behavior for fast correction and quick com-

pensation of disturbance components.
The actual value approaches the setpoint and slightly over-
shoots, maximum 10% of the setpoint step.
The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint.

• Increase the proportional component KP and reduce the
integration time TI.
Actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint with slight

oscillation.
• Increase the proportional component KP and reduce the
rate time Td (differentiating time).
The actual value quickly approaches the setpoint, but over-

shoots too much.
• Decrease the proportional component KP and increase the
integration time TI.
3. Set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator back to their
original value.
You have now manually set the technology controller.

6.7.10 System protection

In many applications, monitoring the motor speed and torque provides information about the
plant or system status. By setting the appropriate responses in the case of faults, failures
and damage to the plant or system can be avoided.
Examples:
● For fans or conveyor belts, an excessively low torque can mean a broken drive belt.
● For pumps, an excessively low torque down to zero speed can mean an inadmissible
operating state.
● For extruders and mixers, excessively high torque can mean overload or a blocked
machine.
System protection functions

The inverter offers the following options of monitoring the motor load torque and speed:
● No-load monitoring
● Blocking protection
● Stall protection
● Load monitoring
No-load monitoring, blocking protection and stall protection require just a few settings.
However, the load monitoring is a function that offers a wide range of different setting options
– which in turn demands that you have good knowledge of the system.

6.7.10.1 No-load monitoring, blocking protection, stall protection
No-load monitoring
If the motor current is below the value of p2179 for the time set in p2180, using bit 11 of
status word 1 for monitoring functions (r2197.11), the converter outputs the "Output load not
available" message.
Applications: Fans and conveyor belts
Settings
Parameters Description
p2179 Output load detection current limit (factory setting: 0 A)
p2179 = 0: No load detection deactivated
p2180 Output load detection delay time (factory setting: 2000 ms)
Stall protection
If the speed lies below the value of p2175 for the time set in p2177, and the converter is
operating at the current or torque limit, using bit 6 of status word 2 for monitoring functions
(r2198.6), the converter outputs the "Motor blocked” message.
The converter goes to the current or torque limit if the setpoint speed is significantly higher
than the actual speed.
Applications: Extruders and mixers
Settings
p2175 Motor blocked speed threshold (factory setting: 120 rpm)
p2175 = 0: Blocking protection deactivated
p2177 Motor blocked delay time (factory setting: 3 s)

Stall protection
If the value in r1746 exceeds the value of p1745 for the time set in p2178, using bits 7 of
status word 2, for monitoring functions (r2198.7) the converter outputs the "Motor stalled"
message.
Applications: General system protection
Settings
p1745 Motor model fault threshold value stall detection (factory setting: 5 %)
If the motor stalls too early with this setting, then using the trace function you have
the option of determining a better value. To do this, set p1745 = 100.
p2178 Motor stalled delay time (factory setting: 0.01 s)

6.7.10.2 Load monitoring

The load monitoring comprises the following components:
● Load failure monitoring
● Monitoring for torque deviation
● Speed deviation monitoring
● Pump monitoring
● Fan monitoring
If the load monitoring detects load failure, then the inverter always goes into a fault condition
and outputs fault F07936. For a torque and speed deviation, as response, you can either set
an alarm or a fault. Details are provided in the following descriptions.
Settings
Table 6- 44 Setting options for load monitoring
p2193 Load monitoring configuration (factory setting: 1)
0: Monitoring deactivated
1: Torque and load failure monitoring
2: Speed deviation and load failure monitoring
3: Monitoring, load failure
4: Pump monitoring
5: Fan monitoring
Load failure monitoring
Using this function, the inverter monitors the speed or velocity of a machine component. The
inverter evaluates whether an encoder signal is present. If the encoder signal fails for a time
that can be adjusted, then the inverter signals a fault.
Examples of how the function can be used:
● Gearbox monitoring for traction drives and hoisting gear
● Drive belt monitoring for fans and conveyor belts
● Blocking protection for pumps and conveyor belts
Figure 6-54 Function plan and time response of load-interruption monitoring

Settings
p2192 Load monitoring delay time (factory setting 10 s)
After the motor is switched on, if the "LOW" signal is present at the associated
digital input for longer than this time, the inverter signals a load failure (F07936).
p2193 = 3 Load monitoring configuration
see Table 6-44 Setting options for load monitoring (Page 287)
p3232 = 722.x Load monitoring failure detection (factory setting: 1)
Connect the load monitoring to a DI x digital input of your choice.
For more information, see the List Manual (the parameter list and function diagram 8013).
Monitoring for torque deviation

Based on the envelope curve shown below and dependent on the speed, the torque is
monitored against a lower and upper torque. The inverter linearly interpolates the
intermediate values.
The inverter monitors the motor torque for speeds between threshold value 1 and threshold
value 3.
If the torque lies outside the envelope curve for longer than the time set in p2192, then the
response defined in p2181 is initiated.
The torque is not monitored for speeds between 0 and speed threshold 1 (p2182) - as well
as between speed threshold 3 (p2184 and the maximum speed (p1082).

Settings
p2181 Load monitoring response
Response when evaluating the load monitoring. Setting options see Response
options for the load monitoring (Page 292)
p2182 Load monitoring speed threshold 1
p2185 Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper
p2186 Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower
p2192 Load monitoring delay time
Delay time for the message "Leave torque monitoring tolerance band"
p2193 = 1 Load monitoring configuration (factory setting: 1)
Speed deviation monitoring

Using this function, the inverter calculates and monitors the speed or velocity of a machine
component. The inverter analyzes an encoder signal, calculates a speed from the signal,
compares it to the motor speed and reports any excessive deviation between the encoder
signal and the motor speed.
Examples of how the function can be used:
● Gearbox monitoring for traction drives and hoisting gear
● Drive belt monitoring for fans and conveyor belts
● Blocking protection for conveyor belts
You require a transmitter for this function, e.g. a proximity switch. The inverter analyzes an
encoder signal at max. 32 kHz.
The function is only available with the CU240E-2 Control Unit via digital input DI 3.
Figure 6-55 Speed deviation monitoring

The inverter determines the speed deviation from the calculated speed r0586 and the speed
list value r2169. p2181 determines the response of the inverter if the deviation is excessive.
Figure 6-56 Time response of monitoring speed deviation
Settings
p0490 Invert probe 1) (factory setting 0000bin)
Using the 3rd bit of the parameter value, invert the input signals of digital input 3
for the probe.
p0580 Probe 1) Input terminal (factory setting 0)
Connect input of probe with a digital input.
p0581 Probe 1) Edge (factory setting 0)
Edge for analyzing the probe signal for measuring speed list value
0: 0/1 edge
1: 1/0 edge
p0582 Probe 1) Pulse per revolution (factory setting 1)
Number of pulses per revolution
p0583 Probe 1) Maximum measurement time (factory setting 10 s)
Maximum measurement time for the probe If there is no new pulse before the
maximum measuring time elapses, the inverter sets the actual speed value in
r0586 to zero.
The time is restarted with the next pulse.
p0585 Probe 1) Gear ratio (factory setting 1)
The inverter multiplies the measured speed by the gear ratio before displaying it
in r0586.
r0586 Probe 1) Speed list value
Result of the speed calculation
Response when evaluating the load monitor. For setting options, see Table 6-45
Response options for load monitoring (Page 292).
p2192 Load monitoring delay time (factory setting 10 s)
Delay time for evaluating load monitoring.
p2193 = 2 For load monitoring configuration,

p3230 = 586 Load monitoring actual speed value (factory setting 0)
Result of the speed calculation with the evaluation of the speed monitoring.
p3231 Load monitoring speed deviation (factory setting 150 rpm)
Permissible speed deviation of load monitoring.
1) The "Probe" subfunction calculates the speed from the pulse signal of the digital input.
Monitoring, pump/fan
The monitoring functions for pumps and fans are similar. The blocking protection applies
equally to both applications.
For pumps, there is also a leakage monitoring function.
Within speed thresholds 1 and 3, the inverter monitors the torque and the speed for pumps
and fans.
If the torque or the speed moves, for longer than the time set in p2192, in the ranges of
blockage, leakage or dry running protection/belt breakage, then the response defined in
p2181 is realized.
Restrictions and general constraints for blocking protection depending on the motor type and
control mode
The following preconditions must be satisfied in order that the blockage monitoring is active
for pumps and fans:
● The following applies for application class "Standard Drive Control" (p0096 = 1) or
"Expert" (p0096 = 0) and U/f control (p1300 < 10):
Speed actual value > p2182 and > 10 % rated speed. A torque actual value r0080 is only
calculated in this range.
When the Imax control is active (when reaching the current limit) the blocking protection
intervenes according to the description in No-load monitoring, blocking protection, stall
protection (Page 285)

● For vector control (p1300 = 20) or application class “Dynamic Drive Control” (p0096 = 2),
the following always applies:
– Speed setpoint > p1755 switchover speed, motor model
– Speed actual value > p2182 speed threshold 1
In addition, the following applies:
– for induction motors (operated with the vector control)
p1750.6 = 1 (when the motor is blocked, the closed-loop control does not change into
the open-loop controlled mode) or p2192 < 1 s
– for synchronous and reluctance motors (operated with vector control)
- p2182 > p1755 switchover speed, motor model
- With this method, a complete blockage is not detected
Settings
p2165 Load monitoring blocking monitoring threshold, upper
p2168 Load monitoring blocking monitoring torque threshold
Response when evaluating the load monitoring. Setting options, see Table 6-45
Response options for load monitoring (Page 292)
p2191 Load monitoring torque threshold, no load
p2192 Load monitoring delay time
p2193 = 3 Load monitoring configuration
Table 6- 45 Response options for load monitoring
p2181 = 0 Load monitoring deactivated (factory setting)

p2181 = 1 A07920 for torque/speed too low
p2181 = 2 A07921 for torque/speed too high
p2181 = 3 A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
p2181 = 4 F07923 for torque/speed too low
p2181 = 5 F07924 for torque/speed too high
p2181 = 6 F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance
p2181 = 7 Pump/fan load monitoring as alarm
p2181 = 8 Pump/fan load monitoring as fault
The settings in p2193 for pumps/fans (p2193 = 4 or 5) are only permissible with the settings
for load monitoring for pumps/fans (p2181 = 7 or 8)

6.7.11 Free function blocks
6.7.11.1 Overview
The free function blocks permit configurable signal processing in the inverter.
The following free function blocks are available:
● AND, OR, XOR, and NOT logic
● RSR (RS flip-flop), DSR (D flip-flop) flip-flops
● Timers MFP (pulse generator), PCL (pulse shortening), PDE (ON delay), PDF (OFF
delay), and PST (pulse stretching)
● ADD (adder), SUB (subtractor), MUL (multiplier), DIV (divider), AVA (absolute value
generated), NCM (comparator), and PLI (polyline) arithmetic functions
● LIM (limiter), PT1 (smoothing), INT (integrator), DIF (differentiator) controllers
● NSW (analog) BSW (binary) switches
● LVM limit value monitoring
The number of free function blocks in the inverter is limited. You can only use a function
block once. The inverter has 3 adders, for instance. If you have already configured three
adders, then no other adders are available.
6.7.11.2 Further information
Example
You can find an example for using the free function blocks in Chapter Interconnecting signals
in the inverter (Page 449).
Application description for the free function blocks

See also: FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/85168215)

6.8 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

These operating instructions describe the commissioning of the STO safety function when it
is controlled via a fail-safe digital input.
You will find a detailed description of all safety functions and control using PROFIsafe in the
Safety Integrated Function Manual, see Section Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).
6.8.1 Function description
How does the STO safety function work?

The inverter with active STO function prevents machine
components from inadvertently starting.
Table 6- 46 The principle of operation of STO
Safe Torque Off (STO) Standard inverter functions linked with STO
1. The inverter recognizes the selection of STO ---
via a safety-relevant input or via the PROFIsafe
safe communication.
2. The inverter prevents energy from being fed to If you use a motor holding brake, the inverter
the motor. When STO is active, the motor does closes the motor holding brake.
not generate any torque. If you use a line contactor, the inverter opens
the line contactor.
3. The inverter signals that "STO is active" via a ---
safety-relevant output or via the PROFIsafe
safe communication.
Figure 6-57 Functionality of STO when motor is rotating and at a standstill
If the motor is still rotating when STO is selected, then it coasts down to standstill.

The STO safety function is standardized

The STO function is defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-2:
"[…] [The inverter] does not supply any energy to the motor which can generate a torque (or
for a linear motor, a force)."
The STO inverter function complies with what is defined in the standard.
The distinction between Emergency Off and Emergency Stop

"Emergency Off" and "Emergency Stop" are commands that minimize different risks in the
machine or plant.
The STO function is suitable for achieving an emergency stop but not an emergency off.
Risk: Risk of electric shock: Risk of unexpected motion:
Measure to minimize Safe switch off Safely stop and safely prevent re-
risk: Switching off the electric power sup- starting
ply for the installation, either com- Stopping or preventing the dangerous
pletely or partially. movement
Command: Emergency Off Emergency Stop
Classic solution: Switch of the power supply: Switch-of the drive power supply:
Solution with the STO STO is not suitable for safely switch- Select STO:
safety function inte- ing of an electric voltage.
grated in the drive:
It is permissible that you switch of the

inverter supply voltage as well. How-
ever, switching off the voltage is not
required as a risk-reduction meas-
urement.

Application examples for the STO function

The STO function is suitable for applications where the motor is already at a standstill or will
come to a standstill in a short, safe period of time through friction. STO does not shorten the
run-on of machine components with high inertia.
Examples Possible solution

When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a • Wire the Emergency Stop button to a safe-
stationary motor should not unintentionally start. ty-related input of the inverter.
• Select STO via the safety-related input.
A central emergency stop button must prevent the • Evaluate the Emergency Stop button in a
unintentional acceleration of several motors that central control.
are at a standstill.
• Select STO via PROFIsafe.
6.8.2 Prerequisite for STO use

In order to use the STO safety function, the machine manufacturer should have already
performed a risk assessment, e.g. in compliance with EN ISO 1050, "Safety of machinery -
Principles of risk assessment". The risk assessment must confirm that the inverter is
permitted for use in accordance with SIL 2 or PL d.
6.8.3 Commissioning STO
6.8.3.1 Commissioning tools

We strongly recommend that you commission the safety functions using a PC tool.
Table 6- 47 PC-based commissioning tools
Download Article number More information

STARTER 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0 STARTER videos
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/ (http://www.automati
en/10804985/130000) on.siemens.com/mc
ms/mc-
drives/en/low-
voltage-
inverter/sinamics-
g120/videos/Pages/v
ideos.aspx)
Startdrive 6SL3072-4CA02-1XG0 Startdrive tutorial
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/ (http://support.autom
en/68034568) ation.siemens.com/
WW/view/en/735984
59)

6.8.3.2 Protection of the settings from unauthorized changes

The safety functions are protected against unauthorized changes by a password.
Table 6- 48 Parameter
No. Description
p9761 Entering a password (factory setting 0000 hex)
Permissible passwords lie in the range 1 … FFFF FFFF.
p9762 New password
p9763 Confirm password
6.8.3.3 Configuring a safety function

To configure the safety functions, proceed as follows:
1. Go online.
2. Select the "Safety Integrated" function
3. Select "Change settings".
4. Selecting "STO via terminal":
You have completed the following commissioning steps:

● You have started to commission the safety functions.
● You have selected the basic functions with control via onboard terminals of the inverter.
The other selection options are described in the "Safety Integrated Function Manual". See
also section: Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).

6.8.3.4 Configuring a safety function

Proceed as follows to configure the safety functions:
1. Select "Select safety functionality".
2. Enable the safety functions:
3. Select the control type of the safety functions:
4. Define the interface for controlling the safety functions.

You have configured the safety functions
p0010 = 95 Drive commissioning parameter filter
Safety Integrated commissioning
p9601 Enable functions integrated in the drive (factory setting: 0000 bin)
Enabled functions:
0 hex None
1 hex Basic functions via onboard terminals
p9761 Enter a password (factory setting: 0000 hex)
Permissible passwords lie in the range 1 … FFFF FFFF.
p9762 New password
p9763 Password confirmation

6.8.3.5 Interconnecting the "STO active" signal

If you require the feedback signal "STO active" of the inverter in your higher-level control
system, then you must appropriately interconnect the signal.
Precondition
You are online with STARTER or Startdrive.
Procedure with STARTER and Startdrive

To interconnect the "STO active" checkback signal, proceed as follows:
1. Select the button for the feedback signal.
The screen form varies depending on the inverter and the interface that has been selected.
(A) Input terminal or connector for SINAMICS inverters, F0 rail for
SIMATIC ET 200pro FC-2.
(B) PROFIsafe interface
(C), (D) Delay time for SS1 and enable SBC for an inverter with CU250S-2 Control Unit
(E) Select STO via the terminals of the Power Module for a PM240-2 FSD and FSE
Figure 6-58 Interconnecting "STO active" in STARTER

The screen form varies depending on the inverter and the interface that has been selected.
(A) Control type
(B) Delay time for SS1 and enable of SBC for an inverter with CU250S-2 Control Unit
(C) Select STO via the terminals of the Power Module for a PM240-2 FSD and FSE
(D) Enable SBC for an inverter with CU250S-2 Control Unit
Figure 6-59 Interconnecting "STO active" in Startdrive
2. Select the signal that matches your particular application.

You have interconnected the "STO active" checkback signal. After STO has been selected,
the inverter signals "STO active" to the higher-level control.
r9773.01 1 signal: STO is active in the drive

6.8.3.6 Setting the filter for safety-related inputs
Requirement
You are online with STARTER or Startdrive online.

To set the input filter and simultaneity monitoring of the safety-related input, proceed as
follows:
1. Navigate to the filter settings.
Figure 6-60 Input filter and simuntaneity monitoring in STARTER
Figure 6-61 Input filter and simuntaneity monitoring in Startdrive
2. Set the debounce time for the F-DI input filter.

3. Set the discrepancy for the simultaneity monitoring.
4. Only applies to STARTER: Close the screen form.
You have set the input filter and the simultaneity monitoring of the safety-related input.
Description of the signal filter

The following are available for the signal processing of the safety-related inputs:
● A tolerance time for the simultaneity monitoring.
● A filter to suppress short signals, e.g. test pulses.

Tolerance time for the simultaneity monitoring

The inverter checks whether the signals at both inputs always have the same signal status
(high or low).
With electromechanical sensors (e.g. emergency stop buttons or door switches), the two
sensor contacts never switch at exactly the same time and are therefore temporarily
inconsistent (discrepancy). A long-term discrepancy indicates a fault in the wiring of a safety-
related input, e.g. a wire break.
When appropriately set, the inverter tolerates brief discrepancies.
The tolerance time does not extend the inverter response time. The inverter selects its safety
function as soon as one of the two F-DI signals changes its state from high to low.
Figure 6-62 Tolerance regarding discrepancy
Filter to suppress short signals

The inverter normally responds immediately to signal changes at its safety-related inputs.
This is not required in the following cases:
● When you interconnect a safety-related input of the inverter with an electromechanical
sensor, contact bounce may result in signal changes occurring, to which the inverter
responds.
● Several control modules test their safety-related outputs using bit pattern tests
(light/darkness tests) to identify faults due to either short-circuiting or cross circuiting.
When you interconnect a safety-related input of the inverter with a safety-related output of
a control module, the inverter responds to these test signals.
A signal change during a bit pattern test usually lasts:
– On test: 1 ms
– Off test: 4 ms
If the safety-related input signals too many signal changes within a certain time, then the
inverter responds with a fault.

Figure 6-63 Inverter response to a bit pattern test
An adjustable signal filter in the inverter suppresses temporary signal changes using bit
pattern test or contact bounce.
The filter increases the inverter response time. The inverter only selects its safety function
after the debounce time has elapsed.
Figure 6-64 Filter for suppressing temporary signal changes
p9650 F-DI changeover tolerance time (factory setting: 500 ms)
Tolerance time to change over the fail-safe digital input for the basic functions.
p9651 STO debounce time (factory setting: 1 ms)
Debounce time of the fail-safe digital input for the basic functions.
Debounce times for standard and safety functions

The debounce time p0724 for "standard" digital inputs has no influence on the fail-safe input
signals. Conversely, the same applies: The F-DI debounce time does not affect the signals
of the "standard" inputs.
If you use an input as a standard input, set the debounce time using parameter p0724 .
If you use an input as a fail-safe input, set the debounce time as described above.

6.8.3.7 Setting the forced checking procedure (test stop)
Requirement

To set the forced checking procedure (test stop) of the basic functions, proceed as follows:
1. Select the screen form for setting the forced checking procedure.
Figure 6-65 Setting the forced checking procedure with STARTER
Figure 6-66 Setting the forced checking procedure with Startdrive
2. Set the monitoring time to a value to match your application.

3. Using this signal, the inverter signals that a forced checking procedure (test stop) is
required.
Interconnect this signal with an inverter signal of your choice.
4. Only applies to STARTER: Close the screen form.
You have set the forced checking procedure (test stop) for the basic functions.
Description
The forced checking procedure (test stop) of the basic functions is an inverter self test. The
inverter checks its circuits to switch off the torque. If you are using the Safe Brake Relay, for
a forced checking procedure, the inverter also checks the circuits of this component.
You start the forced checking procedure each time that the STO function is selected.
Using a timer block, the inverter monitors as to whether the forced checking procedure is
regularly performed.

Figure 6-67 Starting and monitoring the forced checking procedure (test stop)
p9659 Forced dormant error detection timer (Factory setting: 8 h)
Monitoring time for the forced dormant error detection.
r9660 Forced dormant error detection remaining time
Displays the remaining time until the forced dormant error detection and testing the
safety switch-off signal paths.
r9773.31 1 signal: Forced dormant error detection is required
Signals for the higher-level control system.
6.8.3.8 Activating the settings and checking the digital inputs
Activate settings
Requirement

To activate the settings for the safety functions, proceed as follows:
1. Press the "Copy parameters" button, to create a redundant image of your inverter
settings.
2. Press the "Activate settings" button.

3. If the password is the factory default, you are prompted to change the password.
If you try to set a password that is not permissible, the old password will not be changed.
4. Confirm the prompt for saving your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
6. Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark (no voltage condition).
Your settings are now active.


To activate the settings of the safety functions in the drive, proceed as follows:
1. Click the "End safety commissioning" button.
3. Disconnect the online connection.
4. Select the "Load from device (software)" button.
5. Save the project.
7. Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark (no voltage condition).
Your settings are now active.
p9700 = D0 hex SI copy function (factory setting: 0)
Start the SI parameter copy function.
p9701 = DC hex Confirm data change (factory setting: 0)
Confirm SI Basic parameter change
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning parameter filter
0: Ready
p0971 = 1 Save parameter
1: Save the drive object (copy from RAM to ROM)
After the inverter has saved the parameters in a non-volatile fashion, then
p0971 = 0.

Checking the connection of digital inputs

The simultaneous connection of digital inputs with a safety function and a "standard" function
may lead to the drive behaving in unexpected ways.
If you control the safety functions in the inverter using digital inputs, you must check whether
these digital inputs are connected to a "standard" function.

Proceed as follows to check as to whether the safety-related inputs are only used for the
safety functions:
1. In the project navigator, select the inputs/outputs.
2. Select the screen for the digital inputs.
3. Remove all digital input interconnections that you use as safety-related input F-DI:
Figure 6-68 Removing the DI 4 and DI 5 digital-input connections
4. You must delete the digital input connections for all CDS if you use the switchover of the
command data sets (CDS).
You can find a description of the CDS switchover in the operating instructions.
You have ensured that the safety-related inputs only control safety functions in the inverter.


Proceed as follows to check as to whether the safety-related inputs are only used for the
safety functions:
1. Select the screen for the digital inputs.
2. Remove all digital input interconnections that you use as safety-related input F-DI:
3. You must delete the digital input connections for all CDS if you use the switchover of the
command data sets (CDS).
You can find a description of the CDS switchover in the operating instructions.
You have ensured that the safety-related inputs only control safety functions in the inverter.

6.8.3.9 Approval - completing commissioning
What is an acceptance?
The machine manufacturer is responsible in ensuring that his plant or machine functions
perfectly. As a consequence, after commissioning, the machine manufacturer must check
those functions or have them checked by specialist personnel, which represent an increased
risk of injury to personnel or material damage. This acceptance or validation is, for example,
also specified in the European machinery directive and essentially comprises two parts:
● Checking the safety-relevant functions and machine parts.
→ Acceptance test.
● Generate an "Acceptance report" that describes the test results.
→ Documentation.
Supply information for the validation, e.g. the harmonized European standards
EN ISO 13849-1 and EN ISO 13849-2.
Acceptance test of the machine or plant

The acceptance test checks whether the safety-relevant functions in the plant or machine
function correctly. The documentation of the components used in the safety functions can
also provide information about the necessary tests.
Testing the safety-related functions includes e.g. the following:
● Are all safety equipment such as protective door monitoring devices, light barriers or
emergency-off switches connected and ready for operation?
● Does the higher-level control respond as expected to the safety-relevant feedback signals
of the inverter?
● Do the inverter settings match the configured safety-relevant function in the machine?
Acceptance test of the inverter

The acceptance test of the inverter is a part of the acceptance test of the entire machine or
plant.
The acceptance test of the inverter checks whether the integrated drive safety functions are
set up correctly for the planned safety function of the machine.
You can find examples for the acceptance test of integrated drive safety functions in section:
Acceptance tests for the safety functions (Page 454).

Documentation of the inverter

The following must be documented for the inverter:
● The results of the acceptance test.
● The settings of the integrated drive safety functions.
The commissioning tool STARTER logs the settings of the integrated drive functions, if
necessary. See also Section: Documents for acceptance (Page 310).
The documentation must be signed.
Who may perform the acceptance test of the inverter?

Personnel from the machine manufacturer, who, on account of their technical qualifications
and knowledge of the safety functions, are in a position to perform the acceptance test in the
correct manner are authorized to perform the acceptance testing of the inverter.
Reduced acceptance test after function expansions

A full acceptance test is necessary only after first commissioning. A reduced acceptance test
is sufficient when safety functions are expanded.
Measure Acceptance test

Acceptance test Documentation
Functional expansion of the ma- Yes. • Supplement machine overview
chine (additional drive). Only check the safety • Supplement inverter data
functions of the new
drive. • Add function table
• Log the new checksums
• Countersignature
Transfer of inverter settings to No. • Add machine description
other identical machines by means Only check the control
• Check checksums
of series commissioning. of all of the safety
functions. • Check firmware versions
Documents for acceptance

The STARTER provides you with a number of documents to be regarded as a
recommendation for the acceptance tests of the safety functions.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to create the acceptance documentation for the drive using STARTER:
1. In STARTER, select "Create acceptance documentation":

STARTER has templates in German and English.

2. Select the suitable template and create a report for each drive of your machine or system:
– Template for the machine documentation:
de_G120x_Dokumentation_Maschine: German template.
en_G120x_Documentation_machine: English template.
– Report of the settings for the basic functions, from firmware version V4.4 onwards:
de_G120x_Basicc_V4.4…: German report.
en_G120x_Basic_V4.4…: English report.
3. You load the created reports for archiving and the machine documentation for further
processing:
4. Archive the reports and the machine documentation.

You have generated the documents to accept the safety functions.
The reports and the machine documentation can also be found in the section: Acceptance
tests for the safety functions (Page 454).

6.9 Switchover between different settings

There are applications that require different inverter settings.
Example:
You connect different motors to one inverter. Depending on the particular motor, the inverter
must operate with the associated motor data and the appropriate ramp-function generator.
Drive data sets (DDS)

Your can set several inverter functions differently and then switch over between the different
settings.
The associated parameters are indexed (index 0, 1, 2, or 3). Using control commands select
one of the four indexes and therefore one of the four saved settings.
The settings in the inverter with the same index are called the drive data set.
Figure 6-69 Switching over between different settings using drive data sets (DDS)
Using parameter p0180 you can define the number of drive data sets (1 ... 4).
Table 6- 49 Selecting the number of drive data sets
p0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
p0180 Drive data sets (DDS) number(factory setting: 1)
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready

Table 6- 50 Parameters for switching the drive data sets:
p0820[0…n] Drive data set selection DDS bit 0 If you use several command data sets
p0821[0…n] Drive data set selection DDS bit 1 CDS, then you must set this parameter
for each CDS. The parameters are as-
signed to a CDS through their index:
CDS0: p0820[0], p0821[0]
CDS1: p0820[1], p0821[1]
…
p0826 Motor changeover, motor number
Each drive data set is assigned a motor number:
p0826[0] = motor number for drive data set 0.
…
p0826[3] = motor number for drive data set 3.
If you operate the same motor with different drive data sets, then you must enter the
same motor number in every index of parameter p0826. In this particular case, you
can also switch over between the different drive data sets in operation.
If you operate different motors on one inverter, then you must number the motors in
parameter p0826. In this case, you may only switch over the drive data sets in the
"ready for operation" state with the motor switched-off. The switchover time is ap-
prox. 50 ms.
r0051 Displaying the number of the DDS that is currently effective
For an overview of all the parameters that belong to the drive data sets and can be switched,
see the List Manual.
Table 6- 51 Parameters for copying the drive data sets
p0819[0] Source drive data set
p0819[1] Target drive data set
p0819[2] = 1 Start copy operation

Backing up data and series commissioning 7
External data backup
After commissioning, your settings are saved in the converter so that they are protected
against power failure.
We recommend that you additionally back up the settings on a storage medium outside the
converter. Without backup, your settings could be lost if the converter developed a defect
(see also Replacing the Control Unit without data backup (Page 346)).
The following storage media are available for your settings:
● Memory card
● PG/PC
● Operator panel
Note
Data backup using operator panels with USB connection with the PG/PC is not possible
If the converter is connected to a PG/PC via a USB cable, you can save any data on the
memory card using an operator panel.
• Before you save data to the memory card using an operator panel, disconnect the USB
connection between the PG/PC and converter.
Carrying out series commissioning

Series commissioning is the commissioning of several identical drives.
Precondition
The Control Unit to which the settings are transferred has the same article number and the
same or a higher firmware version as the source Control Unit.
Overview
You must proceed as follows to carry out series commissioning:
1. Commission the first converter.
2. Back up the settings of the first converter to an external storage medium.
3. Transfer the settings of the first converter to another converter via the storage medium.

Backing up data and series commissioning
7.1 Backing up and transferring settings using a memory card
What memory cards do we recommend?

You will find the recommended memory cards in section: Overview of Control Units
(Page 27).
Using memory cards from other manufacturers

The inverter only supports memory cards up to 2 GB. SDHC cards (SD High Capacity) and
SDXC cards (SD Extended Capacity) are not permitted.
If you use other SD or MMC memory cards, then you must format the memory card as
follows:
● MMC: Format FAT 16
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Command to format the card:
format x: /fs:fat (x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC)
● SD: Format FAT 16 or FAT 32
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Command to format the card:
format x: /fs:fat or format x: /fs:fat32 (x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC.)
Functional restrictions with memory cards from other manufacturers

The following functions are either not possible – or only with some restrictions – when using
memory cards from other manufacturers:
● Licensing functions is only possible using the recommended memory cards.
● Know-how protection is only possible with one of the recommended memory cards.
● Under certain circumstances, memory cards from other manufacturers do not support
writing or reading data from/to the inverter.

7.1.1 Saving setting on memory card

We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the inverter. The
inverter always also backs up its settings on an inserted card.
If you wish to back up the inverter settings on a memory card, you have two options:
Automatically backing up
Preconditions
● The inverter power supply has been switched off.
● No USB cable is inserted in the inverter.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to automatically back up

your settings:
1. Insert an empty memory card into the
inverter.
2. Switch on the operating voltage of the
inverter.
After the power supply has been switched on, the inverter copies its changed settings to the
memory card.
Note
If the memory card is not empty, then the inverter accepts the data from the memory card.
This data then overwrites the data in the inverter.
• Only use empty memory cards when automatically backing up your settings for the first
time.

Manually backing up
Preconditions
• The inverter power supply has been switched on.
• No memory card is inserted in the inverter.

Proceed as follows to back up your settings on a memory card:
1. Go online.
2. Press the “Copy RAM to ROM” button .
3. In your drive, select "Drive Navigator".

5. Select the button to transfer the settings to the memory card.
6. Select the settings as shown in the diagram and start the data backup.
7. Wait until STARTER signals that the data backup has been completed.
8. Close the screen forms.
You have backed up the settings of the inverter on the memory card.


Proceed as follows to back up the inverter settings to a memory card:
1. Go online.
2. Select "Online & diagnostics".

4. Back up the settings to the EEPROM of the inverter.
5. Select the settings as shown in the diagram.
6. Start data transfer
7. Wait until Startdrive has signaled that the data backup has been completed.
You have backed up the inverter settings to a memory card.
Procedure with BOP-2

Proceed as follows to back up your settings on a memory card:
1. If a USB cable is inserted in the inverter, withdraw it.

2. Go to the "OPTIONS" menu.
3. In the "OPTIONS" menu, select “TO CARD”.
4. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different
settings on the memory card.
5. Start data transfer with OK.
6. Wait until the inverter has backed up the settings to the memory card.
You have backed up the settings of the inverter on the memory card.

7.1.2 Transferring the setting from the memory card
Automatically transferring
Precondition
The inverter power supply has been switched off.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to automatically transfer your settings:
1. Insert the memory card into

the inverter.
2. Then switch on the inverter
power supply.
If there is valid parameter data on the memory card, then the inverter accepts the data from
the memory card.
Manually transferring
Preconditions
• The inverter power supply has been switched on.

• No memory card is inserted in the inverter.


Proceed as follows to transfer settings from a memory card to the inverter:
1. Go online and in your drive, select the "Drive Navigator".
3. Select the button to transfer the data from the memory card to the inverter.
4. Select the settings as shown in the diagram and start the data backup.
5. Wait until STARTER signals that the data backup has been completed.
6. Close the screen forms.
7. Go offline.
8. Switch off the inverter power supply.
9. Wait until all LEDs on the inverter are dark.
10.Switch on the inverter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
You have now transferred your settings from a memory card to the inverter.


Proceed as follows to transfer settings from a memory card to the inverter:
1. Go online.
2. Select "Online & diagnostics".
4. Select the settings as shown in the diagram.

5. Start data transfer
6. Wait until Startdrive has signaled that the data transfer has been completed.
7. Go offline.
10.Switch on the inverter power supply again.
You have now transferred your settings from a memory card to the inverter.
Proceed as follows to transfer the settings from a memory card to the inverter
1. If a USB cable is inserted in the inverter, withdraw it.

2. Go to the menu level “OPTIONS”.
3. In the "OPTIONS" menu, select "FROM CRD".
4. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different
settings on the memory card.
6. Wait until the inverter has transferred the settings from the memory
card.

9. Switch on the inverter power supply again.
You have transferred the settings from the memory card to the inverter.

7.1.3 Safely remove the memory card
NOTICE
Data loss from improper handling of the memory card
If you remove the memory card when the converter is switched on without implementing the
"safe removal" function you may destroy the file system on the memory card. The data on
the memory card are lost. The memory card will only function again after formatting.
• Only remove the memory card using the "safe removal" function.

To safely remove the memory card, proceed as follows:
1. Go online.
2. In the Drive Navigatorselect the following screen form:
3. Click on the button to safely remove the memory card.

STARTER will tell you whether you can remove the memory card from the inverter.
You have now safely removed the memory card from the inverter.


To safely remove the memory card, proceed as follows:
1. In the Drive Navigatorselect the following screen form:
2. Click on the button to safely remove the memory card.

Startdrive will tell you whether you can remove the memory card from the inverter.
You have now safely removed the memory card from the inverter.
Safely removing a memory card using the BOP-2
Procedure
To safely remove the memory card using BOP-2, proceed as follows:
1. Go to parameter p9400. If a memory card is correctly inserted, then

p9400=1.
2. Set p9400 = 2.
3. The inverter sets p9400 = 3 or p9400 = 100.

• p9400 = 3: You may remove the memory card from the inverter.
• p9400 = 100: It is not permissible that you remove the memory
card. Wait for several seconds and then set p9400 = 2 again.
4. Remove the memory card. After removing the memory card,
p9400 = 0.
You have now safely removed the memory card using BOP-2.

7.2 Saving settings on a PC

You can transfer the inverter settings to a PG/PC, or vice versa, the data from a PG/PC to
the inverter.
Requirements
• The inverter power supply has been

switched on.
• You have installed one of the
commissioning tools STARTER or
Startdriveto your PG/PC.
Additional information regarding
commissioning tools is provided in
Section: Tools to commission the
converter (Page 48).
Inverter → PC/PG

To back up the settings with STARTER, proceed as follows:
1. Go online: .
2. Click the "Download project to PG" button: .

3. Save the project: .
4. Wait until STARTER reports that data backup has been completed.
5. Go offline: .
You have backed up the settings with STARTER.

To back up the settings with Startdrive, proceed as follows:
1. Go online.
2. Select "Online" > "Upload device to PG/PC."
3. Back up the project with "Project" > "Save."
4. Wait until Startdrive reports that data backup has been completed.
5. Go offline.
You have backed up the settings with Startdrive.

PC/PG → inverter
The procedure depends on whether you also transfer settings of safety functions or not.
Procedure with STARTER without enabled safety functions

To load the settings from the PG to the inverter with STARTER, proceed as follows:
1. Go online: .
2. Click the "Download project to target system" button: .
3. Wait until STARTER reports that loading has been completed.
4. To save the data to the non-volatile memory of the inverter, select the "Copy RAM to
ROM" button: .
5. Go offline: .
You have transferred the settings from the PG to the inverter with STARTER.
Procedure with Startdrive without enabled safety functions

To transfer the settings from the PG to the inverter with Startdrive, proceed as follows:
1. Go online.
2. Select "Load to device" > "Hardware and software" from the shortcut menu.
3. Wait until Startdrive reports that loading has been completed.
4. Go offline.
5. Confirm the dialog box that then opens by clicking "Yes" to save the data to the non-
volatile memory of the inverter (Copy from RAM to ROM).
You have transferred the settings from the PG to the inverter with Startdrive.

Procedure with STARTER with enabled safety functions

To load the settings from the PG to the inverter with STARTER and to activate the safety
functions, proceed as follows:
1. Go online: .
2. Click the "Download project to target system" button: .
3. Call the STARTER screen form for the safety functions.
You have transferred the settings from the PG to the inverter.

To activate the safety functions, proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Copy parameter" button.
2. Press the "Activate settings" button.
3. To save the data in the inverter, click the "Copy RAM to ROM" button: .
4. Go offline: .
6. Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go off.
7. Switch on the inverter power supply again. Your settings only become effective after this
power-on reset.
You have transferred the settings from the PG to the inverter with STARTER and activated
the safety functions.


To transfer the settings from the PG to the inverter with Startdrive and activate the safety
functions, proceed as follows:
2. Select "Load to device."
Figure 7-1 Activating settings in Startdrive
3. Connect Startdrive online with the drive.

4. Click the "Start safety commissioning" button.
5. Enter the password for the safety functions.
If the password is the factory default, you are prompted to change the password.
If you try to set a password that is not permissible, the old password will not be changed.
6. Click the "End safety commissioning" button.
8. Disconnect the online connection.
10.Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark (no voltage condition).
You have transferred the settings from the PG to the inverter with Startdrive and have
activated the safety functions.

7.3 Saving settings and transferring them using an operator panel
7.3 Saving settings and transferring them using an operator panel

You can transfer the inverter settings to the Operator Panel BOP-2 or vice versa, the data
from the BOP-2 to the inverter.
Precondition
The inverter power supply has been switched on.
Inverter → BOP-2
Procedure
To back up the settings on the BOP-2, proceed as follows:

2. In the “OPTIONS” menu, select “TO BOP”.
4. Wait until the inverter has backed up the settings to the BOP-2.
You have backed up the settings on the BOP-2.

7.4 Other ways to back up settings
BOP-2 → inverter
Procedure
To transfer the settings to the inverter, proceed as follows:

2. In the "OPTIONS" menu, select "FROM BOP".
4. Wait until the inverter has written the settings to the memory card.

You have transferred the settings to the inverter.
7.4 Other ways to back up settings

In addition to the default setting, the inverter has an internal memory for backing up three
other settings.
On the memory card, you can back up 99 other settings in addition to the default setting.
You will find additional information on the Internet at: Memory options
Table 7- 1 Operation on the BOP-2
Description
The converter writes its setting 0, 10, 11 or 12 to the memory
card in accordance with p0802. The file on the memory card is
assigned the number according to p0802.
The converter loads the setting with the number according to

p0802 from the memory card and thus overwrites its setting 0,
10, 11 or 12.

7.5 Write and know-how protection

The inverter offers the option to protect configured settings from being changed or copied.
Write protection and know-how protection are available for this purpose.
7.5.1 Write protection

Write protection prevents inadvertently changing inverter settings. If you are working with a
PC tool, such as STARTER, then write protection is only effective online. The offline project
is not write-protected.
Write protection is applicable for all user interfaces:
● BOP-2 and IOP operator panels
● STARTER or Startdrive PC tool
● Parameter changes via a fieldbus
The write protection is not password-protected.
Activate and deactivate write protection

Proceed as follows to activate or deactivate the write protection:
1. Go online.
2. Open the inverter
shortcut menu.
3. Activate or deactivate
write protection.
4. Press the “Copy RAM to
ROM” button to
retentively save the
settings .
You have activated or deactivated write protection.
Parame-
ters
r7760 Write protection/know-how protection status
.00 Write protection active
p7761 Write protection (factory setting: 0)
0: Deactivate write protection
1: Activate write protection

Exceptions to write protection

Some functions are excluded from write protection, e.g.:
● Activating/deactivating write protection
● Changing the access level (p0003)
● Saving parameters (p0971)
● Safely removing the memory card (p9400)
● Restoring the factory setting
● Importing settings from an external data backup, e.g. upload from a memory card to the
converter.
The individual parameters that are excluded from the write protection, can be found in the
List Manual in Chapter "Parameters for write protection and protection of know-how".
Note
Write protection for multimaster fieldbus systems
When using multimaster fieldbus systems (e.g. CAN Bus, BACnet), parameters can be
changed in spite of an active write protection. So that write protection is also active when
accessing via these fieldbuses, you must additionally set p7762 to 1.
In STARTER, this setting is only possible via the expert list.
7.5.2 Know-how protection
Know-how protection
The know-how protection is used to encrypt configuring/engineering know-how, and protect it
against being changed or copied.
The settings of the converter are protected by a password.
If the password is lost, only default settings are possible.
The active know-how protection provides the following:
● All setting parameters are invisible.
● Parameters cannot be changed with a commissioning tool, e.g. operator panel or
STARTER.
● It is not possible to download the converter settings with the Starter or via a memory card
● It is not possible to use the trace function in the STARTER.
● Deleting the alarm history
● The STARTER dialog screens are disabled. The expert list in the STARTER contains
only display parameters.
In the case of active know-how protection, support by technical support personnel is only
possible with the consent of the machine manufacturer.

Copy protection
In conjunction with the copy protection, the converter settings can be coupled only to a
single, pre-defined hardware.
Know-how protection with copy protection is only possible using the recommended Siemens
card, see also Section: Overview of Control Units (Page 27)
List of exceptions
The active know-how protection permits an exception list for parameters to be defined that
the customer may access.
If you remove the parameter for the password from the exception list, the know-how
protection can only be undone by reverting to the factory settings.
Actions that are possible during active know-how protection

● Restoring factory settings
● Acknowledging messages
● Displaying messages
● Show message history
● Reading out diagnostic buffer
● Switching to the control panel (complete control panel functionality: Fetch master control,
all buttons and setting parameters)
● Upload (only parameters that are accessible even though know-how protection is active)
The individual parameters that are excluded from the know-how protection can be found in
the List Manual in Chapter "Parameters for write protection and protection of know-how".
Commissioning the converter with know-how protection
Procedure - overview
1. Commission the converter.
2. Create the exception list (Page 336).
3. Activate the know-how protection (Page 334).
4. Save the settings in the converter by copying RAM to ROM with or via p0971 = 1.
5. Save the project with on the PG/PC. Also back up any other project-related data
(machine type, password, etc.) that may be required for the support of the end customer.

7.5.2.1 Settings for know-how protection
Activating know-how protection
Preconditions
● You are online.
If you have created a project offline on your computer, you must download it to the
inverter and go online.
● You have inserted the recommended Siemens card. See also Section: Overview of
Procedure
Proceed as follows to activate know-how protection:
1. Select the inverter in the STARTER project and in the shortcut menu select "Know-how
protection drive device/activate …" (see also Write protection (Page 331)).
2. Enter your password. Length of the
password: 1 … 30 characters.
For the password, we recommend
that you only use characters from
the ASCII character set. If you use
any character for the password,
then if changes are made to the
Windows language settings after
activating know-how protection,
errors can occur when subsequent-
ly checking the password.
3. In this screen form, press the "Copy RAM to ROM" button. This means that you save
your settings so that they are protected against power failure.
You have activated know-how protection.
Backing up settings on the memory card

When know-how protection is activated, you can save the settings to the memory card using
p0971.
To do this, set p0971 = 1. The data are written to the memory card encrypted. After saving,
p0971 is reset to 0.

Deactivating know-how protection, deleting a password
Preconditions
● You are online with STARTER.
● You have inserted the recommended Siemens card. See also Section: Overview of
Procedure
Proceed as follows to deactivate know-how protection:
1. Select the inverter in the STARTER

project, and using the right-hand
mouse button, open the dialog win-
dow “Know-how protection drive
device/deactivate …”.
2. There, select the desired option.
• Temporary status: Know-how
protection is active again after
switching the power supply off
and on.
• Final status: If you select "Copy RAM to ROM", the inverter immediately deletes the
password. If you do not select "Copy RAM to ROM", the inverter deletes the password
the next time the supply voltage is switched off.
3. Enter the password and exit the screen form with OK.
You have deactivated know-how protection.
Changing the password

Select the inverter in the STARTER project, and open the dialog screen form using the
shortcut menu “Know-how protection drive device/change password …”.

7.5.2.2 Generating an exception list for know-how protection

Using the exception list, as machine manufacturer you can make individual adjustable
parameters accessible to end users although know-how protection is active. You may define
the exception list via parameters p7763 and p7764 in the expert list. Specify the number of
parameters for the selection list in p7763. Assign the individual indexes to the parameter
numbers of the selection list in p7764.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to change the number of parameters for the selection list:
1. Save the inverter settings via an upload ( ) on the PC/PG and go offline ( )
2. In the project on the PC, set p7763 to the desired value.
4. Go online and load the project into the inverter ( ).
5. Now make the additional settings in p7764.
You have modified the number of parameters for the selection list.
Factory setting for the exception list:
● p7763 = 1 (selection list contains precisely one parameter)
● p7764[0] = 7766 (parameter number for entering the password)
Note
Block access to the inverter as a result of incomplete exception lists
If you remove p7766 from the exception list, you can no longer enter a password and
therefore no longer deactivate know-how protection.
In this case to access the inverter again, you have to reset the inverter to the factory
settings.

Corrective maintenance 8
8.1 Replacing inverter components
8.1.1 Overview of replacing converter components
Permissible replacement of components

In the event of a long-term function fault, you must replace the Power Module or Control
Unit. The inverter's Power Module and Control Unit can be replaced independently of each
other.
In the following cases you will need to replace the inverter:
Replacing the Power Module Replacing the Control Unit

Replacement: Replacement: Replacement: Replacement:
• Same type • Same type • Same type • Same type
• Same power rating • Same frame size • Same firmware version • higher firmware version
• Higher power rating (e.g. replace FW V4.2 by
FW V4.3)
Power Module and motor must be After replacing the Control Unit, you must restore the invert-
adapted to one another (ratio of er's settings.
motor and Power Module rated
power > 1/8)

Corrective maintenance
WARNING
Risk of injury due to uncontrolled drive motion
Replacing inverters of different types can result in uncontrolled motion of the drive.
• In all cases that are not permitted according to the table above, recommission the drive
after replacing an inverter.
Special issue relating to communication via PROFINET: Device replacement without removable data
storage medium
The inverter supports the PROFINET functionality, replacing the device without data storage
medium. After replacing the Control Unit, the inverter is automatically assigned its device
name from the IO controller.
Details of the device replacement without removable storage medium can be found in the
PROFINET system description
Independent of this, after replacing the inverter, you must transfer the settings of the old
inverter to the new inverter.

8.1.2 Replacing a Control Unit with enabled safety function
Replacing a Control Unit with data backup on a memory card

If you use a memory card with firmware, after the replacement, you obtain a precise copy
(firmware and settings) of the replaced Control Unit.
Precondition
You have a memory card with the actual settings of the Control unit to be replaced.
Procedure
To replace the Control Unit, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the line voltage to the Power Module and (if installed) the external 24 V
supply or the voltage for the digital outputs of the Control Unit.
2. Remove the signal cables from the Control Unit.
3. Remove the defective Control Unit.
4. Remove the memory card from the old Control Unit and insert it in the new Control Unit.
5. Mount the new Control Unit on the Power Module. The new Control Unit must have the
same article number and the same or higher firmware version as the Control Unit that
was replaced.
6. Reconnect the signal cables of the Control Unit.
7. Connect up the line voltage again.
8. The inverter loads the settings from the memory card.
9. Check what the inverter reports after loading.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the inverter.
Clear the alarm with p0971 = 1 and recommission the drive.
– Fault F01641:
Acknowledge the message.
Perform a reduced acceptance test, see section: Reduced acceptance after
component replacement and firmware change (Page 357).
You have replaced the Control Unit and transferred the safety function settings from the
memory card to the new Control Unit.

Replacing a Control Unit with data backup in STARTER
Precondition
You have backed up the actual settings of the Control Unit to be replaced to a PC using
STARTER.
Procedure
2. Remove the signal cables of the Control Unit.
4. Mount the new Control Unit on the Power Module.
7. Open the right project for the drive in the PC.
8. Go online and transfer the settings from the PC to the inverter by pressing the button.
The inverter signals faults after the download.  Ignore these faults, as they will be
automatically acknowledged by the following steps.
9. Select the screen form for the safety functions.
10.Select the "Change settings" button.
11.Select the "Activate settings" button.
12.Save your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
13.Switch off the inverter supply voltage.
16.Perform a reduced acceptance test, see section: Reduced acceptance after component
replacement and firmware change (Page 357).
You have replaced the Control Unit and transferred the safety function settings from the PC
to the new Control Unit.

Replacing a Control Unit with data backup in Startdrive
Precondition
Startdrive.
Procedure
7. Open the right project for the drive in the PC.
8. Select "Load to device".
9. Connect Startdrive online with the drive.
The inverter signals faults after the download. Ignore these faults, as they will be
10.Press the "Start safety commissioning" button.
11.Enter the password for the safety functions.
12.Confirm the prompt for saving your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
13.Disconnect the online connection.
You have replaced the Control Unit and transferred the safety function settings from the PC
to the new Control Unit.

Replacing the Control Unit with data backup in the operator Panel
Precondition
You have backed up the actual settings of the Control Unit to be replaced to an operator
panel.
Procedure
7. Plug the Operator Panel into the Control Unit or connect the Operator Panel handheld
device with the inverter.
8. Transfer the settings from the Operator Panel to the inverter.
9. Wait until the transfer is complete.
10.After loading, check whether the inverter outputs alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
The inverter reports the faults F01641, F01650, F01680 and F30680. Ignore these faults,
as they will be automatically acknowledged by the following steps.
14.Set p0010 to 95.
15.Set p9761 to the safety password.
16.Set p9701 to AC hex.
17.Set p0010 to 0.
18.Back up the settings so they are not lost when the power fails:
– BOP-2 in the menu "EXTRAS" - "RAM-ROM".
– IOP in the menu "SAVE RAM TO ROM".
operator panel to the new Control Unit.

8.1.3 Replacing the Control Unit without the safety functions enabled
Replacing a Control Unit with data backup on a memory card

If you use a memory card with firmware, after the replacement, you obtain a precise copy
(firmware and settings) of the replaced Control Unit.
Precondition
You have a memory card with the actual settings of the Control unit to be replaced.
Procedure
2. Remove the signal cables from the Control Unit.
4. Mount the new Control Unit on the Power Module. The new Control Unit must have the
same article number and the same or higher firmware version as the Control Unit that
was replaced.
5. Remove the memory card from the old Control Unit and insert it in the new Control Unit.
8. The inverter loads the settings from the memory card.
9. After loading, check whether the inverter outputs alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
Clear the alarm with p0971 = 1, and recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028:
The inverter accepts the settings that have been loaded.
You have successfully replaced the Control Unit.

Replacing a Control Unit with data backup in the PC
Precondition
STARTER.
Procedure
7. Open the right project for the drive in STARTER.
8. Go online and transfer the settings from the PC to the inverter by pressing the button.
The inverter signals faults after the download.  Ignore these faults, as they will be
9. Save your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
You have successfully replaced the Control Unit.
Replacing the Control Unit with data backup in the operator Panel
Precondition
You have backed up the actual settings of the Control Unit to be replaced to an operator
panel.
Procedure
7. Plug the Operator Panel into the Control Unit or connect the Operator Panel handheld
device with the inverter.
8. Transfer the settings from the Operator Panel to the inverter.

9. Wait until the transfer is complete.

10.After loading, check whether the inverter outputs alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
11.Back up the settings so they are not lost when the power fails:
– BOP-2 in the menu "EXTRAS" - "RAM-ROM".
– IOP in the menu "SAVE RAM TO ROM".
operator panel to the new Control Unit.

8.1.4 Replacing the Control Unit without data backup

If you do not backup the settings, then you must recommission the drive after replacing the
Control Unit.
Procedure
To replace the Control Unit without backed-up settings, proceed as follows:
7. Recommission the drive.
The Control Unit replacement has been completed after the drive has been successfully
commissioned.

8.1.5 Replacing a Control Unit with active know-how protection
Replacing devices with know-how protection without copy protection

In the case of know-how protection without copy protection, the inverter settings can be
transferred to another inverter using a memory card.
See also:
● Saving setting on memory card (Page 317)
● Transferring the setting from the memory card (Page 320)
Replacing devices with know-how protection with copy protection

The know-how protection with copy protection prevents the inverter settings from being
copied and passed on. This function is predominantly used by machine manufacturers.
If know-how protection with copy protection is active, the inverter cannot be replaced as
described in "Overview of replacing converter components (Page 337)."
However, to allow the inverter to be replaced, you must use a Siemens memory card, and
the machine manufacturer must have an identical machine that he uses as sample.
There are two options for replacing the device:
Option 1: The machine manufacturer only knows the serial number of the new inverter
● The end customer provides the machine manufacturer with the following information:
– For which machine must the inverter be replaced?
– What is the serial number (r7758) of the new inverter?
● The machine manufacturer goes online on the sample machine.
– deactivates the know-how protection, see Settings for know-how protection
(Page 334)
– enters the serial number of the new inverter in p7759
– enters the serial number of the inserted memory card as reference serial number in
p7769
– activates the know-how protection with copy protection ("Copy RAM to ROM" must be
activated!), see Settings for know-how protection (Page 334)
– writes the configuration with p0971 = 1 to the memory card
– sends the memory card to the end customer
● The end customer inserts the memory card and switches on the inverter.
When powering up, the inverter checks the serial numbers of the card and when there is a
match, the inverter goes into the "ready to start" state.
If the numbers do not match, then the inverter signals fault F13100 (no valid memory card).

Option 2: The machine manufacturer knows the serial number of the new inverter and the
serial number of the memory card
● The end customer provides the machine manufacturer with the following information:
– For which machine must the inverter be replaced?
– What is the serial number (r7758) of the new inverter?
– What is the serial number of the memory card?
● The machine manufacturer goes online on the sample machine.
– deactivates the know-how protection, see Settings for know-how protection
(Page 334)
– enters the serial number of the new inverter in p7759
– enters the serial number of the customer's memory card as reference serial number in
p7769
– activates the know-how protection with copy protection ("Copy RAM to ROM" must be
activated!), see Settings for know-how protection (Page 334)
– writes the configuration with p0971 = 1 to the memory card
– copies the encrypted project from the card to his PC
– for example, sends it by e-mail to the end customer
● The end customer copies the project to the Siemens memory card that belongs to the
machine, inserts it in the inverter and switches on the inverter.
When powering up, the inverter checks the serial numbers of the card and when there is a
match, the inverter goes into the "ready to start" state.
If the numbers do not match, then the inverter signals fault F13100 (no valid memory card).

8.1.6 Replacing a Power Module with enabled safety function
DANGER
Danger from touching energized Power Module connections
After switching off the mains voltage, it will take up to 5 minutes until the capacitors in the
Power Module are sufficiently discharged for the residual voltage to be safe. Death or
serious injury will result if energized parts are touched.
• Check the safe isolation of the Power Module connections before carrying out
installation work.
NOTICE
Material damage from swapping the motor's connection lines
The direction in which the motor rotates switches if you swap the two phases of the motor
line. A motor running backwards may damage the machine or installation.
• Connect the three phases of the motor lines in the right order.
• After replacing the Power Module, check the direction in which the motor rotates.
Procedure
To replace the Power Module, proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the main voltage of the Power Module.
You can leave any external 24 V supply to the Control Unit switched on.
2. Remove the connecting cables of the Power Module.
3. Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module.
4. Replace the Power Module.
5. Mount the Control Unit onto the new Power Module.
6. Connect up the new Power Module using the connecting cables.
7. Switch on the line supply and, if necessary, the 24 V supply for the Control Unit.
8. The inverter reports F01641.
9. Carry out a reduced acceptance test, see Section Reduced acceptance after component
You have successfully replaced the Power Module.

8.1.7 Replacing a Power Module without the safety function being enabled
Procedure
Proceed as follows to exchange a Power Module:
1. Switch off the supply voltage to the Power Module.
You do not have to switch off an external 24 V power supply for the Control Unit if one is
being used.
DANGER
Danger to life from hazardous voltage at the inverter terminals
After the power supply has been switched off, it takes up to 5 min. until the capacitors in
the inverter have discharged so that the remaining voltage is non-hazardous.
• Check the voltage at the inverter connections, before removing the connection
cables.
2. Remove the connecting cables of the Power Module.

3. Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module.
4. Replace the old Power Module with the new Power Module.
5. Mount the Control Unit onto the new Power Module.
6. Connect up the new Power Module using the connecting cables.
NOTICE
Material damage when interchanging the motor connecting cables
The direction in which the motor rotates switches if you exchange the two phases of the
motor line.
• Connect the three phases of the motor lines in the right order.
• After exchanging the power module check the direction in which the motor rotates.
7. Switch on the line supply and, if being used, the 24 V supply of the Control Unit.
You have successfully replaced the Power Module.

8.2 Firmware upgrade and downgrade
User actions
Inverter response
Figure 8-1 Overview of the firmware upgrade and firmware downgrade
You will find more information in the Internet at: Download

(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67364620)

8.2.1 Upgrading the firmware

When upgrading the firmware, you replace the inverter firmware by a later version. Only
update the firmware to a later version if you require the expanded functional scope of the
newer version.
Precondition
● The firmware version of your inverter is at least V4.5.
● Inverter and memory card have different firmware versions.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to upgrade the inverter firmware to a later version:

3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the in-
verter slot until it latches into place.

5. The inverter transfers the firmware from the memory
card into its memory.
The transfer takes approximately 5 … 10 minutes.
While data is being transferred, the LED RDY on the
inverter stays red. The LED BF flashes orange with a
variable frequency.

6. At the end of the transfer, the LED RDY and BF slowly

flash red (0.5 Hz).
Power supply failure during transfer
The inverter firmware will be incomplete if the power
supply fails during the transfer.
• Start again with step 1 of the instructions.

Decide whether you will withdraw the memory card
from the inverter:
• You leave the memory card in the inverter:
⇒ If the memory card still does not have a data
backup of the inverter settings, in step 9 the inverter
writes its settings to the memory card.
⇒ If the memory card already includes a data
backup, the inverter imports the settings from the
memory card in step 9.
• You remove the memory card: ⇒ The inverter retains
its settings.
10. If the firmware upgrade was successful, after several
seconds the inverter LED RDY turns green.
If the memory card is still inserted, depending on the
previous content of the memory card, one of the two
following cases has occurred:
• The memory card contains a data backup: ⇒ The
inverter has taken the settings from the memory
card.
• There was no data back up on the memory card: ⇒
The inverter has written its settings to the memory
card.
You have upgraded the inverter firmware.

8.2.2 Firmware downgrade

When downgrading the firmware, you replace the inverter firmware by an older version. Only
downgrade the firmware to an older version if, after replacing an inverter, you require the
same firmware in all of your inverters.
Precondition
● The firmware version of your inverter is at least V4.6.
● Inverter and memory card have different firmware versions.
● You have backed up your settings on the memory card, in an operator panel or in a PC.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to downgrade the inverter firmware to an older version:

3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the in-
verter slot until it latches into place.

5. The inverter transfers the firmware from the memory
card into its memory.
The transfer takes approximately 5 … 10 minutes.
While data is being transferred, the LED RDY on the
inverter stays red. The LED BF flashes orange with a
variable frequency.

6. At the end of the transfer, the LED RDY and BF slowly

flash red (0.5 Hz).
Power supply failure during transfer
The inverter firmware will be incomplete if the power
supply fails during the transfer.
• Start again with Step 1 of these instructions.

Decide whether you will withdraw the memory card
from the inverter:
card.
• There was no data backup on the memory card: ⇒
The inverter has the factory settings.
10. If the firmware downgrade was successful, after several
seconds the inverter LED RDY turns green.
If the memory card is still inserted, depending on the
previous content of the memory card, one of the two
following cases has occurred:
card.
• There was no data backup on the memory card: ⇒
The inverter has the factory settings.
11. If the memory card did not contain a data backup of the inverter settings, then you must
transfer your settings to the inverter from another data backup.
See also Section: Backing up data and series commissioning (Page 315).
You have replaced the inverter's firmware by an older version.

8.2.3 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade
How does the inverter signal an unsuccessful upgrade or downgrade?

The inverter signals an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or down-
grade by a quickly flashing LED RDY and the lit LED BF.
Correcting an unsuccessful upgrade or downgrade

You can check the following to correct an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade:
● Does the firmware version of your inverter fulfill the preconditions?
– For an upgrade, as a minimum V4.5.
– For a downgrade, as a minimum V4.6.
● Have you correctly inserted the card?
● Does the card contain the correct firmware?
● Repeat the appropriate procedure.

8.3 Reduced acceptance after component replacement and firmware change
8.3 Reduced acceptance after component replacement and firmware

change
After a component has been replaced or the firmware updated, a reduced acceptance test of
the safety functions must be performed.
Measure Acceptance test

Acceptance test Documentation
Replacing the Control Unit. No. • Supplement inverter data
Only check the direc- • Log the new checksums
tion of rotation of the
motor. • Countersignature
Replacing the Power Module. Supplement the hardware version in
the inverter data
Replace the motor with an identi- No change.
cal pole pair number
Replace the gearbox with an iden-
tical ratio
Replacing safety-related periph- No. No change.
erals (e.g. Emergency Stop Only check the control
switch). of the safety functions
that are influenced by
the components that
have been replaced.
Inverter firmware update. No. • Supplement firmware version in the
inverter data
• Log the new checksums
• Countersignature.

8.4 If the converter no longer responds
If the inverter no longer responds

For example, when loading an incorrect file from the memory card, the inverter can go into a
state where it can no longer respond to commands from the operator panel or from a higher-
level control system. In this case, you must reset the inverter to its factory setting and
recommission it. This inverter state is manifested in two different ways:
Case 1
● The motor is switched off.
● You cannot communicate with the inverter, either via the operator panel or other
interfaces.
● The LEDs flicker and after 3 minutes the inverter has still not powered up.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to restore the inverter factory settings:
1. Remove the memory card if one is inserted in the inverter.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the inverter go dark. Then switch on the inverter power supply
again.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as required until the inverter outputs fault F01018:
5. Set p0971 = 1.
again.
The inverter now powers up with the factory settings.
8. Recommission the inverter.
You have restored the inverter factory settings.

Case 2
● The motor is switched off.
● You cannot communicate with the inverter, either via the operator panel or other
interfaces.
● The LEDs flash and are dark - this process is continually repeated.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to restore the inverter factory settings:
1. Remove the memory card if one is inserted in the inverter.
again.
4. Wait until the LEDs flash orange.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as required until the inverter outputs fault F01018.
6. Now set p0971 = 1.
again.
The inverter now powers up with the factory settings.
You have restored the inverter factory settings.
The motor cannot be switched-on

If the motor cannot be switched-on, then check the following:
● Is a fault present?
If there is, then remove the fault cause and acknowledge the fault.
● Has the inverter been completely commissioned p0010 = 0?
If not, the inverter is e.g. still in a commissioning state.
● Is the inverter reporting the "ready to start" status (r0052.0 = 1)?
● Is the inverter missing some enable signals (r0046)?
● How does the inverter receive its setpoint and commands?
Digital inputs, analog inputs or fieldbus?


Alarms, faults and system messages 9
The converter has the following diagnostic types:
● LED
The LED at the front of the converter immediately informs you about the most important
converter states.
● Alarms and faults
The converter signals alarms and faults via
– the fieldbus
– the terminal strip with the appropriate setting
– a connected operator panel, or
– STARTER
Alarms and faults have a unique number.
● Identification & maintenance data (I&M)
If requested, the converter sends data to the higher-level control via PROFIBUS or
PROFINET:
– Converter-specific data
– Plant-specific data

Alarms, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated on LEDs

The LED RDY (Ready) is temporarily orange after the power supply voltage is switched-on.
As soon as the color of the LED RDY changes to either red or green, the LEDs signal the
inverter state.
Signal states of the LED

In addition to the signal states "on" and "off" there are two different flashing frequencies:
Table 9- 1 Inverter diagnostics
LED Explanation
RDY BF
GREEN - on Not relevant There is presently no fault
GREEN - slow Commissioning or reset to factory settings
RED - on YELLOW - variable Firmware update in progress
frequency
RED - slow RED - slow Inverter waits until the power supply is switched off
and switched on again after a firmware update
RED - fast Not relevant There is presently a fault
RED - fast RED - fast Incorrect memory card or unsuccessful firmware
update
Table 9- 2 Diagnostics of the safety functions
SAFE LED Meaning

YELLOW - on One or more safety functions are enabled, but not active.
YELLOW - slow One or more safety functions are active; no safety function faults have
occurred.
YELLOW - rapid The converter has detected a safety function fault and initiated a STOP
response.
Table 9- 3 Communication diagnostics via PROFINET
LNK LED Explanation

GREEN - on The communication via PROFINET is in order.
GREEN - slow Device naming is active.
Off No communication via PROFINET.

Table 9- 4 Communication diagnostics via RS485
LED Explanation
BF RDY
off Not relevant Data exchange between the inverter and control system
is active
RED - slow RED - slow Inverter waits until the power supply is switched off and
switched on again after a firmware update
All other states The bus is active, however the inverter is not receiving
any process data
RED - fast RED - fast Incorrect parameterization, incorrect memory card or
firmware update unsuccessful
All other states No bus connection available
YELLOW - variable RED - on Firmware update in progress
frequency
Communication via Modbus or USS:

If the fieldbus monitoring is deactivated with p2040 = 0, the BF-LED remains dark,
independent of the communication state.
Table 9- 5 Communication diagnostics via PROFIBUS DP
LED Explanation
BF RDY
GREEN - on Not relevant Data is being exchanged between the inverter and control
off PROFIBUS interface is not being used.
RED - slow RED - slow Inverter waits until the power supply is switched off and
switched on again after a firmware update
All other states Bus fault - configuration fault
RED - fast RED - fast Incorrect memory card or unsuccessful firmware update
All other states Bus error
- no data exchange
- inverter searches for baud rate
- no connection
YELLOW - variable RED - on Firmware update in progress
frequency

9.2 System runtime
9.2 System runtime

By evaluating the system runtime of the inverter, you can decide whether you must replace
components subject to wear such as fans, motors and gear units.
The inverter starts the system runtime as soon as the inverter is supplied with power. The
system runtime stops when the inverter is switched off.
The system runtime comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days):
System runtime = r2114[1] × days + r2114[0] × milliseconds
If r2114[0] has reached a value of 86,400,000 ms (24 hours), the inverter sets r2114[0] the
value 0 and increases the value of r2114[1] by 1.
Using system runtime, you can track the chronological sequence of faults and alarms over
time. When a corresponding message is triggered, the inverter transfers the parameter
values r2114 to the corresponding parameters of the alarm or fault buffer.
r2114[0] System runtime (ms)
r2114[1] System runtime (days)
You cannot reset the system runtime.

9.3 Alarms
9.3 Alarms
Alarms have the following properties:
● They do not have a direct effect in the converter and disappear once the cause has been
removed
● They do not need have to be acknowledged
● They are signaled as follows
– Status display via bit 7 in status word 1 (r0052)
– At the Operator Panel with a Axxxxx
– Via STARTER, if you click on TAB at the bottom left of the STARTER screen
In order to pinpoint the cause of an alarm, there is a unique alarm code and also a value for
each alarm.
Alarm buffer
For each incoming alarm, the converter saves the alarm, alarm value and the time that the
alarm was received.
Figure 9-1 Saving the first alarm in the alarm buffer
r2124 and r2134 contain the alarm value - important for diagnostics - as "fixed point" or
"floating point" number.
The alarm times are displayed in r2145 and r2146 (in complete days) as well as in r2123 and
r2125 (in milliseconds referred to the day of the alarm).
The converter uses an internal time calculation to save the alarm times. More information on
the internal time calculation can be found in Chapter System runtime (Page 364).
As soon as the alarm has been removed, the converter writes the associated instant in time
into parameters r2125 and r2146. The alarm remains in the alarm buffer even if the alarm
has been removed.
If an additional alarm is received, then this is also saved. The first alarm is still saved. The
alarms that have occurred are counted in p2111.
Figure 9-2 Saving the second alarm in the alarm buffer

9.3 Alarms
The alarm buffer can contain up to eight alarms. If an additional alarm is received after the
eighth alarm - and none of the last eight alarms have been removed - then the next to last
alarm is overwritten.
Figure 9-3 Complete alarm buffer
Emptying the alarm buffer: Alarm history

The alarm history traces up to 56 alarms.
The alarm history only takes alarms that have been removed from the alarm buffer. If the
alarm buffer is completely filled - and an additional alarm occurs - then the converter shifts all
alarms that have been removed from the alarm buffer into the alarm history. In the alarm
history, alarms are also sorted according to the "alarm time received", however, when
compared to the alarm buffer, in the inverse sequence:
● The youngest alarm is in index 8
● The second youngest alarm is in index 9
● etc.
Figure 9-4 Shifting alarms that have been removed into the alarm history

9.3 Alarms
Any alarms that have not been removed remain in the alarm buffer. The converter sorts the
alarms and closes gaps between the alarms.
If the alarm history is filled up to index 63, each time a new alarm is accepted in the alarm
history, the oldest alarm is deleted.
Parameters of the alarm buffer and the alarm history
r2122 Alarm code
Displays the numbers of alarms that have occurred
r2123 Alarm time received in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the alarm occurred
r2124 Alarm value
Displays additional information about the alarm
r2125 Alarm time removed in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the alarm was removed
p2111 Alarm counter
Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset
When setting p2111 = 0, all of the alarms that have been removed from the alarm
buffer [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63]
r2145 Alarm time received in days
Displays the time in days when the alarm occurred
r2132 Actual alarm code
Displays the code of the alarm that last occurred
r2134 Alarm value for float values
Displays additional information about the alarm that occurred for float values
r2146 Alarm time removed in days
Displays the time in days when the alarm was removed
Extended settings for alarms
You can change up to 20 different alarms into a fault or suppress alarms:
p2118 Setting the message number for the message type
Selection of the alarms for which the message type should be changed
p2119 Setting the message type
Setting the message type for the selected alarm
1: Fault
2: Alarm
3: No message
You will find details in function diagram 8075 and in the parameter description of the List
Manual.

9.4 Faults
9.4 Faults
A fault indicates a severe fault during inverter operation.
The inverter signals a fault as follows:
● At the operator panel with Fxxxxx
● At the inverter using the red LED RDY
● In bit 3 of status word 1 (r0052)
● Via STARTER
To delete a message, you must resolve the cause of the fault and acknowledge the fault.
Every fault has a unique fault code and also a fault value. You need this information to
determine the cause of the fault.
Fault buffer of actual values

The inverter saves the time, fault code and fault value for every fault it receives.
Figure 9-5 Saving the first fault in the fault buffer
r0949 and r2133 contain the fault value - important for diagnostics - as "fixed point" or
"floating point" number.
The "fault time received" is in parameter r2130 (in complete days) as well as in parameter
r0948 (in milliseconds referred to the day of the fault). The "fault time removed" is written to
parameters r2109 and r2136 when the fault has been acknowledged.
The inverter uses its internal time calculation to save the fault times. More information on the
internal time calculation can be found in Chapter System runtime (Page 364).
If an additional fault occurs before the first fault has been acknowledged, then this is also
saved. The first alarm remains saved. The fault cases that have occurred are counted in
p0952. A fault case can contain one or several faults.
Figure 9-6 Saving the second fault in the fault buffer
The fault buffer can accept up to eight actual faults. The next to last fault is overwritten if an
additional fault occurs after the eighth fault.

9.4 Faults
Figure 9-7 Complete fault buffer
Acknowledgement
You have multiple options to acknowledge a fault, e.g.:
● PROFIdrive control word 1, bit 7 (r2090.7)
● Acknowledge via the operator panel
● Switch-off the inverter power supply and switch-on again.
Faults detected during the inverter-internal monitoring of hardware and firmware can be
acknowledged only by switching the supply voltage off and on again. The list of faults in the
List Manual contains a note on this limited acknowledgment possibility.
Emptying the fault buffer: Fault history

The fault history can contain up to 56 faults.
The acknowledgment has no effect as long as none of the causes for the faults in the buffer
have been removed. If at least one of the faults in the fault buffer has been removed (the
cause of the fault has been removed) and you acknowledge the faults, then the following
happens:
1. The inverter accepts all faults from the fault buffer in the first eight memory locations of
the fault history (indexes 8 ... 15).
2. The inverter deletes the faults that have been removed from the fault buffer.
3. The inverter writes the time of acknowledgment of the faults that have been removed into
parameters r2136 and r2109 (fault time removed).

9.4 Faults
Figure 9-8 Fault history after acknowledging the faults
After acknowledgment, the faults that have not been removed are located in the fault buffer
as well as in the fault history. For these faults, the "fault time coming" remains unchanged
and the "fault time removed" remains empty.
If less than eight faults were shifted or copied into the fault history, the memory locations with
the higher indexes remain empty.
The inverter shifts the values previously saved in the fault history by eight indexes. Faults,
which were saved in indexes 56 … 63 before the acknowledgment, are deleted.
Deleting the fault history

If you wish to delete all faults from the fault history, set parameter p0952 to zero.
Parameters of the fault buffer and the fault history
r0945 Fault code
Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred
r0948 Fault time received in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the fault occurred
r0949 Fault value
Displays additional information about the fault
p0952 Fault cases, counter
Number of fault cases that have occurred since the last acknowledgment.
The fault buffer is deleted with p0952 = 0.
r2109 Fault time removed in milliseconds
Displays the time in milliseconds when the fault occurred
r2130 Fault time received in days
Displays the time in days when the fault occurred

9.4 Faults
r2131 Actual fault code
Displays the code of the oldest fault that is still active
r2133 Fault value for float values
Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values
r2136 Fault time removed in days
Displays the time in days when the fault was removed
Extended settings for faults
You can modify the motor fault response for up to 20 different fault codes:
p2100 Setting the fault number for fault response
Selecting the faults for which the fault response should be changed
p2101 Setting, fault response
Setting the fault response for the selected fault
You can modify the acknowledgement type for up to 20 different fault codes:
p2126 Setting the fault number for the acknowledgment mode
Selection of the faults for which the acknowledgment type should be changed
p2127 Setting, acknowledgment mode
Setting the acknowledgment type for the selected fault
1: Can only be acknowledged using POWER ON
2: IMMEDIATE acknowledgment after removing the fault cause
You can change up to 20 different faults into an alarm, or suppress faults:
p2118 Setting the message number for the message type
Selection of the message for which the message type should be changed
p2119 Setting the message type
Setting the message type for the selected fault
1: Fault
2: Alarm
3: No message
You will find details in function diagram 8075 and in the parameter description of the List
Manual.

9.5 List of alarms and faults

Axxxxx Alarm
Fyyyyy: Fault
Table 9- 6 The most important alarms and faults of the safety functions
Number Cause Remedy

F01600 STOP A Triggered STO Select and then deselect again.
F01650 Acceptance test required Carry out acceptance test and create test certificate.
Switch the Control Unit off and then on again.
F01659 Write task for parameter rejected Cause: The converter should be reset to the factory setting. The resetting of
the safety functions is, however, not allowed, because the safety functions
are currently enabled.
Remedy with operator panel:
p0010 = 30 Parameter reset
p9761 = … Enter password for the safety functions.
p0970 = 5 Reset Start Safety Parameter.
The converter sets p0970 = 5 if it has reset the parameters.
Then reset the converter to the factory setting again.
A01666 Static 1 signal atF-DI for safe F-DI to a logical 0 signal.
acknowledgment
A01698 Commissioning mode active for This message is withdrawn after the Safety commissioning has ended.
safety functions
A01699 Shutdown path test required After the next time that the "STO" function is deselected, the message is
withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset.
F30600 STOP A Triggered STO Select and then deselect again.
Table 9- 7 Faults, which can only be acknowledged by switching the inverter off and on again
Number Cause Remedy

F01000 Software fault in CU Replace CU.
F01001 Floating Point Exception Switch CU off and on again.
F01015 Software fault in CU Upgrade firmware or contact technical support.
F01018 Power-up aborted more than once After this fault is output, the inverter powers up with the factory settings.
Remedy: Back up factory setting with p0971=1. Switch CU off and on
again. Recommission the inverter.
F01040 Parameters must be saved Save parameters (p0971).
Switch CU off and on again.
F01044 Loading of memory data card de- Replace memory card or CU.
fective
F01105 CU: Insufficient memory Reduce number of data records.
F01205 CU: Time slice overflow Contact technical support.
F01250 CU hardware fault Replace CU.
F01512 An attempt has been made to Create scaling or check transfer value.
establish an conversion factor for
scaling which is not present

Number Cause Remedy

F01662 CU hardware fault Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical sup-
port.
F30022 Power Module: Monitoring UCE Check or replace the Power Module.
F30052 Incorrect Power Module data Replace Power Module or upgrade CU firmware.
F30053 Error in FPGA data Replace the Power Module.
F30662 CU hardware fault Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical sup-
port.
F30664 CU power up aborted Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical sup-
port.
F30850 Software fault in Power Module Replace Power Module or contact technical support.
Table 9- 8 The most important alarms and faults
Number Cause Remedy

F01018 Power-up aborted more than once 1. Switch the module off and on again.
2. After this fault has been output, the module is booted with the factory
settings.
A01028 Configuration error Explanation: Parameterization on the memory card has been created with
a different type of module (Article number, MLFB).
Check the module parameters and recommission if necessary.
F01033 Switching over units: Reference Set the value of the reference parameter not equal to 0.0 (p0304, p0305,
parameter value invalid p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004).
F01034 Switching over units: Calculation of Select the value of the reference parameter so that the parameters in-
the parameter values after refer- volved can be calculated in the per unit notation (p0304, p0305, p0310,
ence value change unsuccessful p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004).
A01053 System overload measured The maximum computing power of the control unit was exceeded. The
F01054 System limit exceeded following measures reduce the load on the control unit:
• Use only one data record (CDS and DDS)
• Only use the safety features of the basic functions
• Deactivate the technology controller
• Use the simple ramp-function generator rather than the extended
ramp-function generator
• Do not use any free function components
• Reduce the sampling time of the free function blocks
F01122 Frequency at the probe input too Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the probe input.
high
A01590 Motor maintenance interval lapsed Carry out maintenance and reset the maintenance interval (p0651).
A01900 PROFIBUS: Configuration tele- Explanation: A PROFIBUS master is attempting to establish a connection
gram faulty with a faulty configuration telegram.
Check the bus configuration on the master and slave side.

Number Cause Remedy

A01910 Setpoint timeout The alarm is generated when p2040 ≠ 0 ms and one of the following
F01910 causes is present:
• The bus connection is interrupted
• The Modbus master is switched off
• Communications error (CRC, parity bit, logical error)
• An excessively low value for the fieldbus monitoring time (p2040)
A01920 PROFIBUS: Cyclic connection Explanation: The cyclic connection to PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
interrupt Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master
with cyclic operation.
F03505 Analog input, wire break Check the wiring for interruptions.
Check the level of the injected signal.
The input current measured by the analog input can be read out in r0752.
A03520 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
A05000 Power Module overtemperature Check the following:
A05001 - Is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
A05002 - Are the load conditions and duty cycle configured accordingly?
A05004 - Has the cooling failed?
A05006
F06310 Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly Check the set supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
set Check the line voltage.
F07011 Motor overtemperature Reduce the motor load.
Check the ambient temperature.
Check the wiring and connection of the sensor.
A07012 I2t Motor Module overtemperature Check and if necessary reduce the motor load.
Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check the thermal time constant p0611.
Check the overtemperature fault threshold p0605.
A07015 Motor temperature sensor alarm Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
Check the parameter assignment (p0601).
F07016 Motor temperature sensor fault Make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
Check the parameterization (p0601).
Deactivate the motor temperature sensor fault evaluation (p0607 = 0).
F07086 Switching over units: Parameter Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
F07088 limit violation
F07320 Automatic restart aborted Increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of
start attempts is shown in r1214.
Increase the wait time in p1212 and/or monitoring time in p1213.
Connect an ON command (p0840).
Increase the monitoring time of the power unit or switch off (p0857).
Reduce the wait time for resetting the fault counter p1213[1] so that fewer
faults are registered in the time interval.
A07321 Automatic restart active Explanation: The automatic restart (AR) is active. During voltage recovery
and/or when remedying the causes of pending faults, the drive is auto-
matically switched back on.
F07330 Search current measured too low Increase the search current (p1202), check the motor connection.

Number Cause Remedy

A07400 DC-link voltage maximum control- If it is not desirable that the controller intervenes:
ler active
• Increase the ramp-down times.
• Deactivate the Vdc_max control (p1240 = 0 for vector control, p1280 =
0 for U/f control).
A07409 U/f control, current limiting control- The alarm automatically disappears after one of the following measures:
ler active
• Increase the current limit (p0640).
• Reduce the load.
• Slow down the ramp-ups for the setpoint speed.
F07426 Technology controller actual value • Adapt the limits to the signal level (p2267, p2268).
limited
• Check the actual value scaling (p2264).
F07801 Motor overcurrent Check the current limits (p0640).
Vector control: Check the current controller (p1715, p1717).
U/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 … p1346).
Increase the acceleration ramp (p1120) or reduce the load.
Check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
Check the motor regarding the star/delta connection and rating plate
parameterization.
Check the power unit / motor combination.
Select the flying restart function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor.
A07805 Drive: Power unit overload I2t • Reduce the continuous load.
• Adapt the load cycle.
• Check the assignment of rated currents of the motor and power unit.
F07806 Regenerative power limit exceeded Increase the deceleration ramp.
Reduce the driving load.
Use a power unit with higher energy recovery capability.
For vector control, the regenerative power limit in p1531 can be reduced
until the fault is no longer activated.
F07807 Short-circuit detected • Check the inverter connection on the motor side for any phase-phase
short-circuit.
• Rule out that line and motor cables have been interchanged.
A07850 External alarm 1 … 3 The signal for "external alarm 1" has been triggered.
A07851 Parameters p2112, p2116 and p2117 determine the signal sources for
A07852 the external alarm 1… 3.
Remedy: Remove the causes of these alarms.
F07860 External fault 1 … 3 Remove the external causes for this fault.
F07861
F07862
F07900 Motor blocked Check that the motor can run freely.
Check the torque limits (r1538 and r1539).
Check the parameters of the "Motor blocked" message (p2175, p2177).
F07901 Motor overspeed Activate the precontrol for the speed limiting controller (p1401 bit 7 = 1).
Increase the hysteresis for overspeed signal p2162.

Number Cause Remedy

F07902 Motor stalled Check whether the motor data has been set correctly and perform a mo-
tor identification.
Check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too
low, the drive cannot be magnetized.
Check whether motor cables are disconnected during operation.
A07903 Motor speed deviation Increase p2163 and/or p2166.
Increase the torque, current and power limits.
A07910 Motor overtemperature Check the motor load.
Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check the KTY84 sensor.
Check the overtemperatures of the thermal model (p0626 ... p0628).
A07920 Torque/speed too low The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope curve.
A07921 Torque/speed too high • Check the connection between the motor and the load.
A07922 Torque/speed out of tolerance • Adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
F07923 Torque/speed too low • Check the connection between the motor and the load.
F07924 Torque/speed too high • Adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07927 DC braking active Not required
A07980 Rotary measurement activated Not required
A07981 No enabling for rotary measure- Acknowledge pending faults.
ment Establish missing enables (see r00002, r0046).
A07991 Motor identification activated Switch on the motor and identify the motor data.
F08501 Setpoint timeout • Check the PROFINET connection.
• Set the controller into the RUN mode.
• If the fault occurs repeatedly, check the monitoring time set p2044.
F08502 Monitoring time, sign-of-life expired • Check the PROFINET connection.
F08510 Send configuration data not valid • Check the PROFINET configuration
A08511 Receive configuration data not
valid
A08526 No cyclic connection • Activate the controller with cyclic operation.
• Check the parameters "Name of Station" and "IP of Station" (r61000,
r61001).
A08565 Consistency error affecting adjust- Check the following:
able parameters
• IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct.
• IP address or station name used twice in the network.
• Station name contains invalid characters.

Number Cause Remedy

F08700 Communications error A CAN communications error has occurred. Check the following:
• Bus cable
• Baud rate (p8622)
• Bit timing (p8623)
• Master
Start the CAN controller manually with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the
fault has been resolved!
F13100 Know-how protection: Copy protec- The know-how protection and the copy protection for the memory card
tion error are active. An error occurred when checking the memory card.
• Insert a suitable memory card and switch the inverter supply voltage
temporarily off and then on again (POWER ON).
• Deactivate the copy protection (p7765).
F13101 Know-how protection: Copy protec- Insert a valid memory card.
tion cannot be activated
F30001 Overcurrent Check the following:
• Motor data, if required, carry out commissioning
• Motor connection method (Υ / Δ)
• U/f operation: Assignment of rated currents of motor and Power Mod-
ule
• Line quality
• Make sure that the line commutating reactor is connected properly
• Power cable connections
• Power cables for short-circuit or ground fault
• Power cable length
• Line phases
If this doesn't help:
• U/f operation: Increase the acceleration ramp
• Reduce the load
• Replace the power unit
F30002 DC-link voltage overvoltage Increase the ramp-down time (p1121).
Set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
Activate the DC-link voltage controller (p1240, p1280).
Check the line voltage (p0210).
Check the line phases.
F30003 DC-link voltage undervoltage Check the line voltage (p0210).
F30004 Inverter overtemperature Check whether the inverter fan is running.
Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Reduce the pulse frequency.
F30005 I2t inverter overload Check the rated currents of the motor and Power Module.
Reduce the current limit p0640.
When operating with U/f characteristic: Reduce p1341.

Number Cause Remedy

F30011 Line phase failure Check the inverter's input fuses.
Check the motor feeder cables.
F30015 Motor cable phase failure Check the motor cables.
Increase the ramp-up or ramp-down time (p1120).
F30021 Ground fault • Check the power cable connections.
• Check the motor.
• Check the current transformer.
• Check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire might
be broken).
F30027 Time monitoring for DC link pre- Check the supply voltage at the input terminals.
charging Check the line voltage setting (p0210).
F30035 Overtemperature, intake air • Check whether the fan is running.
F30036 Overtemperature, inside area • Check the fan filter elements.
• Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
F30037 Rectifier overtemperature See F30035 and, in addition:
• Check the motor load.
• Check the line phases
A30049 Internal fan defective Check the internal fan and if required replace.
F30059 Internal fan defective Check the internal fan and if required replace.
A30502 DC-link overvoltage • Check the unit supply voltage (p0210).
• Check the dimensioning of the line reactor.
A30920 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
A50001 PROFINET configuration error A PROFINET controller is attempting to establish a connection with an
incorrect configuration telegram. Check whether "Shared Device" is acti-
vated (p8929 = 2).
A50010 PROFINET name of station invalid Correct name of station (p8920) and activate (p8925 = 2).
A50020 PROFINET: Second controller "Shared Device" is activated (p8929 = 2). However, only the connection
missing to a PROFINET controller is available.
For further information, please refer to the List Manual.
For further information, please refer to the List Manual.

9.6 Identification & maintenance data (I&M)
I&M data
The inverter supports the following identification and maintenance (I&M) data.
I&M Format Explanation Associated Example for the

data parameters content
I&M0 u8[64] PROFIBUS Inverter-specific data, read only - See below
u8[54] PROFINET
I&M1 Visible String [32] Plant/system identifier p8806[0 … 31] "ak12-
ne.bo2=fu1"
Visible String [22] Location code p8806[32 … 53] "sc2+or45"
I&M2 Visible String [16] Date p8807[0 … 15] "2013-01-21
16:15"
I&M3 Visible String [54] Any comment p8808[0 … 53] -
I&M4 Octet String[54] Check signature to track chang- p8809[0 … 53] Values of
es for Safety Integrated. r9781[0] and
This value can be changed by r9782[0]
the user.
The test signature is reset to the
value generated by the machine
is p8805 = 0 is used.
When requested, the inverted transfers its I&M data to a higher-level control or to a PC/PG
with installed STEP 7, STARTER or TIA-Portal.
I&M0
Designation Format Example for the Valid for Valid for

content PROFINET PROFIBUS
Manufacturer-specific u8[10] 00 … 00 hex --- ✓
MANUFACTURER_ID u16 42d hex ✓ ✓
(=Siemens)
ORDER_ID Visible String „6SL3246-0BA22- ✓ ✓
[20] 1FA0“
SERIAL_NUMBER Visible String „T-R32015957“ ✓ ✓
[16]
HARDWARE_REVISION u16 0001 hex ✓ ✓
SOFTWARE_REVISION char, u8[3] „V“ 04.70.19 ✓ ✓
REVISION_COUNTER u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_ID u16 3A00 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
IM_VERSION u8[2] 01.02 ✓ ✓
IM_SUPPORTED bit[16] 001E hex ✓ ✓


Technical data 10
10.1 Technical data, CU240B-2 Control Unit
Feature Data
Order numbers CU240B-2 With RS485 interface for the Article numbers: See Section
following protocols: Overview of Control Units
(Page 27)
• USS
• Modbus RTU
CU240B-2 DP With PROFIBUS interface
Operating voltage You have two options for the Control Unit power supply:
• Supply from the Power Module
• External supply via terminals 31 and 32 with 20.4 V … 28.8 V DC.
Use a power supply with protective extra low voltage (PELV according to EN 61800-5-1),
Class 2.
The 0 V of the power supply must be connected to the PE of the plant/system through a
low-ohmic connection.
The power supply is electrically isolated from the control terminals.
Current consumption max 0.5 A
Power loss 5.0 W Plus power loss of the output voltages.
Output voltages +24 V out (terminal 9),18 V … 28.8 V, max. 100 mA
+10 V out (terminals 1 and 35), 9.5 V … 10.5 V, max. 10 mA
Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz
Digital inputs 4 (DI 0 … DI 3) • Low < 5 V, high > 11 V
• Electrically isolated
• 30 V maximum input voltage
• 5.5 mA current consumption
• SIMATIC-compatible
• PNP/NPN switchable
• 10 ms response time for debounce time p0724 = 0.
Analog input 1 (AI 0) • Differential input
• 12-bit resolution
• 13 ms ± 1 ms response time
• Switchable:
– 0 V … 10 V or -10 V … +10 V (voltage < 35 V)
– 0 mA … 20 mA (120 Ω input resistance, voltage < 10 V,
current < 80 mA)
• If AI 0 has been configured as additional digital input: Voltage
< 35 V, low < 1.6 V, high > 4.0 V, 13 ms ± 1 ms response
time for debounce time p0724 = 0.

Technical data
10.1 Technical data, CU240B-2 Control Unit
Feature Data
Digital output 1 (DO 0) • Relay output, 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A for ohmic loads
• Update time 2 ms
For applications which require UL certification, the voltage at DO 0 must not exceed 30 VDC
referred to ground potential and must be supplied via a grounded class 2 power supply.
Analog output 1 (AO 0) • 0 V … 10 V or 0 mA … 20 mA
• Reference potential: "GND"
• 4 ms update time
Temperature sensor PTC • Short-circuit monitoring 22 Ω
• Switching threshold 1650 Ω
KTY84 • Short-circuit monitoring < 50 Ω
• Wire break > 2120 Ω
Temperature switch with isolated contact.
USB interface Mini-B
Dimensions (WxHxD) 73 mm × 199 mm × 39 mm The depth specification is valid when mounting on the Power
Module.
Weight 0.49 kg
Memory cards Slot for SD or MMC memory cards, see also: Overview of Control Units (Page 27)
Operating temperature -10 °C … 55 °C Without inserted operator panel
0° C … 50° C With inserted BOP-2 or IOP operator panel
Observe any possible restrictions regarding the operating temperature as a result of the Power
Module.
Storage temperature - 40° C … 70° C
Relative humidity < 95% Condensation is not permissible.

Technical data
10.2 Technical data, CU240E-2 Control Unit
Feature Data
Fieldbus interface CU240E-2, CU240E-2 F With RS485 interface for the Article numbers: See Section
following protocols: Overview of Control Units
(Page 27)
• USS
• Modbus RTU
CU240E-2 DP, With PROFIBUS interface
CU240E-2 DP-F
CU240E-2 PN, With PROFINET interface
CU240E-2 PN-F
Operating voltage You have two options for the Control Unit power supply:
• Supply from the Power Module
• External supply via terminals 31 and 32 with 20.4 V … 28.8 V DC.
Use a power supply with protective extra low voltage (PELV according to EN 61800-5-1),
Class 2.
The 0 V of the power supply must be connected to the PE of the plant/system through a
low-ohmic connection.
The power supply is electrically isolated from the control terminals.
Current consumption max 0.5 A
Power loss 5.0 W Plus power loss of the output voltages.
Output voltages +24 V out (terminal 9),18 V … 28.8 V, max. 100 mA
+10 V out (terminals 1 and 35), 9.5 V … 10.5 V, max. 10 mA
Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz
Digital inputs 6 (DI 0 … DI 5) • Low < 5 V, high > 11 V
• Electrically isolated
• 30 V maximum input voltage
• 5.5 mA current consumption
• SIMATIC-compatible
• PNP/NPN switchable
• 10 ms response time for debounce time p0724 = 0.
Pulse input 1 (DI 3) Maximum frequency 32 kHz
Analog inputs 2 (AI 0, AI 1) • Differential input
• 13 ms ± 1 ms response time
• AI 0 and AI 1 can be switched over:
– 0 V … 10 V or -10 V … +10 V (voltage < 35 V)
– 0 mA … 20 mA (120 Ω input resistance, voltage < 10 V,
current < 80 mA)
• If AI 0 and AI 1 are configured as supplementary digital in-
puts: Voltage < 35 V, low < 1.6 V, high > 4.0 V, 13 ms ± 1 ms
response time for debounce time p0724 = 0.

Technical data
Feature Data
Digital outputs 3 (DO 0 … DO 2) • DO 0: Relay output, 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive load
• DO 1: Transistor output, 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive
load, protection against incorrect voltage polarity.
• DO 2: Relay output, 30 V DC / max. 0.5 A with resistive load.
For applications which require UL certification, the voltage at DO 0 must not exceed 30 VDC
referred to ground potential and must be supplied via a grounded class 2 power supply.
Analog outputs 2 (AO 0, AO 1) • 0 V … 10 V or 0 mA … 20 mA
• Reference potential: "GND"
Temperature sensor PTC • Short-circuit monitoring 22 Ω
• Switching threshold 1650 Ω
KTY84 • Short-circuit monitoring < 50 Ω
• Wire break > 2120 Ω
Temperature switch with isolated contact.
Fail-safe digital input 1 (DI 4 and DI 5) • If you have enabled the basic functions of the safety func-
tions, DI 4 and DI 5 form the fail-safe digital input.
• Maximum input voltage 30 V, 5.5 mA
• Response time:
– Typical: 5 ms + debounce time p9651
– Typical, if debounce time = 0: 6 ms
– Worst-case scenario: 15 ms + debounce time
– Worst case, if debounce time = 0: 16 ms
The data of the extended safety functions can be found in the Safety Integrated Function Man-
ual, see also Section: Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).
PFH 5 × 10E-8 Probability of failure of the safety functions (Probability of Failure
per Hour)
USB interface Mini-B
Dimensions (WxHxD) 73 mm × 199 mm × 39 mm The depth specification is valid when mounting on the Power
Module.
Weight 0.49 kg
Memory cards Slot for SD or MMC memory cards, see also: Overview of Control Units (Page 27)
Operating temperature -10 °C … 55 °C CU240E-2, CU240E-2 F, CU240E-2 DP, CU240E-2 DP-F
Without inserted operator panel
-10 °C … 53 °C CU240E-2 PN, CU240E-2 PN-F
Without inserted operator panel
0° C … 50° C With inserted BOP-2 or IOP operator panel
Observe any possible restrictions regarding the operating temperature as a result of the Power
Module.

Technical data
Feature Data
Storage temperature - 40° C … 70° C
Relative humidity < 95% Condensation is not permissible.
Note
Short-term voltage dips in the external 24 V supply (≤ 3 ms and ≤ 95% of the rated voltage)
When the mains voltage of the inverter is switched off, the inverter responds to short-term
voltage dips in the external 24 V supply with fault F30074. Communication via fieldbus,
however, remains in effect in this case.

Technical data
10.3 Technical data, Power Modules
Overload capability of the inverter

Overload capability is the property of the inverter to temporarily supply a current that is
higher than the rated current to accelerate a load. Two typical load cycles are defined to
clearly demonstrate the overload capability: "Low Overload" and "High Overload"
Table 10- 1 Load cycles and typical applications:
“Low Overload” load cycle "High Overload" load cycle

The "Low Overload" load cycle assumes a uni- The "High Overload" load cycle permits, for re-
form base load with low requirements placed on duced base load, dynamic accelerating phases.
brief accelerating p phases. Typical applications Typical applications when designing according to
when designing according to "Low Overload" "High Overload" include:
include:
• Horizontal and vertical conveyor technology
• Pumps, fans and compressors (conveyor belts, roller conveyors, chain con-
• Wet or dry blasting technology veyors)
• Mills, mixers, kneaders, crushers, agitators • Centrifuges
• Basic spindles • Escalators/moving stairways
• Rotary kilns • Lifters/Lowerers
• Extruders • Elevators
• Gantry cranes
• Cable railways
• Storage and retrieval machines
Definitions
● Base load
Constant load between the accelerating phases of the drive
Low Overload High Overload

• LO base load input current • HO base load input current
Permissible input current for a “Low Overload” Permissible input current for a “High Over-
load cycle load” load cycle
• LO base load output current • HO base load output current
Permissible output current for a “Low Over- Permissible output current for a “High Over-
load” load cycle load” load cycle
• LO base load power • HO base load power
Rated power based on the LO base load out- Rated power based on the HO base load out-
put current put current
If not specified otherwise, the power and current data in the technical data always refer to a
load cycle according to Low Overload.
We recommend the "SIZER" engineering software to select the inverter. You will find
additional information about SIZER on the Internet at: Download SIZER

Technical data
10.3.1 Technical data, PM240-2
10.3.1.1 High overload - low overload PM240-2
Typical inverter load cycles
Figure 10-1 "Low Overload" and "High Overload" load cycles
10.3.1.2 General data, 200 V inverters
Property Version
Line voltage FSA … FSC 200 V … 240 V 1-ph. AC for LO base load power 0.55 kW … 4 kW
± 10 % for HO base load power 0.37 kW … 3 kW
200 V … 240 V 3-ph. AC for LO base load power 0.55 kW … 7.5 kW
± 10 % for HO base load power 0.37 kW … 5.5 kW
FSD … FSE 200 V … 240 V 3-ph. AC -20 % / + 10 %
Output voltage 3 AC 0 V … 0.95 x input voltage (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Line impedance FSA … FSC: Uk ≥ 2 %, for lower values, we recommend a line reactor, or a Power Module
with the next higher power rating.
Not applicable for FSD and FSE
Power factor λ FSA … FSC 0.7 without line reactor for Uk ≥ 2 %
0.85 with line reactor for Uk < 2%
FSD … FSE 0.95 line reactor is not required
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage category acc. The inverter insulation is designed for surge voltages according to overvoltage Category III.
to EN 60664-1
Pulse frequency 4 kHz (factory setting),
Can be set in 2 kHz steps in the range from 2 kHz … 16 kHz. If you increase the pulse fre-
quency, the inverter reduces the maximum output current.
Short-circuit current rating ≤ 65 kA rms
(SCCR)

Technical data
Property Version
Electromagnetic compati- Devices with integrated filter are suitable for Category C2 environments according to IEC/EN
bility 61800-3.
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking chopper
Degree of protection ac- Chassis de- IP20 Must be installed in a control cabinet
cording to EN 60529 vices IP20, IP54 Must be installed in a control cabinet at the control cabinet panel
PT devices
Ambient temperature for LO base load power without derating: -20 °C … +40 °C
HO base load power without derating: -20 °C … +50 °C
LO/HO base load power with derating: -20 °C … + 60° C
Details see Section Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 431).
For the maximum permissible ambient temperature, also observe the permissible ambient
temperatures for the Control Unit and possibly operator panel (IOP or BOP-2) .
Ambient conditions accord- FSA … FSC Protected against damaging chemical substance, according to environmental
ing to EN 60721-3-3 Class 3C2
FSD … FSE Protected against damaging chemical substance, according to environmental
Class 3C3
Temperature during stor- -40 °C … +70 °C
age according to EN
60721-3-3
Cooling air clean and dry air
Relative humidity < 95% - condensation not permissible
Pollution according to EN suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2
61800-5-1
Shocks and vibration ac- • Long-term storage in the transport packaging according to Class 1M2
cording to EN 60721-3-1
• Transport in the transport packaging according to Class 2M3
• Vibration in operation according to Class 3M2
Installation altitude without derating up to 1000 m above sea level
with derating up to 4000 m above sea level
Approvals FSA … FSC cULus, CE, C-tick, KCC
FSD … FSE cULus, CE, C-tick, SEMI F47, KCC,WEEE, RoHS, EAC

Technical data
10.3.1.3 Power-dependent data, 200 V inverters
Table 10- 2 PM240-2, IP20, frame sizes A, 1 AC / 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1PB13-0UL0 …1PB13-8UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1PB13-0AL0 …1PB13-8AL0
LO base load power 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
LO base load input current 1 AC 7.5 A 9.6 A
LO base load output current 3.2 A 4.2 A
HO base load power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW
HO base load input current 1 AC 6.6 A 8.4 A
HO base load output current 2.3 A 3.2 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 803 (10 A) 3NA3 805 (16 A)
Fuse according to UL 15 A Class J 15 A Class J
Power losses without filter 0.04 kW 0.04 kW
Power losses with filter 0.04 kW 0.04 kW
Required cooling air flow 5 l/s 5 l/s
Weight without filter 1.4 kg 1.4 kg
Weight with filter 1.6 kg 1.6 kg
Table 10- 3 PM240-2, PT, frame sizes A, 1 AC / 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3211… …1PB13-8UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3211… …1PB13-8AL0
LO base load power 0.75 kW
LO base load input current 1 AC 9.6 A
LO base load output current 4.2 A
HO base load power 0.55 kW
HO base load input current 1 AC 8.4 A
HO base load output current 3.2 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 805 (16 A)
Fuse according to UL 15 A Class J
Power losses without filter 0.04 kW
Power losses with filter 0.04 kW
Required cooling air flow 5 l/s
Weight without filter 1.8 kg
Weight with filter 2.0 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 4 PM240-2, IP20, frame sizes B, 1 AC / 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1PB15-5UL0 …1PB17-4UL0 …1PB21-0UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1PB15-5AL0 …1PB17-4AL0 …1PB21-0AL0
LO base load power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
LO base load input current 1 AC 13.5 A 18.1 A 24.0 A
LO base load input current 3 AC 7.8 A 9.7 A 13.6 A
LO base load output current 6A 7.4 A 10.4 A
HO base load power 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
HO base load input current 1 AC 11.8 A 15.8 A 20.9 A
HO base load input current 3 AC 5.5 A 7.8 A 9.7 A
HO base load output current 4.2 A 6A 7.4 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NE 1814-0 (20 A) 3NE 1815-0 (25 A) 3NE 1803-0 (35 A)
Fuse according to UL 35 A Class J 35 A Class J 35 A Class J
Power losses without filter 0.05 kW 0.07 kW 0.12 kW
Power losses with filter 0.05 kW 0.07 kW 0.12 kW
Required cooling air flow 9.2 l/s 9.2 l/s 9.2 l/s
Weight without filter 2.8 kg 2.8 kg 2.8 kg
Weight with filter 3.1 kg 3.1 kg 3.1 kg
Table 10- 5 PM240-2, PT, frame sizes B, 1 AC / 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3211… …1PB21-0UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3211… …-1PB21-0AL0
Fuse according to IEC 3NE 1803-0 (35 A)
Power losses without filter 0.12 kW 1)
Power losses with filter 0.12 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 9.2 l/s
1) approx. 0.08 through the heatsink

Technical data
Table 10- 6 PM240-2, IP 20, frame sizes C, 1 AC / 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… ...1PB21-4UL0 …1PB21-8UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1PB21-4AL0 ...1PB21-8AL0
LO base load power 3 kW 4 kW
HO base load power 2.2 kW 3 kW
Fuse according to IEC 3NE 1817-0 (50 A) 3NE 1818-0 (63 A)
Required cooling air flow 18.5 l/s 18.5 l/s
Table 10- 7 PM240-2, PT, frame sizes C, 1 AC / 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3211… ...1PB21-8UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3211… …1PB21-8AL0
LO base load power 4 kW
HO base load power 3 kW
Power losses without filter 0.18 kW 1)
Power losses with filter 0.18 kW 1)
1) approx. 0.09 through the heatsink

Technical data
Table 10- 8 PM240-2, IP 20, frame sizes C, 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… ...1PC22-2UL0 …1PC22-8UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1PC22-2AL0 ...1PC22-8AL0
LO base load input current 28.6 A 36.4 A
HO base load power 4 kW 5.5 kW
HO base load input current 22.8 A 28.6 A
Table 10- 9 PM240-2, IP20, FSD, 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PC24-2UL0 …1PC25-4UL0 …1PC26-8UL0

LO base load power 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
LO base load input current 40 A 51 A 64 A
LO base load output current 42 A 54 A 68 A
HO base load power 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
HO base load input current 36 A 43 A 56 A
HO base load output current 35 A 42 A 54 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3NE1818-0 / 63A 3NE1 820-0 / 80A 3NE1 021-0 / 100A
Fuse according to IEC/UL, Class J 60 A 80A 90 A
Power loss 0.42 kW 0.57 kW 0.76 kW
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s 55 l/s 55 l/s
Weight 17 kg 17 kg 17 kg
Table 10- 10 PM240-2, IP20, FSE, 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PC28-8UL0 …1PC31-1UL0

LO base load input current 76 A 98 A
LO base load output current 80 A 104 A
HO base load input current 71 A 83 A
HO base load output current 68 A 80 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3 NE1 021-0 / 100A 3 NE1 224-0 / 160A
Fuse according to IEC/UL, Class J 100 A 150 A
Power loss 0.85 kW 1.20 kW
Weight 26 kg 26 kg

Technical data
Current derating depending on the pulse frequency
Current derating depending on the pulse frequency 1) for 200 V devices
Article number LO base load output current for a pulse frequency of …

[A]
4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
6SL3210-1PB13-0❒L0 3.2 2.6 2.1 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.2
6SL321❒-1PB13-8❒L0 4.2 3.3 2.7 2.3 2.0 1.8 1.6
6SL3211-1PB15-5❒L0 6.0 4.7 3.9 3.3 2.8 2.5 2.2
6SL3210-1PB17-4❒L0 7.4 6.3 5.2 4.4 3.7 3.3 3.0
6SL321❒-1PB21-0❒L0 10.4 8.8 7.3 6.2 5.2 4.7 4.2
6SL3210-1PB21-4❒L0 13.6 11.6 9.5 8.2 6.8 6.1 5.4
6SL321❒-1PB21-8❒L0 17.5 14.9 12.3 10.5 8.8 7.9 7.0
6SL3210-1PC22-2❒L0 22.0 18.7 15.4 13.2 11.0 9.9 8.8
6SL3210-1PC22-8❒L0 28.0 23.8 19.6 16.8 14.0 12.6 11.2
6SL3210-1PC24-2❒L0 42 35.7 29.4 25.2 21.0 18.9 16.8
6SL3210-1PC25-4❒L0 54 45.9 37.8 32.4 27.0 24.3 21.6
6SL3210-1PC26-8❒L0 68 57.8 47.6 40.8 34.0 30.6 27.2
6SL3210-1PC28-8❒L0 80 68.0 56.0 48.0 40.0 36.0 32.0
6SL3210-1PC31-1❒L0 104 88.4 72.8 62.4 52.0 46.8 41.6
1)The permissible motor cable length also depends on the cable type and the selected pulse fre-
quency.

Technical data
Property Version
Line voltage FSA … FSC 380 V … 480 V 3-ph. AC ± 10 %
FSD … FSE 3 AC 380 V … 480 V -20 %, +10 %
Line impedance Uk ≥ 1 %, for lower values, we recommend a line reactor, or a Power Module with the next
higher power rating.
Power factor λ FSA … FSC 0.7 without line reactor for Uk ≥ 1 %
0.85 with line reactor for Uk < 1 %
FSD … FSE 0.95 (line reactor not required)
to EN 60664-1
Pulse frequency 4 kHz (factory setting)
Can be adjusted in 2 kHz steps in the range from 2 kHz … 16 kHz.
Restriction: from a LO base load power of 55 kW up to 8 kHz.
The output current is reduced if you increase the pulse frequency.
(SCCR)
Electromagnetic compati- Devices with integrated filter are suitable for Category C2 environments.
bility according to IEC/EN
61800-3
Degree of protection ac- Chassis de- IP20 Must be installed in a control cabinet
cording to EN 60529 vices IP20, IP54 Must be installed in a control cabinet
PT devices at the control cabinet panel
Details see Section Power-dependent data, FSD ... FSF, 600 V (Page 403).
Ambient conditions accord- FSA … FSC: Protected against damaging chemical substance, according to environmental
ing to EN 60721-3-3 Class 3C2
FSD … FSE Protected against damaging chemical substance, according to environmental
Class 3C3
age according to EN
60721-3-3
61800-5-1

Technical data
Property Version
Installation altitude without derating: up to 1000 m above sea level
with derating: up to 4000 m above sea level
Approvals FSA … FSC cULus, CE, C-tick, KCC
FSD … FSE cULus, CE, C-tick, SEMI F47, KCC,WEEE, RoHS, EAC

Technical data
10.3.1.5 Power-dependent data, 400 V inverters
Table 10- 11 PM240-2, IP20, frame sizes A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1PE11-8UL1 …1PE12-3UL1 …1PE13-2UL1

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1PE11-8AL1 …1PE12-3AL1 …1PE13-2AL1
LO base load input current 2.3 A 2.9 A 4.1 A
LO base load output current 1.7 A 2.2 A 3.1 A
HO base load input current 2.0 A 2.6 A 3.3 A
HO base load output current 1.3 A 1.7 A 2.2 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 804 (4 A) 3NA3 804 (4 A) 3NA3 801 (6 A)
Table 10- 12 PM240-2, IP20, frame sizes A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 803 (10 A) 3NA3 803 (10 A) 3NA3 805 (16 A)

Technical data
Table 10- 13 PM240-2, PT, frame sizes A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3211… …1PE18-0UL1

Article No. - with filter 6SL3211… …1PE18-0AL1
LO base load input current 10.1 A
HO base load input current 8.8 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 805 (16 A)
Power loss without filter 0.12 kW 1)
1) approx. 0.1 kW through the heatsink
Table 10- 14 PM240-2, IP20, frame sizes B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

Fuse according to IEC 3NE 1814-0 (20 A) 3NE 1815-0 (25 A) 3NE 1803-0 (35 A)

Technical data
Table 10- 15 PM240-2, PT, frame sizes B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3211… ...1PE21-8UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3211… ...1PE21-8AL0
Power loss 0.2 kW 1)
1) approx. 0.16 kW through the heatsink;
Table 10- 16 PM240-2, IP20, frame sizes C, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1PE22-7UL0 …1PE23-3UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1PE22-7AL0 …1PE23-3AL0

Technical data
Table 10- 17 PM240-2, PT, frame sizes C, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3211… ...1PE23-3UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3211… ...1PE23-3AL0
Power loss 0.37 kW 1)
1) approx. 0.3 kW through the heatsink;
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PE23-8UL0 …1PE24-5UL0 …1PE26-0UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-… …1PE23-8AL0 …1PE24-5AL0 …1PE26-0AL0
LO base load power 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW
HO base load power 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3NE1 818-0 / 63 A 3NE1 820-0 / 80 A 3NE1 021-0 / 100A
Fuse according to IEC/UL, Class J 60 A 70 A 90 A
Power loss without filter 0.55 kW 0.68 kW 0.76 kW
Power loss with filter 0.56 kW 0.68 kW 0.77 kW
Weight without filter 16 kg 16 kg 17 kg

Technical data
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PE27-5UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-… …1PE27-5AL0
LO base load input current 70 A
LO base load output current 75 A
HO base load input current 62 A
HO base load output current 60 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3NE1 021-0 / 100 A
Fuse according to IEC/UL, Class J 100 A
Power loss without filter 1.01 kW
Power loss with filter 1.02 kW
Weight without filter 17 kg
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PE28-8UL0 …1PE31-1UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-… …1PE28-8AL0 …1PE31-1AL0
HO base load power 37 kW 45 kW
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3NE1 022-0 / 125A 3NE1 224-0 / 160A
Weight without filter 26kg 26 kg
Weight with filter 28 kg 28 kg

Technical data

[A]
6SL3210-1PE11-8❒L1 1.7 1.4 1.2 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7
6SL3210-1PE12-3❒L1 2.2 1.9 1.5 1.3 1.1 1.0 0.9
6SL3211-1PE13-2❒L1 3.1 2.6 2.2 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.2
6SL3210-1PE14-3❒L1 4.1 3.5 2.9 2.5 2.1 1.8 1.6
6SL3210-1PE16-1❒L1 5.9 5.0 4.1 3.5 3.0 2.7 2.4
6SL321❒-1PE18-0❒L1 7.7 6.5 5.4 4.6 3.9 3.5 3.1
6SL3210-1PE21-1❒L0 10.2 8.7 7.1 6.1 5.1 4.6 4.1
6SL3210-1PE21-4❒L0 13.2 11.2 9.2 7.9 6.6 5.9 5.3
6SL321❒-1PE21-8❒L0 18.0 15.3 12.6 10.8 9.0 8.1 7.2
6SL3210-1PE22-7❒L0 26.0 22.1 18.2 15.6 13.0 11.7 10.4
6SL321❒-1PE23-3❒L0 32.0 27.2 22.4 19.2 16 14.4 12.8
6SL3210-1PE23-8❒L0 38 32.3 26.6 22.8 19.0 17.1 15.2
6SL3210-1PE24-5❒L0 45 38.3 31.5 27.0 22.5 20.3 18.0
6SL3210-1PE26-0❒L0 60 51.0 42.0 36.0 30.0 27.0 24.0
6SL3210-1PE27-5❒L0 75 63.8 52.5 45.0 37.5 33.8 30.0
6SL3210-1PE28-8❒L0 90 76.5 63.0 54.0 45.0 40.5 36.0
6SL3210-1PE31-1❒L0 110 93.5 77.0 66.0 55.0 49.5 44.0
quency.

Technical data
Property Version
Line voltage 3 AC 500 V … 690 V -20% … +10 %
Power factor λ > 0.9
to EN 60664-1
Pulse frequency 2 kHz (factory setting), can be adjusted to 4 kHz
The output current is reduced if you increase the pulse frequency.
(SCCR)
Electromagnetic compati- Devices with integrated filter are suitable for Category C2 environments.
bility according to IEC/EN
61800-3
Degree of protection ac- IP20; must be installed in a control cabinet
cording to EN 60529
Ambient conditions accord- Protected against damaging chemical substance, according to environmental Class 3C3
ing to EN 60721-3-3
age according to EN
60721-3-3
61800-5-1
Installation altitude without derating: up to 1000 m above sea level
with derating: up to 4000 m above sea level
Approvals cULus, CE, C-tick, SEMI F47, KCC,WEEE, RoHS, EAC

Technical data
10.3.1.7 Power-dependent data, FSD ... FSE, 600 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PH21-4UL0 …1PH22-0UL0 …1PH22-3UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-… …1PH21-4AL0 …1PH22 -0AL0 …1PH22 -3AL0
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3NE1 815-0 / 25 A 3NE1 815-0 / 25 A 3NE1 803-0 / 32 A
Power loss without filter 0.32 kW 0.41 kW 0.48 kW
Power loss with filter 0.32 kW 0.41 kW 0.48 kW
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PH22-7UL0 …1PH23-5UL0 …1PH24-2UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-… …1PH22 -7AL0 …1PH23 -5AL0 …1PH24 -2AL0
LO base load power 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW
LO base load output current 27A 35 A 42 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3NE1 803 / 35 A 3NE1 817 / 50 A 3NE1 818 / 63 A
Power loss without filter 0.56 kW 0.72 kW 0.88kW
Power loss with filter 0.56 kW 0.73kW 0.88 kW

Technical data
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-… …1PH25-2UL0 …1PH26-2UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-… …1PH25-2AL0 …1PH26 -2AL0
LO base load output current 52 A 62A
Siemens fuse according to IEC/UL 3NA1 820 / 80A 3NE1 820 / 80A
Power loss without filter 1.00 kW 1.21 kW
Power loss with filter 1.00 kW 1.22 kW
Weight without filter 26 kg 26 kg

[A]
2 kHz 4 kHz
6SL3210-1PH21-4❒L0 14 8.4
6SL3210-1PH22-0❒L0 19 11.4
6SL3210-1PH22-3❒L0 23 13.8
6SL3210-1PH22-7❒L0 27 16.2
6SL3210-1PH23-5❒L0 35 21
6SL3210-1PH24-2❒L0 42 25.2
6SL3210-1PH25-2❒L0 52 31.2
6SL3210-1PH26-2❒L0 62 37.2
quency.

Technical data
10.3.2 Technical data, PM240
Figure 10-2 "High Overload" and "Low Overload" load cycles

Technical data
10.3.2.1 General data, PM240
Property Version
Line voltage 380 V … 480 V 3-ph. AC ± 10 %
Output voltage 0 V 3-ph. AC … input voltage x 0.95 (max.)
Output frequency 0 Hz … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Power factor λ 0.7 ... 0.85
Pulse frequency (factory 4 kHz for Can be set in 2 kHz steps in the range from 2 kHz … 16 kHz. If you
setting) 0.37 kW ... 90 kW increase the pulse frequency, the inverter reduces the maximum
2 kHz for output current.
110 kW ... 250 kW
Electromagnetic compatibil- The devices are suitable for environments, Categories C1 and C2 according to IEC/EN
ity 61800-3: 2004.
Degree of protection IP20 chassis units
Ambient operating tempera- 0 °C … +40 °C LO base load power 0.37 kW ... 250 kW
ture HO base load power 132 kW … 200 kW
0 °C … +50 °C HO base load power 0.37 kW ... 110 kW
Up to 60° C with derating, see also Restrictions for special ambient conditions
(Page 431)
Storage temperature -40 °C … +70 °C
Pollution Protected according to pollution degree 2 to EN 61800-5-1: 2007
Environmental requirements Protected against damaging chemical substances according to environmental class 3C2 to
EN 60721-3-3; 1995
Shock and vibration • Long-term storage in the transport packaging according to Class 1M2 to EN 60721-3-1:
1997
• Transport in the transport packaging according to Class 2M3 to EN 60721-3-2: 1997
• Vibration during operation according to Class 3M2 to EN 60721-3-3: 1995
Installation altitude up to 1000 m above 0.37 kW ... 1
sea level 32 kW
up to 2000 m above 160 kW ... 25
sea level 0 kW
up to 4000 m above with derating, see also Restrictions for special ambient conditions
sea level (Page 431)
Standards UL, cUL, CE, C-tick, SEMI F47
The drive only satisfies the UL requirements when UL-certified fuses are used.

Technical data
10.3.2.2 Power-dependent data, PM240
Note
The given input currents are valid for operation without a line reactor for a line voltage of 400
V with Vk = 1 % referred to the rated power of the inverter. If a line reactor is used, the
specified values are reduced by a few percent.
Note
The values for Low Overload (LO) are identical with those of the rated values.
Table 10- 24 PM240, IP20, frame sizes A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3224-… …0BE13-7UA0 …0BE15-5UA0 …0BE17-5UA0

Fuse according to UL (from SIEMENS) 3NE1813-0, 16 A 3NE1813-0, 16 A 3NE1813-0, 16 A
Fuse according to UL (Class J, K-1 or K-5) 10 A 10 A 10 A
Cross section of line and motor cables 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
18 … 14 AWG 18 … 14 AWG 18 … 14 AWG
Tightening torque for line and motor cables 0.5 Nm / 4 lbf in 0.5 Nm / 4 lbf in 0.5 Nm / 4 lbf in
Weight 1.2 kg 1.2 kg 1.2 kg
Table 10- 25 PM240, IP20, frame sizes A, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3224-… …0BE21-1UA0 …0BE21-5UA0

Fuse according to UL (from SIEMENS) 3NE1813-0, 16 A 3NE1813-0, 16 A
Fuse according to UL (Class J, K-1 or K-5) 10 A 10 A
Cross section of line and motor cables 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
18 … 14 AWG 18 … 14 AWG
Tightening torque for line and motor cables 0.5 Nm / 4 lbf in 0.5 Nm / 4 lbf in
Weight 1.1 kg 1.1 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 26 PM240, IP20, frame sizes B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

Article No. - with filter 6SL3224-… …0BE22-2AA0 …0BE23-0AA0 …0BE24-0AA0
Cross section of line and motor cables 1.5 … 6 mm2 1.5 … 6 mm2 1.5 … 6 mm2
16 … 10 AWG 16 … 10 AWG 16 … 10 AWG
Table 10- 27 PM240, IP20, frame sizes C, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

HO base load power 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW
HO base load output current 13.2 A 19 A 26 A
Cross section of line and motor cables 4 … 10 mm2 4 … 10 mm2 4 … 10 mm2
12 … 8 AWG 12 … 8 AWG 12 … 8 AWG
Weight with filter 7 kg 7 kg 7 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 28 PM240, IP20, frame sizes D, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

Fuse according to UL (SIEMENS) 3NE1817-0 3NE1818-0 3NE1820-0
Fuse according to UL (Class J) --- --- ---
0.42 kW 0.52 kW 0.69 kW
7 … 2 AWG 7 … 2 AWG 5 … 2 AWG
Tightening torque for line and motor cables 6 Nm / 53 lbf in 6 Nm / 53 lbf in 6 Nm / 53 lbf in
Table 10- 29 PM240, IP20, frame sizes E, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

Article No. - with filter 6SL3224-… …0BE33-0AA0 …0BE33-7AA0
Fuse according to UL (SIEMENS) 3NE1021-0 3NE1022-0
Fuse according to UL (Class J) --- ---
Cross section of line and motor cables 25 … 35 mm2 25 … 35 mm2
3 … 2 AWG 3 … 2 AWG
Tightening torque for line and motor cables 6 Nm / 53 lbf in 6 Nm / 53 lbf in

Technical data
Table 10- 30 PM240, IP20, frame sizes F, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

LO base load output current 110 A A 145 A 178 A
HO base load power 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
Fuse according to UL (Class J) 150 A, 600 V 200 A, 600 V 250 A, 600 V
Power losses without filter 1.4 kW 1.9 kW 2.3 kW
Power losses with filter 1.5 kW 2.0 kW 2.4 kW
2 … 4/0 AWG 2/0 … 4/0 AWG 3/0 … 4/0 AWG
Table 10- 31 PM240, IP20, frame sizes F, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

Fuse according to UL (SIEMENS) 3NE1227-0 3NE1230-0
Fuse according to UL (Class J) 300 A, 600 V 400 A, 600 V
3/0 … 4/0 AWG 3/0 … 4/0 AWG
Weight 39 kg 39 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 32 PM240 frame sizes GX, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3224-… …0XE41-3UA0 …0XE41-6UA0 …0XE42-0UA0

Fuse according to UL (Class J) --- --- ---
Power loss, 3.9 kW 4.4 kW 5.5 kW
Cross section of line and motor cables 95 ... 2 x 240 mm2 120 ... 2 x 240 mm2 185 ... 2 x 240 mm2
3/0 … 2 x 600 AWG 4/0 … 2 x 600 AWG 6/0 … 2 x 600 AWG

Technical data
Relationship between pulse frequency and output base-load current reduction

LO base Output base-load current at pulse frequency of
load 2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
kW A A A A A A A A
0.37 -- 1.30 1.11 0.91 0.78 0.65 0.59 0.52
0.55 -- 1.70 1.45 1.19 1.02 0.85 0.77 0.68
0.75 -- 2.20 1.87 1.54 1.32 1.10 0.99 0.88
1.1 -- 3.10 2.64 2.17 1.86 1.55 1.40 1.24
1.5 -- 4.10 3.49 2.87 2.46 2.05 1.85 1.64
2.2 -- 5.90 5.02 4.13 3.54 2.95 2.66 2.36
3.0 -- 7.70 6.55 5.39 4.62 3.85 3.47 3.08
4.0 -- 10.20 8.67 7.14 6.12 5.10 4.59 4.08
7.5 -- 18.00 16.20 13.30 11.40 9.50 8.60 7.60
11.0 -- 25.00 22.10 18.20 15.60 13.00 11.70 10.40
15.0 -- 32.00 27.20 22.40 19.20 16.00 14.40 12.80
18.5 -- 38.00 32.30 26.60 22.80 19.00 17.10 15.20
22 -- 45.00 38.25 31.50 27.00 22.50 20.25 18.00
30 -- 60.00 52.70 43.40 37.20 31.00 27.90 24.80
37 -- 75.00 63.75 52.50 45.00 37.50 33.75 30.00
45 -- 90.00 76.50 63.00 54.00 45.00 40.50 36.00
55 -- 110.0 93.50 77.00 -- -- -- --
75 -- 145.0 123.3 101.5 -- -- -- --
90 -- 178.0 151.3 124.6 -- -- -- --
110 205.0 178.0 -- -- -- -- -- --
132 250.0 205.0 -- -- -- -- -- --
160 302.0 250.0 -- -- -- -- -- --
200 370.0 302.0 -- -- -- -- -- --
250 477.0 370.0 -- -- -- -- -- --

Technical data
10.3.3 Technical data, PM230 IP20
Figure 10-3 Duty cycles, "High Overload" and "Low Overload"

Technical data
10.3.3.1 General data, PM230 - IP20
Property Version
Output frequency 0 Hz … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Power factor λ 0.9
Line impedance Uk ≤ 1%, no line reactor permitted
Pulse frequency (factory set- 4 kHz
ting) The pulse frequency can be increased in 2 kHz steps up to 16 kHz (up to 8 kHz for 55 kW
and 75 kW). An increase in the pulse frequency results in a lower output current.
Electromagnetic compatibility Devices with filters in compliance with EN 61800-3: 2004 are suitable for Category C2
environments.
Braking methods DC braking
Degree of protection IP20 built-in units IP20 when mounted in a control cabinet
PT devices IP54 on the control cabinet wall
Operating temperature at LO base load power without derating 0 °C … +40 °C
HO base load power without derating 0 °C … +50 °C
LO/HO base load power with derating: Up to 60° C
Details - (Page 431).
Environmental requirements Protected against damaging chemical substances according to environmental class 3C2
to EN 60721-3-3; 1995
Shock and vibration • Long-term storage in the transport packaging according to Class 1M2 to
EN 60721-3-1: 1997
Installation altitude without derating: up to 1000 m above For details, see Restrictions for special ambient
with derating: sea level conditions (Page 431)
up to 4000 m above
sea level
Permissible short-circuit cur- Frame size D ... F: 65 kA 1)
rent
Overvoltage category Supply circuits: Overvoltage category III
Non-supply circuits: Overvoltage category II
Standards UL 1),2), CE, C-tick
1) If fuse-protected with a listed Class J or 3NE1 fuse, rated voltage 600 VAC with the rated current of the specific inverter.
2) UL available soon for frame sizes D … F

Technical data
10.3.3.2 Power-dependent data, PM230, IP20
Note
Table 10- 33 PM230, IP20, frame sizes A, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1NE11-3UL1 …1NE11-7UL1 …1NE12-2UL1

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1NE11-3AL1 …1NE11-7AL1 …1NE12-2AL1
Fuse according to IEC 3NE1 813-0 3NE1 813-0 3NE1 813-0
Fuse according to UL AJT2 / 3NE1 813-0 AJT4 / 3NE1 813-0 AJT4 / 3NE1 813-0
Cross section of line and motor cables 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2
18 … 14 AWG 18 … 14 AWG 18 … 14 AWG
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1NE13-1UL1 …1NE14-1UL1 …-1NE15-8UL1

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1NE13-1AL10 …1NE14-1AL1 …-1NE15-8AL1
Cross section of line and motor cables 1 … 2.5 mm2 1 … 2.5 mm2 1.5 … 2.5 mm2
18 … 14 AWG 18 … 14 AWG 16 … 14 AWG

Technical data
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1NE17-7UL1

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1NE17-7AL1
Fuse according to IEC 3NE1 813-0
Fuse according to UL AJT10 / 3NE1 813-0
Power loss 0.11 kW
Cross section of line and motor cables 1.5 … 2.5 mm2
16 … 14 AWG
Tightening torque for line and motor cables 0.5 Nm / 4 lbf in
Table 10- 36 PM230, PT, frame sizes A, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V

Power loss 0.11 kW
Cross section of line and motor cables 1.5 … 2.5 mm2
16 … 14 AWG

Technical data
Table 10- 37 PM230, IP20, frame sizes B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

LO base load power 4 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
LO base load output current 10.2 A 13.2 A 18 A
HO base load power 3 kW 4 kW 5.5 kW
16 … 10 AWG 16 … 10 AWG 16 … 10 AWG
Table 10- 38 PM230, PT, frame sizes B, 3-ph. 380 V AC… 480 V

Power loss 0.22 kW
Cross section of line and motor cables 1.5 … 6 mm2
16 … 10 AWG

Technical data
Table 10- 39 PM230, IP20, frame sizes C, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V

Cross section of line and motor cables 6 …16 mm2 6 …16 mm2 6 …16 mm2
10 … 6 AWG 10 … 6 AWG 10 … 6 AWG
Table 10- 40 PM230, PT, frame sizes C, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V

HO base load output current 32 A
Power loss 0.45 kW
Cross section of line and motor cables 6 …16 mm2
10 … 6 AWG
Weight with filter 6 kg

Technical data
Table 10- 41 PM230, IP20, frame sizes D, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3210… …1NE24-5UL0 …1NE26-0UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210… …1NE24-5AL0 …1NE26-0AL0
Fuse according to IEC 3NE1818-0 3NE1820-0
Fuse according to UL 3NE1818-0 3NE1820-0
5 … 2 AWG 5 … 2 AWG
Table 10- 42 PM230, IP20, frame sizes E, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V

3 … 1-1/0 AWG 3 … 1-1/0 AWG

Technical data
Table 10- 43 PM230, IP20, frame sizes F, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V

2 … 4/0 AWG 2 … 4/0 AWG

Technical data
Current reduction depending on pulse frequency
Table 10- 44 Current reduction depending on the pulse frequency1)
LO base Output base-load current at a pulse frequency of

load 2 kHz 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
kW A A A A A A A A
0.37 -- 1.30 1.11 0.91 0.78 0.65 0.59 0.52
0.55 -- 1.70 1.45 1.19 1.02 0.85 0.77 0.68
0.75 -- 2.20 1.87 1.54 1.32 1.10 0.99 0.88
1.1 -- 3.10 2.64 2.17 1.86 1.55 1.40 1.24
1.5 -- 4.10 3.49 2.87 2.46 2.05 1.85 1.64
2.2 -- 5.90 5.02 4.13 3.54 2.95 2.66 2.36
3.0 -- 7.70 6.55 5.39 4.62 3.85 3.47 3.08
4.0 -- 10.20 8.67 7.14 6.12 5.10 4.59 4.08
5.5 -- 13.20 11.22 9.24 7.92 6.60 5.94 5.28
7.5 -- 18.00 15.30 12.60 10.80 9.00 8.10 7.20
11.0 -- 26.00 22.10 18.20 15.60 13.00 11.70 10.40
15.0 -- 32.00 27.20 22.40 19.20 16.00 14.40 12.80
18.5 -- 38.00 32.30 26.60 22.80 19.00 17.10 15.20
22 -- 45.00 38.25 31.50 27.00 22.50 20.25 18.00
30 -- 60.00 51.00 42.00 36.00 30.00 27.00 24.00
37 -- 75.00 63.75 52.50 45.00 37.50 33.75 30.00
45 -- 90.00 76.50 63.00 54.00 45.00 40.50 36.00
55 -- 110.0 93.50 77.00 66.00 55.00 49.50 44.00
75 -- 145.0 123.3 101.5 -- -- -- --
1) The permissible motor cable length also depends on the cable type and the selected pulse fre-
quency.

Technical data
10.3.4.1 High Overload - Low Overload
Figure 10-4 Load cycles "Low Overload" and "High Overload"

Technical data
Property Version
Input frequency 47 Hz … 63 Hz
Power factor λ 0.9
Pulse frequency (factory 4 kHz
setting) The pulse frequency can be adjusted up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. The higher the pulse
frequency, the lower the available output current. For details, see Power-dependent data,
PM250 (Page 424).
Electromagnetic compatibil- The devices comply with EN 61800-3: 2004 suitable for Category C1 and C2 environments.
ity
Braking methods DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
For details, see Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 431).
EN 60721-3-3; 1995
1997
Installation altitude without derating: up to 1000 m above sea For details, see Restrictions
with derating: level for special ambient condi-
up to 4000 m above sea tions (Page 431)
level
Standards UL, CE, CE, SEMI F47

Technical data
Note
Table 10- 45 PM250, IP20, frame sizes C, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V
Article No. - with filter 6SL3225-… 0BE25-5AA0 0BE27-5AA0 0BE31-1AA0

HO base load power 5. 5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW
HO base load input current 13.2 A 19 A 26 A
HO base load output current 13.2 A 19 A 26 A
Fuse 20 A, Class J 32 A, Class J 35 A, Class J
14 … 8 AWG 12 … 8 AWG 12 … 8 AWG
Table 10- 46 PM250, IP20, frame sizes D, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V

Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 3NA3822 3NA3824
Fuse according to UL 50 A, Class J 63 A, Class J 80 A, Class J
7 … 2 AWG 7 … 2 AWG 6 … 2 AWG

Technical data
Table 10- 47 PM250, IP20, frame sizes E, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V
Article No. - with filter 6SL3225-… 0BE33-0AA0 0BE33-7AA0

Fuse according to IEC 3NA3830 3NA3832
Fuse according to UL 100 A, Class J 125 A, Class J
3 … 2 AWG 3 … 2 AWG
Weight 21 kg 21 kg
Table 10- 48 PM250, IP20, frame sizes F, 3 AC 380 V … 480 V

Fuse according to IEC 3NA3836 3NA3140 3NA3144
Fuse according to UL 160 A, Class J 200 A, Class J 250 A, Class J
2 … 4/0 AWG 2 … 4/0 AWG 2 … 4/0 AWG

Technical data
Relationship between pulse frequency and current reduction
Table 10- 49 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency
Rated Base load Base load current (LO) at pulse frequency of

Power current
(LO) (LO)
kW A A A A A A A
7.5 18.0 12.5 11.9 10.6 9.20 7.90 6.60
11 25.0 18.1 17.1 15.2 13.3 11.4 9.50
15 32.0 24.7 23.4 20.8 18.2 15.6 12.8
18.5 38.0 32.3 26.6 22.8 19.0 17.1 15.2
22 45.0 38.3 31.5 27.0 22.5 20.3 18.0
30 60.0 51.0 42.0 36.0 30.0 27.0 24.0
37 75.0 63.8 52.5 45.0 37.5 33.8 30.0
45 90.0 76.5 63.0 54.0 45.0 40.5 36.0
55 110 93.5 77.0 -- -- -- --
75 145 123 102 -- -- -- --
90 178 151 125 -- -- -- --

Technical data
10.3.5.1 High Overload - Low Overload
Figure 10-5 Load cycles "Low Overload" and "High Overload"

Technical data
Property Version
Line voltage 660 V ... 690 V 3-ph. AC ± 10%
The power units can also be operated with a minimum voltage of 500 V –10 %. In this case,
the power is linearly reduced.
Power factor λ 0.9
Pulse frequency 16 kHz
Electromagnetic compatibil- The devices comply with EN 61800-3: 2004 suitable for Category C1 and C2 environments.
ity
Braking methods DC braking, energy recovery (up to 100% of the output power)
For details, see Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).
EN 60721-3-3; 1995
1997
Installation altitude without derating: up to 1000 m above sea For details, see Manuals for your
with derating: level inverter (Page 460)
up to 4000 m above sea
level
Standards CE, C-TICK

Technical data
Note
Table 10- 50 PM260, IP20, frame sizes D - 3 AC 660 V … 690 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3225-… 0BH27-5UA1 0BH31-1UA1 0BH31-5UA1

Article No. - with filter 6SL3225-… 0BH27-5AA1 0BH31-1AA1 0BH31-5AA1
Fuse 20 A 20 A 32 A
Power losses without filter
Power losses with filter
Cross section of line and motor cables 2.5 … 16 mm2 4 … 16 mm2 6 … 16 mm2
14 … 6 AWG 12 … 6 AWG 10 … 6 AWG
Sound pressure level < 64 dB(A) < 64 dB(A) < 64 dB(A)
Table 10- 51 PM260, IP20, frame sizes F - 3 AC 660 V … 690 V
Article No. - without filter 6SL3225-… 0BH32-2UA1 0BH33-0UA1 0BH33-7UA1

Article No. - with filter 6SL3225-… 0BH32-2AA1 0BH33-0AA1 0BH33-7AA1
Fuse 50 A 50 A 80 A
Power losses without filter
Power losses with filter
8 … 2 AWG 6 … 2 AWG 4 … 2 AWG
Sound pressure level < 70 dB(A) < 70 dB(A) < 70 dB(A)

Technical data
10.3.6 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation

You can find data regarding power loss in partial load operation in the Internet:
Partial load operation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/94059311)

Technical data
10.4 Restrictions for special ambient conditions
Current de-rating depending on the ambient operating temperature
The Control Unit and operator panel can restrict the maximum permissible operating ambient
temperature of the Power Module.
Current derating depending on the installation altitude

Above 1000 m above sea level you must reduce the inverter output current as a result of the
lower cooling capability of the air.

Technical data
Permissible line supplies depending on the installation altitude

● Installation altitude up to 2000 m above sea level
– Connection to every supply system permitted for the inverter.
● Installation altitudes between 2000 m and 4000 m above sea level
– Connection to a TN system with grounded neutral point.
– TN systems with grounded line conductor are not permitted.
– The TN line system with grounded neutral point can also be supplied using an
isolation transformer.
– The phase-to-phase voltage does not have to be reduced.
Note
690 V Power Modules
For 690 V Power Modules, the TN line system must be established with grounded neutral
point through an isolating transformer.

Appendix A
A.1 New and extended functions
Table A- 1 New functions and function changes in Firmware 4.7 SP3
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
1 PM240-2 Power Modules, frame sizes FSD and FSE are sup- - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
ported
The Safety Integrated basic function Safe Torque Off (STO) is - - - - ✓ ✓ - - -
supported via the terminals of the PM240-2 Power Module,
frame sizes FSD and FSE
2 Revised PM230 Power Module with new Article numbers sup- - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
ported:
• IP55 degree of protection: 6SL3223-0DE . . - . . G .
• IP20 degree of protection and Push Through: 6SL321 . -
1NE . . - . . G .
The Safety Integrated basic function Safe Torque Off (STO) is - - - - ✓ - - - -
supported with the revised PM230 Power Module
3 PM330 Power Module, frame size HX is supported - - ✓ - - - - - -
4 1FP1 reluctance motors are supported - - ✓ - - - - - -
5 Encoderless 1FK7 synchronous motors are supported - ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) - -
6 Encoderless 1FG1 geared synchronous motors are supported - ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
7 SINAMICS “Standard Drive Control” and “Dynamic Drive Con- - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
trol” application classes to simplify commissioning and increase
the degree of ruggedness of the closed-loop motor control.
SINAMICS application classes are only available with PM240,
PM240-2 and PM330 Power Modules.
8 Moment of inertia estimator with moment of inertia precontrol to ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
optimize the speed controller in operation
9 Friction torque characteristic with automatic plotting to optimize ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
the speed controller
10 Automatic optimization of the technology controller - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
11 The sign of the system deviation for the additional, free tech- - - ✓ - - - - - -
nology controller can be switched over.
A new parameter defines the sign of the system deviation
matching the particular application, e.g. for cooling or heating
applications.

Appendix
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
12 Line contactor control using a digital output of the inverter to ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
save energy when the motor is switched off
13 Fast flying restart for PM330 Power Modules: - - ✓ - - - - - -
The "Flying restart" function does not have to wait for the motor
demagnetization time, and identifies the motor speed without
requiring a search operation.
14 Load torque monitoring extended to include the following func- - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
tions:
• Protection against blocking, leakage and dry running opera-
tion in pump applications
• Protection against blocking and broken belts in fan applica-
tions
15 Automatic switchover of the real time clock from daylight saving - - ✓ - - - - - -
time (summer time) to standard time (winter time).
16 New or revised default settings of the interfaces: p0015 macros - - ✓ - - - - - -
110, 112 and 120
17 Expansion of the temperature sensors to include DIN-Ni1000 - - ✓ - - - - - -
for analog inputs AI 2 and AI 3
18 Communication via AS-Interface. ✓ - - - - - - - -
Default setting of the communication via AS-i: p0015 macros
30, 31, 32 and 34
19 Communication expansion via Modbus: - - ✓ - - - - - -
Adjustable parity bit, access to parameters and analog inputs
20 Extending communication via BACnet: - - ✓ - - - - - -
Access to parameters and analog inputs
21 The bus error LED for communication via USS and Modbus can ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
be switched off
1) Operation with 1FK7 synchronous motors without encoder has already been released with firmware V4.7 for SINAMICS
G120D with CU240D-2 Control Units.
In the preface you can find references to the description of the new functions: Changes in
this manual (Page 5).

Appendix
Table A- 2 New functions and function changes in Firmware 4.7
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
1 Supporting the identification & maintenance datasets (I&M1 … 4) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

2 Fall in pulse rate with increased drive power required by the motor ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• The inverter temporarily lowers the pulse frequency if required
when the motor is started up, and simultaneously increases the
current limit.
3 S7 communication ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Direct data exchange between the inverter and human-machine
interface (HMI).
• Increase in communication performance with the engineering
tools and support of the S7 routing
4 The basic functions of Safety Integrated are unrestrictedly available - - - - - - ✓ -
in all control types with 1FK7 encoderless permanent-field syn-
chronous motors
5 Direct selection of the 1FK7 encoderless permanent-field synchro- - - - - - - ✓ -
nous motors using the Article No. with allocated code number
• It is not necessary to input individual motor data
6 Pulse input as source of setpoint value - - - - - ✓ - -
• The inverter calculates its speed setpoint from a sequence of
pulses at the digital input.
7 Dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP) and temporary device ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
names for PROFINET
8 PROFIenergy Slave profile 2 and 3 ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9 Uniform behavior for component replacement ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• After a component is replaced, an inverter with activated Safety
Integrated will report what type of component has been re-
placed using a unique code.
10 Improved direct-component control in PM230 - - ✓ - - - - -
• Optimized efficiency for pump and fan applications
11 Rounding down of BACnet and macros - - ✓ - - - - -

Appendix
Table A- 3 New functions and function changes in Firmware 4.6.6
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
1 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ - - - - -

• PM330 IP20 GX

Appendix
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
1 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -

• PM240-2 IP20 FSB … FSC
• PM240-2 in through-hole technology FSB ... FSC
2 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
• PM230 in through-hole technology FSD ... FSF
3 Motor data preassignment for the 1LA/1LE motors via code number ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• During basic commissioning with the operator panel, set the motor
data using a code number
4 Extension to communication via CANopen ✓ ✓ - - ✓ - -
• CAN velocity, ProfilTorque, SDO channel for each axis, system test
with CodeSys, suppression of ErrorPassiv alarm
5 Extension to communication via BACnet - ✓ - - - - -
• Multistate value objects for alarms, commandable AO objects, ob-
jects for configuring the PID controller
6 Communication via EtherNet/IP ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7 Skip frequency band for analog input ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
• A symmetrical skip frequency band can be set for each analog input
around the 0 V range.
8 Changing the control of the motor holding brake ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
9 Safety function SBC (Safe Brake Control) - - - - ✓ - -
• Secure control of a motor holding brake when using the "Safe
Brake Module" option
10 Safety function SS1 (Safe Stop 1) without speed monitoring - - - - ✓ - -
11 Straightforward selection of standard motors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Selection of 1LA... and 1LE... motors with an operator panel using a
list containing code numbers
12 Firmware update via memory card ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
13 Safety info channel - - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• BICO source r9734.0…14 for the status bits of the extended safety
functions
14 Diagnostic alarms for PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Appendix
Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
1 Support for the new Power Modules: - ✓ ✓ ✓ - -

• PM230 IP20 FSA … FSF
• PM230 in a push-through FSA … FSC
2 Support for the new Power Modules: - ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
• PM240-2 IP20 FSA
• PM240-2 in push-through FSA
3 New Control Units with PROFINET support ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓
4 Support of the PROFIenergy profile ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓
5 Shared device support via PROFINET ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓
6 Write protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7 Know-how protection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
8 Adding a second command data set (CDS0 → CDS0 … CDS1) ✓ - - - - -
(All other inverters have four command data sets)
9 Position control and basic positioner - - - - - ✓
10 Support of an HTL encoder - - - - ✓ ✓
11 Support of an SSI encoder - - - - - ✓
12 Fail-safe digital output - - - - ✓ ✓

Appendix
A.2 Parameter
A.2 Parameter
Parameters are the interface between the firmware of the converter and the commissioning
tool, e.g. an Operator Panel.
Adjustable parameters
Adjustable parameters are the "adjusting screws" with which you adapt the converter to its
particular application. If you change the value of an adjustable parameter, then the converter
behavior also changes.
Adjustable parameters are shown with a "p" as prefix, e.g. p1082 is the parameter for the
maximum motor speed.
Display parameters
Display parameters allow internal measured quantities of the converter and the motor to be
read.
The Operator Panel and STARTER represent display parameters with an "r" prefix, for
example, r0027 is the parameter for the converter output current.
Parameters that in many cases help
Table A- 6 How to switch to commissioning mode or restore the factory setting
p0010 Commissioning parameters
0: Ready (factory setting)
1: Carry out basic commissioning
3: Carry out motor commissioning
5: Technological applications and units
15: Define number of data sets
30: Factory setting - initiate restore factory settings
Table A- 7 How to determine the firmware version of the Control Unit
r0018 Firmware version is displayed
Table A- 8 How to select the command and setpoint sources for the inverter
p0015 Additional information is available in Section Installing Control Unit (Page 80).

Appendix
A.2 Parameter
Table A- 9 How to set the ramp-up and ramp-down
p1080 Minimum speed
0.00 [rpm] factory setting
p1082 Maximum speed
1500.000 [rpm] factory setting
p1120 Ramp-up time
10.00 [s]
p1121 Ramp-down time
10.00 [s]
Table A- 10 This is how you set the closed-loop type
p1300 0: U/f control with linear characteristic
1: U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
2: U/f control with parabolic characteristic
3: U/f control with adjustable characteristic
4: U/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
5: U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency (textile area)
6: U/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7: U/f control with parabolic characteristic and ECO
19: U/f control with independent voltage setpoint
20: Speed control (without encoder)
22: Torque control (without encoder)
Not all Power Modules offer for selection all the listed control modes. The control modes permitted for your device are
offered during the commissioning.
Table A- 11 This is how you optimize the starting behavior of the U/f control for a high break loose torque and overload
p1310 Voltage boost to compensate ohmic losses
The voltage boost is active from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is at its highest at speed 0 and continually decreases as the speed increases.
Value of the voltage boost at speed 0 in V:
1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (r0395) × p1310 / 100%
p1311 Voltage boost when accelerating
The voltage boost is effective from standstill up to the rated speed.
It is independent of the speed and has a value in V of:
1.732 × rated motor current (p0305) × stator resistance (p0350) × p1311 / 100%
p1312 Voltage boost when starting
Setting to additionally boost the voltage when starting, however only when accelerating for the first time.

Appendix
A.2 Parameter
Table A- 12 How to change the inverter pulse frequency
p1800 Setting the inverter pulse frequency
The pulse frequency depends on the power unit. You can find the setting limits and the factory setting in
Section Technical data, Power Modules (Page 386).
If you increase the pulse frequency, the inverter output current decreases (the maximum output current is
displayed in r0076).
If you use a sine-wave filter, you can only set the pulse frequency to values that are permissible for the
filter.
When operated with an output reactor, the pulse frequency is limited to a maximum of 4 kHz.

Appendix
A.3 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel
1) Status display once the power supply for the inverter has been switched on.
Figure A-1 Menu of the BOP-2
Figure A-2 Other keys and symbols of the BOP-2

Appendix
A.3.1 Changing settings using BOP-2
Changing settings using BOP-2

You can modify the settings of your inverter by changing the values of the its parameters.
The inverter only permits changes to "write" parameters. Write parameters begin with a "P",
e.g. P45.
The value of a read-only parameter cannot be changed. Read-only parameters begin with an
"r", for example: r2.
Procedure
To change write parameters using the BOP-2, proceed as follows:
1. Select the menu to display and change

parameters.
Press the OK key.
2. Select the parameter filter using the
arrow keys.
Press the OK key.
– STANDARD: The inverter only
displays the most important
parameters.
– EXPERT: The inverter displays all
of the parameters.
3. Select the required number of a write parameter using the arrow keys.
Press the OK key.
4. Select the value of the write parameter using the arrow keys.
Accept the value with the OK key.
You have now changed a write parameter using the BOP-2.
The inverter saves all the changes made using the BOP-2 so that they are protected against
power failure.

Appendix
A.3.2 Changing indexed parameters
Changing indexed parameters

For indexed parameters, several parameter values are assigned to a parameter number.
Each of the parameter values has its own index.
Procedure
To change an indexed parameter, proceed as follows:
1. Select the parameter number.

2. Press the OK key.
3. Set the parameter index.
4. Press the OK key.
5. Set the parameter value for the selected index.
You have now changed an indexed parameter.
A.3.3 Directly entering the parameter number and value
Directly select the parameter number

The BOP-2 offers the possibility of setting the parameter number digit by digit.
Precondition
The parameter number is flashing in the BOP-2 display.
Procedure
To select the parameter number directly, proceed as follows:
1. Press the OK button for longer than five seconds.

2. Change the parameter number digit-by-digit.
If you press the OK button then the BOP-2 jumps to the
next digit.
3. If you have entered all of the digits of the parameter
number, press the OK button.
You have now entered the parameter number directly.

Appendix
Entering the parameter value directly

The BOP-2 offers the option of setting the parameter value digit by digit.
Precondition
The parameter value flashes in the BOP-2 display.
Procedure
To select the parameter value directly, proceed as follows:
1. Press the OK button for longer than five seconds.

2. Change the parameter value digit-by-digit.
If you press the OK button then the BOP-2 jumps to the
next digit.
3. If you have entered all of the digits of the parameter
value, press the OK button.
You have now entered the parameter value directly.
A.3.4 A parameter cannot be changed
When must you not change a parameter?

The converter indicates why it currently does not permit a parameter to be changed:
You have attempted to change You must change to basic You must turn the motor off to
a read-only parameter. commissioning to set this pa- set this parameter.
rameter.
The operating state in which you can change a parameter is provided in the List Manual for
each parameter.

Appendix
A.4 The device trace in STARTER
Description
The device trace graphically displays inverter signals with respect to time.
Signals
In two settings that are independent of one another, using you can interconnect eight
signals each.
Recording
You can start a measurement as frequently as you require. As long as you do not exit
START, the results remain under the "Measurements" tab with data and time. When
terminating STARTER or under the "Measurements" tab, you can save the measurement
results in the *.trc format.

Appendix
If you require more than two settings for your measurements, you can either save the
individual settings in the project or export them in *.clg format, and load or import them, if
necessary.
You can record individual bits of a parameter (e.g. r0722. 1) by allocating the relevant bit
using "bit track" ( ).
Using the mathematical function ( ) you can define a curve, for example, the difference
between the speed setpoint and the speed actual value.
The device trace shows "individual bits" or "mathematical functions" as signal No. 9.
Recording cycle and duration

The device trace records data in a CU-dependent basic cycle clock. The maximum recording
duration depends on the number of recorded signals and the trace clock cycle.
Proceed as follows to extend the recording duration:
1. Multiply the trace clock cycle by an integral number.
2. Accept the displayed maximum duration using .
Alternatively, you can also specify the measurement period and then calculate the trace
clock cycle of STARTER using .
Trigger (condition to start the device trace)

The device trace starts as soon as you press the (start trace) button.
Using the button , you can define another trigger to start the device trace.
The pretrigger defines the time in which the signals are traced before the trigger condition.
As a consequence, the trigger condition traces itself.
Example of a bit pattern as trigger:

You must define the pattern and value of a bit parameter for the trigger. To do so, proceed
as follows:
Using , select "Trigger to variable - bit pattern"
Using , select the bit parameter
Using , open the screen form in which you set the bits and their values for the start
condition

Appendix
① Select the bits for the trace trigger, upper row hex format, lower row binary format
② Define the bits for the trace trigger, upper row hex format, lower row binary format
Figure A-3 Trigger as bit pattern of r0722 (status of the digital inputs)
In the example, the trace starts if digital inputs DI 0 and DI 3 are high, and DI 2 is low. The
state of the other digital inputs is not relevant for the trigger condition.
Further, you can either set an alarm or fault as start condition.
Display options
In this area, you can set how the measurement results are displayed.
● Repeat measurement
This places the measurements that you wish to perform at different times above one
other.
● Arrange curves in tracks
This defines whether the device trace will show all measured values on a common zero
line or on separate zero lines.
● Measuring cursor On
This allows you to analyze the measuring intervals in more detail.
Save to device (memory card)

In this area, you define whether the device trace will save successive measurements in
directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/TRACE on a inserted memory card.
Displaying the measurements backed up on the memory card
Procedure
To display the measurements backed up on the memory card, proceed as follows:
1. Insert the memory card into a card reader.
2. Go to the "Measurements" tab in the device trace.
3. Open the read out ACX files with the "Open measurements" button.
STARTER shows the measurements backed up on the memory card.

Appendix
A.5 Interconnecting signals in the inverter
A.5.1 Fundamentals
The following functions are implemented in the converter:
● Open-loop and closed-loop control functions
● Communication functions
● Diagnosis and operating functions
Every function comprises one or several blocks that are interconnected with one another.
Figure A-4 Example of a block: Motorized potentiometer (MOP)
Most of the blocks can be adapted to specific applications using parameters.

You cannot change the signal interconnection within the block. However, the interconnection
between blocks can be changed by interconnecting the inputs of a block with the appropriate
outputs of another block.
The signal interconnection of the blocks is realized, contrary to electric circuitry, not using
cables, but in the software.
Figure A-5 Example: Signal interconnection of two blocks for digital input 0

Appendix
Binectors and connectors

Connectors and binectors are used to exchange signals between the individual blocks:
● Connectors are used to interconnect "analog" signals. (e.g. MOP output speed)
● Binectors are used to interconnect "digital" signals. (e.g. 'Enable MOP up' command)
Figure A-6 Symbols for binector and connector inputs and outputs
Binector/connector outputs (CO/BO) are parameters that combine more than one binector
output in a single word (e.g. r0052 CO/BO: status word 1). Each bit in the word represents a
digital (binary) signal. This summary reduces the number of parameters and simplifies
parameter assignment.
Binector or connector outputs (CO, BO or CO/BO) can be used more than once.
When must you interconnect signals in the converter?
If you change the signal interconnection in the converter, you can adapt the converter to a
wide range of requirements. This does not necessarily have to involve highly complex
functions.
Example 1: Assign a different function to a digital input.
Example 2: Switch the speed setpoint from the fixed speed to the analog input.
How much care is required when you change the signal interconnection?
Always take care when establishing internal signal interconnections. Note which changes
you make as you go along since the process of analyzing them later can be quite difficult.
The STARTER commissioning tool offers signals in plain text and simplifies their
interconnection.
Where can you find additional information?
● This manual is sufficient for simple signal interconnections (e.g. assigning a different
function to digital inputs).
● The parameter list in the List Manual is sufficient for more complex signal
interconnections.
● You can also refer to the function diagrams in the List Manual for complex signal
interconnections.

Appendix
A.5.2 Example
Moving a basic control logic into the inverter

A conveyor system is to be configured in such a way that it can only start when two signals
are present simultaneously. These could be the following signals, for example:
● The oil pump is running (the required pressure level is not reached, however, until after 5
seconds)
● The protective door is closed
To implement this task, you must insert free function blocks between digital input 0 and the
command to switch on the motor (ON/OFF1).
Figure A-7 Example: Signal interconnection for control logic
The signal of digital input 0 (DI 0) is fed through a time block (PDE 0) and is interconnected
with the input of a logic block (AND 0). The signal of digital input 1 (DI 1) is interconnected to
the second input of the logic block. The logic block output issues the ON/OFF1 command to
switch-on the motor.
Setting the control logic
p20161 = 5 The time block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time slice of
128 ms)
p20162 = 430 Run sequence of the time block within runtime group 5 (processing before
the AND logic block)
p20032 = 5 The AND logic block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time
slice of 128 ms)
p20033 = 440 Run sequence of the AND logic block within runtime group 5 (processing
after the time block)
p20159 = 5000.00 Setting the delay time [ms] of the time module: 5 seconds
p20158 = 722.0 Connect the status of DI 0 to the input of the time block
r0722.0 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 0.
p20030[0] = 20160 Interconnect the timer block to the 1st input of the AND
p20030[1] = 722.1 Interconnect the status of DI 1 with the 2nd AND input
r0722.1 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 1.
p0840 = 20031 Interconnect the AND output to ON/OFF1

Appendix
Explanation of the example using the ON/OFF1 command

Parameter p0840[0] is the input of the "ON/OFF1" block of the inverter. Parameter r20031 is
the output of the AND block. To interconnect ON/OFF1 with the output of the AND block, set
p0840 = 20031.
Figure A-8 Interconnecting blocks by setting p0840[0] = 20031
Principle for interconnecting blocks

Always interconnect the input (connector or binector input) with the signal source.

Appendix
A.6 Connecting the safety-related input
A.6 Connecting the safety-related input

The following examples show the interconnection of the safety-related input accordance with
PL d to EN 13849-1 and SIL2 according to IEC61508. You can find further examples and
information in the Safety Integrated Function Manual.
The examples comply with PL d according to EN 13849-1 and SIL2 according to IEC 61508
for the case that all components are installed within one control cabinet.
Figure A-9 Connecting a sensor, e.g. Emergency Stop mushroom pushbutton or limit switch
Figure A-10 Connecting a safety relay, e.g. SIRIUS 3TK28
Figure A-11 Connecting an F digital output module, e.g. SIMATIC F digital output module
You can find additional connection options and connections in separate control cabinets in
the Safety Integrated Function Manual, see Section: Manuals for your inverter (Page 460).

Appendix
A.7 Acceptance tests for the safety functions
A.7.1 Recommended acceptance test

The following descriptions for the acceptance test are recommendations that illustrate the
principle of acceptance. You may deviate from these recommendations if you check the
following once you have completed commissioning:
● Correct assignment of the interfaces of each converter with the safety function:
– Fail-safe inputs
– PROFIsafe address
● Correct setting of the STO safety function.
Note
Perform the acceptance test with the maximum possible velocity and acceleration in
order to test the expected maximum braking distances and braking times.
Note
Non-critical alarms
The following alarms are issued following each system ramp-up and are not critical for
acceptance:
• A01697
• A01796

Appendix
Figure A-12 Acceptance test for STO (basic functions)
Procedure
To perform an acceptance test of the STO function as part of the basic functions, proceed as
follows:
Status
1. The inverter is ready
• The inverter signals neither faults nor alarms of the safety functions (r0945[0…7],
r2122[0…7]).
• STO is not active (r9773.1 = 0).

2. Switch on motor
2.1. Enter a speed setpoint ≠ 0.
2.2. Switch on the motor (ON command).
2.3. Check that the correct motor is running.
3. Select STO
3.1. Select STO while the motor is running.
Test each configured activation, e.g. via digital inputs and PROFIsafe.
3.2. Check the following:
When controlled via When controlled via fail- When controlled via
PROFIsafe safe digital inputs (F-DI) terminals STO_A and
STO_B on Power Mod-
ule PM240-2

Appendix
Status
• The inverter signals • The inverter signals • The inverter signals
the following: the following: the following:
"STO selection via "STO Selection via "STO Selection via
PROFIsafe" terminal" terminal on Power
(r9772.20 = 1) (r9772.17 = 1) Module"
(r9772.25 = 1)
• If a mechanical brake is not available, the motor coasts down.

A mechanical brake brakes the motor and holds it to ensure that it remains
at standstill.
• The inverter signals neither faults nor alarms of the safety functions
(r0945[0…7], r2122[0…7]).
• The inverter signals the following:

"STO is selected" (r9773.0 = 1).
"STO is active" (r9773.1 = 1).
4. Deselect STO
4.1. Deselect STO.
4.2. Check the following:
• STO is not active (r9773.1 = 0).
• The inverter signals neither faults nor alarms of the safety functions
(r0945[0…7], r2122[0…7]).
You have performed the acceptance test of the STO function.

Appendix
A.7.2 Machine documentation
Machine or plant description

Designation …
Type …
Serial number …
Manufacturer …
End customer …
Block diagram of the machine and/or plant:
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Inverter data
Table A- 13 Hardware version of the safety-related inverter
Labeling the drive Article number and hardware version of the inverter
… …
… …
Function table
Table A- 14 Active safety functions depending on the operating mode and safety equipment
Operating mode Safety equipment Drive Selected safety function Checked

… … … …
… … … …
Example:
Automatic Protective door closed Conveyor belt --- ---
Protective door open Conveyor belt STO
Emergency Stop button Conveyor belt STO
pressed
Acceptance test reports
File name of the acceptance reports

… …
… …

Appendix
Data backup
Data Storage medium Holding area

Archiving type Designation Date
Acceptance test reports … … … …
PLC program … … … …
Circuit diagrams … … … …
Countersignatures
Commissioning engineer
This confirms that the tests and checks have been carried out properly.
Date Name Company/dept. Signature

… … … …
Machine manufacturer
This confirms that the settings recorded above are correct.
Date Name Company/dept. Signature

… … … …

Appendix
A.7.3 Log of the settings for the basic functions, firmware V4.4 ... V4.7 SP2
Drive = <pDO-NAME_v>
Table A- 15 Firmware version
Name Number Value

Control Unit firmware version r18 <r18_v>
SI version, safety functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) r9770 <r9770_v>
Table A- 16 Monitoring cycle
Name Number Value

SI monitoring clock cycle (processor 1) r9780 <r9780_v>
Table A- 17 Checksums
Name Number Value

SI module identifier, Control Unit r9670 <r9670_v>
SI module identifier, Power Module r9672 <r9672_v>
SI reference checksum SI parameters (processor 1) p9799 <p9799_v>
SI reference checksum SI parameters (processor 2) p9899 <p9899_v>
Table A- 18 Settings of the safety functions
Name Number Value

SI enable, functions integrated in the drive p9601 <p9601_v>
Only for the CU250S-2 SI enable safe brake control p9602 <p9602_v>
Control Unit
SI PROFIsafe address p9610 <p9610_v>
F-DI switch over discrepancy time p9650 <p9650_v>
SI STO debounce time p9651 <p9651_v>
Only for the CU250S-2 SI Safe Stop 1 delay time p9652 <p9652_v>
Control Unit
SI forced dormant error detection timer p9659 <p9659_v>
SI forced checking procedure STO via PM terminals time p9661 <p9661_v>
Table A- 19 Safety logbook
Name Number Value

SI checksum to check changes r9781[0] <r9781[0]_v>
SI checksum to check changes r9781[1] <r9781[1]_v>
SI change control time stamp r9782[0] <r9782[0]_v>
SI change control time stamp r9782[1] <r9782[1]_v>

Appendix
A.8 Manuals and technical support
A.8.1 Manuals for your inverter
Documentation on DVD
SINAMICS Manual Collection, Article number 6SL3097-4CA00-0YG0
Table A- 20 Manuals for your inverter for download
Depth of Manual Contents Available Download

the infor- languages
mation
++ Compact operating instructions Installing the inverter and English, Ger- Manuals for the Control
for SINAMICS G120 inverters with commissioning. man, Italian, Unit
CU230P-2; CU240B-2 and French, Span- (http://support.automatio
CU240E-2 Control Units ish, Chinese n.siemens.com/WW/vie
+++ Operating instructions (this manual) w/en/30563628/133300)
+++ Function Manual for Safety Inte-

Configuring PROFIsafe. English, Ger-
grated Installing, commissioning man, Chinese
for the inverters SINAMICS and operating fail-safe func-
G110M, G120, G120C, G120D and tions of the inverter.
SIMATIC ET 200pro FC-2
+++ Fieldbus function manual Configuring fieldbuses.
for the SINAMICS G120, G120C
and G120D inverters
+++ List Manual Graphic function block dia-
for the SINAMICS G120 inverter grams.
with the CU240B-2; CU240E-2 Complete list of all parame-
Control Units ters, alarms and faults.
+ Getting Started Guide Installing the Power Module English Manuals for the Power
for the following SINAMICS G120 Modules
Power Modules: (http://support.automatio
n.siemens.com/WW/vie
• PM240, PM250 and PM260
w/en/30563173/133300)
• PM240-2
• PM230
+++ Hardware Installation Manual Installing power modules, English, Ger-
for the following SINAMICS G120 reactors and filters. man
Power Modules: Maintaining power modules.
• PM230 IP20
• PM230 IP55
• PM240
• PM240-2
• PM250
• PM260

Appendix
Depth of Manual Contents Available Download

the infor- languages
mation
+ Installation instructions Installing components English Manuals for the inverter
for reactors, filters and braking accessories
resistors (http://support.automatio
+++ Operating instructions Operating Operator Panels, English, Ger- n.siemens.com/WW/vie
for the following operator panels: door mounting kit for mount- man w/en/30563514/133300)
ing of IOP.
• BOP-2
• IOP
+++ Configuration Manual EMC-compliant control English, Ger- EMC installation guide-
EMC installation guideline cabinet design, potential man, Italian, line
equalization and cable rout- French, Span- (http://support.automatio
ing ish, Chinese n.siemens.com/WW/vie
w/en/60612658)
A.8.2 Configuring support
Table A- 21 Support when configuring and selecting the inverter
Manual or tool Contents Available Download or article number

languages
Catalog D 31 Ordering data and technical English, Ger- Everything about SINAMICS G120
information for SINAMICS G man, Italian, (www.siemens.en/sinamics-g120)
inverters French, Span-
ish
Online catalog (Industry Ordering data and technical English, Ger-
Mall) information for all SIEMENS man
products
SIZER The overall configuration tool for English, Ger- You obtain SIZER on a DVD
SINAMICS, MICROMASTER man, Italian, (Article number: 6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0)
and DYNAVERT T drives, motor French and in the Internet:
starters, as well as SINUMERIK, Download SIZER
SIMOTION controls and (http://support.automation.siemens.com/W
SIMATIC Technology W/view/en/10804987/130000)

Appendix
A.9 Mistakes and improvements
A.8.3 Product Support

You can find additional information on the product and more in the Internet under: Product
support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
In addition to our documentation, under this address we offer our complete knowledge base
online: You can find the following information:
● Actual product information (Update), FAQ (frequently asked questions), downloads.
● The Newsletter contains the latest information on the products you use.
● The Knowledge Manager (Intelligent Search) helps you find the documents you need.
● Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the
Forum.
● You can find your local representative for Automation & Drives via our contact database
under "Contact & Partner".
● Information about local service, repair, spare parts and much more can be found under
"Services".
A.9 Mistakes and improvements

If you come across any mistakes when reading this manual or if you have any suggestions
for how it can be improved, then please send your suggestions to the following address or by
E-mail:
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Motion Control
Postfach 3180
91050 Erlangen, Germany
E-mail (mailto:[email protected])

Index
Base load power, 386

Basic functions, 154
1 BF (Bus Fault), 362, 362, 363, 363
BICO block, 449
1FG1 geared synchronous motor without encoder, 46
Bimetallic switch, 241
1FK7 encoderless synchronous motor, 232
Binector input, 152
1FK7 synchronous motor without encoder, 46
Binectors, 450
Bit pattern test, 302
Block, 449
8
BOP-2
87 Hz characteristic, 75, 75 Installing, 115
Menu, 442
Symbols, 442
A Brake Relay, 76
Braking
Acceptance test, 309, 309
Regenerative, 263
Complete, 309
Braking functions, 256
Reduced scope of, 310, 357
Braking method, 256, 257
STO (basic functions), 455
Braking module, 262
Test scope, 310, 357
Braking resistor, 43, 262
Acceptance test record, 309
Break loose torque, 440
Acyclic communication, 186
Bus fault, 363
Adjustable parameters, 439
Bus termination, 81
Agitators, 117, 126, 135, 140
Alarm, 361, 365
Alarm buffer, 365
C
Alarm code, 365
Alarm history, 366 Catalog, 461
Alarm time, 365 CDS (Command Data Set), 194, 307, 308
Alarm value, 365 Centrifuge, 117, 126, 135, 140, 257, 260, 263
Ambient temperature, 245 Chain conveyors, 117, 126, 135, 140
Analog input, 84, 91 Characteristic
Function, 151, 159, 159, 163 Additional, 217
Analog output, 84, 91 Linear, 217, 218
Function, 151, 162 parabolic, 217, 218
Application square-law, 217, 218
Reading and writing parameters cyclically via Checklist
PROFIBUS, 183 PROFIBUS, 108
Automatic mode, 194 PROFINET, 106
Automatic restart, 270 Circuit diagram, 458
Autotuning, 281 Clockwise rotation, 164
Closed-loop torque control, 236
Command Data Set, 194
B Command source, 148
Selecting, 439
Base components, 56
Commissioning
Base load, 386
Accessories, 48
Base load input current, 386
Guidelines, 111
Base load output current, 386

Index
Communication Dimensions, 60, 65

Acyclic, 186 DIP switch
Cyclically, 171 Analog input, 157
Compound braking, 260, 261 Direct data exchange, 185
Compressor, 117, 126, 135, 140 Direction of rotation, 204, 204
Configuring support, 461 Direction reversal, 164
Connectors, 450 Discrepancy, 302
Consistency, 302 Filter, 302
Consistent signals, 302 Tolerance time, 302
Contact bounce, 302 Display parameters, 439
Control mode, 440 Distance connector, 28
Control terminals, 84, 91 Door mounting kit, 48
Control Units, 25, 27 Download, 320, 326, 329
Control word Download manuals, 460
Control word 1, 173, 188, 191 Drilling patterns, 60, 65
Control word 3, 176 Drive Data Set, DDS, 312
Control word 3 (STW3), 176 Drive Data Sets, 312
Controlling the motor, 164 Drive ES Basic, 48
Conveyor belt, 117, 126, 135, 140, 257 Droop, 226
Conveyor systems, 138 Dynamic braking, 262
Copy
Series commissioning, 310
Copy parameters (series commissioning), 310 E
Correction manual, 462
Electromechanical sensor, 453
Counter-clockwise rotation, 164
Elevator, 265
Countersignatures, 458
EMC, 50
Crane, 265
Emergency Stop button, 296
Crushers, 117, 126, 135, 140
EN 61800-5-2, 295
Current derating, 393
End customer, 457
Current input, 157
Energy recovery, 31
Current reduction, 412, 421, 426
Energy recovery option, 263
Cyclic communication, 173
Energy-saving display, 254
Extended functions, 154
Extruder, 117, 126, 135, 140, 240
D
Data backup, 315, 320, 325, 329, 458
Data set 47 (DS), 186 F
Data set changeover, 307, 308
Factory assignment, 84, 91
Data transfer, 320, 325, 329
Factory settings, 143
DC braking, 176, 258, 258, 258, 259, 259
Restoring the, 143, 143, 144, 145
DC-link overvoltage, 247
Fan, 30, 117, 126, 135, 140
DC-link voltage, 247
Fans, 138, 239
Delta connection (Δ), 75, 112
Fault, 361, 368
Derating
Acknowledge, 368, 369
Installation altitude, 432
Motor, 359
DI (Digital Input), 154
Fault buffer, 368
Digital input, 84, 91, 152, 164
Fault case, 368
Function, 151
Fault code, 368
Digital inputs
Fault history, 369
Multiple assignment, 307
Digital output, 84, 91
Function, 151, 156

Index
Fault time, 368 I

received, 368
I_max controller, 246
removed, 368
I2t monitoring, 238
Fault value, 368
Inclined conveyors, 262
FCC, 214
IND (page index), 181
F-DI (Fail-safe Digital Input), 154
Industry Mall, 461
F-digital output module, 453
Installation, 49, 49
FFC (Flux Current Control), 217
Installation altitude, 432
Field weakening, 75
Installing, 58
Fieldbus interfaces, 81, 82, 104
Interfaces, 81
Filter
Interlock, 451
Contact bounce, 302
Inverter
Discrepancy, 302
does not respond, 358
On/off test, 302
Update, 357
Firmware
Inverter accessories, 460
Update, 357
Inverter components, 25, 337
Firmware downgrade, 354
Inverter control, 148
Firmware version, 337, 433, 435, 436, 437, 439, 457
IT system, 68
Flow control, 278
Flux current control, 214
Flying restart, 268
J
Forced dormant error detection, 304
setting, 304 JOG function, 170
Formatting, 316
Free function blocks, 293
Function Manual for Safety Integrated, 460 K
Function table, 457
Kinetic buffering, 274
Functional expansions, 310
Kneaders, 117, 126, 135, 140
Functions
Know-how protection, 316, 332
BOP-2, 442
KTY84 sensor, 241
Overview, 147
Technological, 148
L
G LED
BF, 362, 362, 363, 363
Getting Started, 460
LNK, 362
Grinding machine, 257, 260
RDY, 362, 362
GSDML (Generic Station Description Markup
SAFE, 362
Language), 107
LED (light emitting diode), 361
Level control, 278
License, 316
H
Line contactor, 294
Hardware Installation Manual, 460 Line dip, 274
High Overload, 386 Line filter, 34, 35
Hoist drive, 263 Line supply cable, 74
Hoisting gear, 262, 265 Line supply type, 68
Horizontal conveyors, 240, 260, 262 Linear characteristic, 217, 218
Hotline, 462 List Manual, 460
LNK (PROFINET Link), 362
Load failure, 287, 289
Low Overload, 386

Index
M OFF3 ramp-down time, 210

ON command, 164
Machine description, 457
On/off test, 302
Main screen form (basic functions), 299, 300
Operating instruction, 21
Manual Collection, 460
Operating instructions, 460
Manual mode, 194
Operating mode, 457
Manuals, overview, 460
Operation, 150
Manufacturer, 457
Operator panel
Maximum cable length
BOP-2, 48, 442
PROFIBUS, 109
Door mounting kit, 48
Maximum cable lengths
Handheld, 48
PROFINET, 106
Installing, 115
Maximum current controller, 246
IOP, 48
Maximum speed, 114, 204, 440
Menu, 442
MELD_NAMUR (fault word according to the VIK-Namur
Optimizing the closed-loop speed controller, 224
definition), 178
Order number, 25
Memory cards, 27
Overload, 246, 440
Menu
Overload capability, 386
BOP-2, 442
Overview
Operator panel, 442
Section, 22
Mills, 117, 126, 135, 140
Overview of the functions, 147
Minimum speed, 114, 204, 207, 440
Overvoltage, 247, 247
Mistakes manual, 462
Mixers, 117, 126, 135, 140
MLFB (order number), 457
P
MMC (memory card), 316
Moment of inertia estimator, 230 Page index, 181
MOP (motorized potentiometer), 199 Parabolic characteristic, 217, 218
MotID (motor data identification), 121, 127 Parameter channel, 178
Motor cable, 74 IND, 181
Motor control, 148 Parameter index, 181
Motor data, 112 Parameter number, 181, 444
Identify, 121, 224, 236 Parameter types, 439
Identifying, 127 Parameter value, 445
measure, 121 Partial load operation, 430
measuring, 127 Password, 297
Motor fault, 359 PC Connection Kit, 48
Motor holding brake, 264, 264, 265, 265, 294 PELV, 381, 383
Motor standard, 250 PFH (Probability of failure per hour), 384
Motor temperature, 245 PID controller, 279
Motor temperature sensor, 84, 91, 243 Plant description, 457
Motorized potentiometer, 199 PLC functionality, 451
Multiple assignment PLC program, 458
Digital inputs, 307 Pole position, 235
Pole position identification, 235
Power distribution systems, 68
N Power failure, 270
Power Module, 25
Neutral conductor, 68
Power on reset, 145
Power-up time, 114
Pre-control, 233
O
Pressure control, 278
OFF1 command, 164 Probe, 291

Index
Procedure, 21 S
Process variables of the technology controller, 251
S7 communication, 104
PROFIBUS, 108
SAFE, 362
PROFIdrive, 104
Safe Brake Relay, 45, 76, 304
PROFIenergy, 104
Safety function, 148
PROFIsafe, 104
Safety Integrated Function Manual, 453
Protection functions, 148
Safety relay, 453
Protective conductor, 68
Safety-related input, 154
PTC sensor, 241
Saw, 257, 260
Pulse cancelation, 173
Scaling
Pulse enable, 173, 188, 191
Analog input, 158
Pulse frequency, 239, 240, 393, 412, 421, 426, 441
Analog output, 161
Pulse suppression, 188, 191
SD (memory card), 316
Pump, 30, 117, 126, 135, 138, 140
Formatting, 316
MMC, 316
Self-test, 304
Q
Sensor (electromechanical), 453
Questions, 462 Sequence control, 149
Quick stop, 149 Serial number, 457
Series commissioning, 310, 315
Setpoint processing, 148, 204
R Setpoint source, 148
Selecting, 197, 198, 199, 439
Radio interference class, 34
Settling time, 117, 126, 135, 140
Ramp-down, 440
Shield connection kit, 28
Ramp-down time, 114, 210, 212, 440
Short-circuit monitoring, 242
Scaling, 213
Signal interconnection, 449
Ramp-function generator, 204, 209
Signal states, 362
Ramp-up, 440
Sine-wave filter, 41
Rampup time,
SIZER, 461
Ramp-up time
Skip frequency band, 160, 204
Scaling, 213
Slip compensation, 214
RDY (Ready), 362, 362
Speed
Ready, 150
change with BOP-2, 442
Ready to switch on, 150
Limiting, 204
Regenerative feedback, 263
Speed control, 222
Regenerative operation, 256
Speed deviation, 287, 289
Replacing
Speed monitoring, 287, 289
Control Unit, 357
Spindle, 117, 126, 135, 140
Gearbox, 357
Square-law characteristic, 217, 218
Hardware, 357
Star connection (Y), 75
Motor, 357
Startdrive, 325
Power Module, 357
STARTER, 48, 130, 296, 325
Reset
Download, 48, 48
Parameter, 143, 143, 144, 145
STARTER commissioning tool, 296
Reversing, 204
STARTER PC tool, 296
Roller conveyors, 117, 126, 135, 140
Starting characteristics
Rotary furnace, 117, 126, 135, 140
Optimization, 219, 220
Rounding, 210
Starting current, 215
Rounding OFF3, 210
State overview, 149

Index
Status word U
Status word 1, 175
U/f control, 440
Status word 3, 177
Unit system, 251
Status Word
Unwinders, 263
Status word 1, 189, 192
Update (firmware), 357
STO (Safe Torque Off), 294, 294
Upgrading the firmware, 352
Acceptance test, 455
Upload, 317, 325, 329
Selecting, 294
USB cable, 48
Storage medium, 315
USB interface, 131
STW1 (control word 1), 173, 188, 191
Use for the intended purpose, 25
Subindex, 181
User interfaces, 81
Suggestions for improvement manual, 462
Support, 462
Switch off
V
Motor, 149
OFF1 command, 149 V/f characteristic, 214
OFF2 command, 149 VDC min controller, 274
OFF3 command, 149 Vector control, 224, 236, 440
Switch on Sensorless, 222
Motor, 149 Version
ON command, 149 Control Unit, 25
Switching on inhibited, 150, 173, 188, 191 Firmware, 457
Switching over units, 249 Hardware, 457
Switching-on a motor with BOP-2, 442 Power Module, 25
Switch-off signal paths, 304 Safety function, 457
Symbols, 21 Vertical conveyors, 262
System runtime, 364 Voltage boost, 214, 215, 219, 220, 440
Voltage input, 157
T
W
Technical data
Control Unit, 381, 383 Winders, 263
Technology controller, 176, 251, 278 Wire breakage, 302
Telegram Wire-break monitoring, 158, 242
Extending, 183 Write protection, 331, 331
Temperature calculation, 244
Temperature monitoring, 238, 244
Temperature sensor, 84, 91 Z
Temperature switch, 241
Ziegler Nichols, 282
Terminal block, 103, 151
ZSW1 (status word 1), 175, 189, 192
Terminal strip
ZSW3 (status word 3), 177
Factory setting, 84, 91
Test signals, 302
Three-wire control, 164, 164
TN line system, 68
Torque accuracy, 117, 126, 135, 140
Trace function, 446
TT line system, 68
Two-wire control, 164, 164
Type plate
Control Unit, 25
Power Module, 25


09b48b50 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

09b48b50 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

09b48b50 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SINAMICS G120C

Product information 07/2015

Modified behavior when commissioning the drive

CU240E-2 Control Units Fundamental safety

Edition 04/2015, Firmware V4.7 SP3

Siemens AG A5E34259001B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2010 - 2015.

Changes with respect to Edition 04/2014 of the Manual

New hardware In Chapter

New functions in firmware V4.7 SP3 In Chapter

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Revised descriptions In Chapter

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Changes in this manual ........................................................................................................................... 5

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

6.2.2.1 Digital inputs .........................................................................................................................152

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

6.5.3 Torque control ...................................................................................................................... 236

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

7.1 Backing up and transferring settings using a memory card..................................................316

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

10.3.1.4 General data, 400 V inverters .............................................................................................. 394

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF)

1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.4 Industrial security

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example,

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Who requires the operating instructions and what for?

What is described in the operating instructions?

What is the meaning of the symbols in the manual?

This concludes the operating instruction.

The subsequent text is applicable for an operator panel.

The following text applies if you are using a PC with STARTER.

Symbol for inverter functions.

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

2.2 Guide through the manual

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

3.1 Identifying the converter

Main components of the inverter

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

Additional inverter components

Converter with the CU240B-2 and CU240E-2 Control Units

3.2 Overview of Control Units

Table 3- 1 Control Units CU240B-2 …

Table 3- 2 Control Units CU240E-2 …

Designation CU240E-2 CU240E-2 F CU240E-2 DP CU240E-2 CU240E-2 PN CU240E-2

Table 3- 3 Memory cards to back up inverter settings

Scope of delivery Article number